Home

"user manual"

1. 253 Tables of screen sizes and dimensions 256 LenS SAUNG TANGE UU UE 257 Compatible Input Signal List dra atr a aon 259 ees 262 IHDBaSe T u u uu u u EENE O E AREE E PLAUEN CR ORE 262 IMM Meer 264 O Cabinet Dimensions aaa 266 Mounting the cable cover sold 267 Pin assignments and signal names of main 268 TO SIO ING u u uuu OE QE M 270 Indicator INIG SGA SIRE 270 Common Problems amp Solutions a a 272 If there is no picture or the picture is not displayed correctly 274 PC Control Codes and Cable Connection a 275 Troubleshooting 276 9 REGISTER YOUR PROJECTOR for residents the United States Canada and PY unun T T 278 xii 1 Introduction What s in the Box Make sure your box contains everything listed If any pieces are missing contact your dealer
2. m 134 134 Rue ied 135 135 VERSIONI 135 OUI kuu u 135 OTHER Lu E E 136 CONDITION G E E E 136 MOBA E To E T S EA 137 Application Menu MM Models a a 138 IMAGE EXPRESS UTILITY uuu Lu r ash Emi eden e Socr Suns 138 DESKTOP CONTROL UTILITY aka 138 NETWORK PROJEG FOM u u uuu u uuu n ukuy waqakuq 139 REMOTE DESKTOP CONNECTION 139 NETWORK oS qd see qe Pr 140 6 Connecting to Other 155 Q Mounting a lens sold separately 155 yir nnieRugcili fl 155 Removing the er 156 Making Connections sssri iore 157 Analog RGB signal connection 157 Digital RGB signal connection 158 Connecting an External Monitor d 161 Co
3. 20 Adjusting the vertical position of a projected image Lens shift 21 icr c aees 22 amp 23 Applicable lens NP11FL 24 7400 e 25 Adjusting the TIt u 25 Optimizing Computer Signal Automatically 26 Adjusting the Image Using Auto Adjust 26 Turning Up or Down 26 Turning off the Projector a a 27 U Cu T E 28 Convenient Features 1 1 1 essen 29 GD Turning off the Image and Sound 29 Freezing a Picture EE OTT 30 Enlarging MIR PI uuu k l u u uuu OS 30 Table of Contents Changing Eco Mode Checking Energy Saving Effect Using Eco Mode ECO MODE porene 31 Checking Energy Saving Effect CARBON METER
4. 85 Menu Descriptions amp Functions 89 PY 89 IMAGE OPTION5 93 VIDEO 97 Eius e m 99 Menu Descriptions amp Functions DISPLAY a 100 PIP PICTURE BY PICTURE 100 GEOMETRIC CORRECIION uuu on PE sapere rada 102 iX Table of Contents EDGE NIC E se E 106 107 Menu Descriptions amp Functions SETUFP 109 IMENU I 109 111 ONTROL oo 114 INE I OPE oe Na 122 SOURCE OPTIONS c 127 POV 129 Returning to Factory Default RESET 131 Menu Descriptions amp Functions INFO 133 133 sence 134 Eel uec
5. Memo pane mA RB 0 AstQtr 2ndQtr 3rd Qtr 4th Qtr chat amp Become A Presenter Presenter Administrator Attendant 1 E File Transfer d Memo Click 2 Click Save Image in the attendant window The image displayed in the attendant window will be saved e he saved image is added to the memo list and a thumbnail is displayed e A memo can be attached to the saved image REFERENCE n case of Windows a created file is saved to My Documents ImageExpress under the default settings In case of Windows Windows Vista Document mageExpress is the default folder to save a created file A folder is created below the default folder based on the time and date of the conference and the image is saved to a file in the created folder For example if a conference is held at 11 20 on May 14 2014 the default folder name on Windows will be My Documents ImageExpress2014 05 14 11 20 Meeting Records In this folder an HTML file named Meeting Records is created The saved image is saved in Images folder 213 8 User Supportware e Downloading disclosed file 1 Click File Transfer in the attendant window The File Transfer window will be opened Sx Image Express Utility 2 Attendant o doa File Edit View Help Receive Image gt _ SFulscoreen Save image Sales report 0 1st Qtr 2nd Qtr 3rd Qtr 4
6. 183 Names and Features of Bundled Software 183 DOWNIoaAd LT 184 Operating Environment bun tu aste 184 Installing Software Program 186 Installation for Windows software 186 2 Bre NONE m E 188 Operating the Projector Via the LAN Virtual Remote Tool 189 Connect the projector to a LAN Rp IF r 190 Controlling the Projector over a LAN PC Control Utility Pro 4 Pro 5 192 Projecting Your Computer s Screen Image or Video from the Projector over a LAN Image Express Utility Lite MM Models 196 Starting Image Express Utility Lite from a USB Memory or SD Card 201 Projecting an Image from an Angle Geometric Correction Tool in Image Express Utility Lite MM Models a 203 MV YOU can Jo WIIG T 203 Projecting an Image from an Angle GCT 203 Proje
7. AUTOADJ HDBaseT Models HDMI1 HDMI2 DisplayPort BNC BNC CV BNC Y C gt COMUPTER HDBaseT gt MM Models Automatically checks for any input signal in the order HDMI 1 HDMI 2 Display Port BNC BNC CV BNC Y C COMPUTER gt USB A The input signal will be projected when it is detected Press it briefly to display the INPUT screen ADJUST DISPLAY SETUP INFO 1 HDMI1 2 ENTRY LIST m 2 HDMI2 gt TEST PATTERN m 3 DisplayPort Qs 4 BNC 5 BNC CV G BNC Y C 7 COMPUTER fax 8 HDBaseT CUL SELECT up EXIT MOVE MOVE lt gt HDMI ADVANCED This screen belongs to a HDBaseT model Press the W A buttons to match the target input terminal and then press the ENTER button to switch the input To delete the menu display in the INPUT screen press the MENU or EXIT button TIP If no input signal is present the input will be skipped Using the Remote Control Press any one of the 1 HDMI 1 2 HDMI 2 3 DisplayPort 4 BNC 5 BNC CV 6 BNC Y C 7 Computer 8 HDBaseT or 9 USB A but 2000 tons maqa end Em ag 1 For MM models 8 Ethernet will be selected and the projector will switch to ta the Ethernet 2 HDBaseT model cannot be used 2 Projecting an Image Basic Operation Selecting Default Source You can set a source as the default source so that it will be displayed each time
8. MOVE lt ADVANCED NOTE The commands such as ENTER EXIT AW lt in the bottom show available buttons for your operation 2 Press the 4 buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the submenu 3 Press the ENTER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to highlight the top item or the first tab 4 Use the AY buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the item you want to adjust or set You can use the 4 buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the tab you want 5 Press the ENTER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the submenu window 6 Adjust the level or turn the selected item on or off by using the 4 buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet Changes are stored until adjusted again 7 Repeat steps 2 6 to adjust an additional item or press the EXIT button on the remote control or the projec tor cabinet to quit the menu display NOTE When a menu or message is displayed several lines of information may be lost depending on the signal or settings 8 Press the MENU button to close the menu To return to the previous menu press the EXIT button 77 5 Using On Screen Menu Menu Elements Tab Slide bar DISPLAY SETUP MODE STANDARD PRESET 2 PRESENTATION DETAIL SETTINGS CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS GT Solid triangle
9. Indicates ECO MODE is set Key Lock symbol Indicates the CONTROL PANEL LOCK is enabled Thermometer symbol Indicates the ECO MODE is forcibly set to ON mode because the internal temperature is too high High Altitude symbol Indicates the FAN MODE is set to HIGH ALTITUDE mode 78 5 Using On Screen List of Menu Item s e Basic menu items are indicated by shaded area Some menu items are not available depending on the input source HDMI 2 sess _ IS Displayport Y U UU MBNC j LLL 5 BNC CV _ 7 pur j COMPUTER SHDBaseT t y O ETHERNET G ___ l l K 8 SSE ENTRY LIST TEST DICOM SIM I PRESENTATION VIDEO MOVIE GRAPHIC sRGB GAMMA CORRECTION 3 NATURAL BLACK DETAIL COLORTEMPERATURE 5 o S S WHITEBALANCE y O CONTRAATR CONTRATG DETAIL SETTINGS CONTRASTB BRIGHINESSR CE 0 O ce BRIGHNESSG Oo 0 BRIGHINESSB COLOR CORRECTION CT IRD 0 o O GREEN YELLOW MAGENTA 0 O LCYAN ADJUST CONTRAST ULU S 50 O BRIGHTNESS o lO SHARPNESS COLOR We RESET CLOCK PHASE HORIZONTAL VERTICAL IMAGE AUTO 0 5 10 OPTIONS COMPUTER AUTO 4 3 5 4 16 9 15 9 16 10 NATIVE COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO AUTO 4 3 LETTERBOX WIDE ASPECT RATIO
10. SELECT GD EXIT MOVE SORT NAME Displays the files alphabetically by name in ascending order NAME ZYX Displays the files alphabetically by name in descending order EXT ABC Displays the files alphabetically by extension in ascending or der EXT ZYX Displays the files alphabetically by extension in descending order DATE NEW Displays the files in reverse chronological order DATE OLD Displays the files in chronological order SIZE BIG Displays the files in descending order of its file size SIZE SMALL Displays the files in ascending order of its file size 242 9 Using the Viewer MINI Models Projecting data from shared folder Projector Shared folder Preparation For projector Connect the projector to the network For computer Place files to be projected in a shared folder and note the folder s path Memorize or write down the path for later use Pawa ssavsr rx s F Fn 20 Shared Properties i Security Previous Versions Customize Network File and Folder Sharing a Shared Shared NetworkP ath MP CO1 Shared Advanced Sharing Set custom permissions create multiple shares and set other advanced sharing options Advanced Sharing Password Protection People must have a user account and password for this computer to access shared folders To change this setting use the Network and Sharing Genter
11. 4 About this user s manual 5 About the Projectors NETWORK SETTINGS 6 Part Names of the Projector a Lov pits 7 FONU TOD ce teers cs E E 7 RO re E E Sis 8 Controls Indicator 9 sarl cy 10 Part Names of the Remote Control a raras 11 uuu u uuu wie HDE GUN ents 12 Remote Control Precautions a nnns 12 Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control 13 2 Projecting an Image Basic Operation 14 Flow of Projecting IMage ELT 14 Connecting Your Computer Connecting the Power 15 Turning on the Projector 16 Note on Startup screen Menu Language Select 17 SSS CHA a SoU E uu u E 18 Selecting the computer or video source 18 Adjusting the Picture Size and Position
12. 32 Using the Optional Remote Mouse Receiver NP01MR 33 Correcting Horizontal and Vertical Keystone Distortion CORNERSTONE 35 Preventing the Unauthorized Use of the Projector SECURITY 38 O Projecting 3D VIS OS RETE 41 Procedure to watch 3D videos USING this 41 When videos Cannot be viewed in 3D 43 Controlling the Projector by Using an HTTP Browser 44 Projecting Your Computer s Screen Image from the Projector via a Network NETWORK PROJECTOR MM Models 54 Using the Projector to Operate Your Computer via a Network REMOTE DESKTOP MM Models NE RR TTE 58 Prepare a commercially available wireless keyboard US layout version 58 Setting the password to the user account of Windows 7 59 Setting the Remote Access a 59 Checking the IP address on Windows 7 59 Starting the Remote Desktop 60 4 Multi Screen Projec
13. Set whether to display marker or not when adjusting the range and display position When turned on a magenta marker for adjusting the range adjustment and a green marker for adjusting the display position will be displayed RANGE Adjust the range width of the edge blending POSITION Adjust the display position of the edge blending BLACK LEVEL Divide the screen into nine parts and keep the black level uniform for each projector The nine divisions screens are TOP LEFT TOP CENTER TOP RIGHT CENTER LEFT CENTER CENTER RIGHT BOTTOM LEFT BOTTOM CENTER and BOTTOM RIGHT page 75 106 5 Using On Screen MULTI SCREEN INPUT ADJUST SETUP INFO WHITE BALANCE PICTURE SETTING GUN EXIT MOVE gt MOVE C 1 ADVANCED WHITE BALANCE This adjusts the white balance for each projector when projecting using a combination of several projectors This can be adjusted when MODE is set to ON BRIGHTNESS W BRIGHTNESS R BRIGHTNESS G BRIGHTNESS B u Adjusting the black color of the video CONTRAST W CONTRAST R CONTRAST G CONTRAST B Adjusting the white color of the video PICTURE SETTING This sets the division condition when projecting using a combination of several projectors Please refer to 4 Multi Screen Projection 63 for details OFF Use the projector in a standalone state ZOOM This adjusts the position and width
14. em 37 a mit TE 2 p CTL 2 lt HELP IE 19 45 1 Infrared Transmitter page 13 2 POWER ON Button page 16 3 STANDBY Button page 27 4 FREEZE Button page 30 5 BLANK Button page 29 6 MUTE Button page 29 7 AV MUTE Button page 29 8 TEST Button page 85 9 Edge Blend Button page 71 106 10 Multi Button page 107 11 Geometric Button page 35 102 12 INPUT Button page 18 13 PIP Button page 68 14 PBP POP Button page 68 15 AUTO ADJ Button page 26 16 1 HDMI 1 Button page 18 17 2 HDMI 2 Button page 18 18 3 DisplayPort Button page 18 19 4 BNC Button page 18 20 5 BNC CV Button page 18 21 6 BNC Y C Button page 18 22 7 Computer Button page 18 23 8 HDBaseT Button HDBaseT Models 8 Ethernet Button MM Mod els page 18 24 9 USB A Button page 18 25 10 SET Button page 120 26 Numeric Keypad Button CLEAR Button page 120 27 MENU Button page 77 1 Introduction 28 EXIT Button page 77 29 AV lt P Button page 77 30 ENTER Button page 77 31 L CLICK Button page 34 32 R CLICK Button page 34 33 VOL FOCUS Button page 26 34 D ZOOM ZOOM Button page 30 ZOOM Button does not work on this series of projectors 35 SHUTTER Button n
15. Each TOP BOTTOM LEFT RIGHT and BLACK LEVEL has its own CONTROL MARKER RANGE and POSITION e For Projector A set the CONTROL for the TOP LEFT and BOTTOM to OFF Similarly for Projector B set the CONTROL for the TOP RIGHT and BOTTOM to OFF 2 Adjust RANGE and POSITION to determine an area of overlapped edges of images projected from each projector Turning on MARKER will display markers in magenta and green The magenta marker is used for RANGE and green one for POSITION uang s RANGE Determine an area of overlapped edges of images Turn on RIGHT Turn on LEFT Magenta marker M d E E gt ma i i4 EJ POSITION Determine the position of overlapped edges of images Green marker The 2 5 separated the diagram for explanatory purposes 73 4 Multi Screen Projection 1 Adjust RANGE Use the 4 button to adjust the overlapped area RANGE e Adjust to overlap one projector marker with the other projector s marker 2 Adjust POSITION Use the lt or button to align one edge with the other edge of overlapped images POSITION ENTER EXIT TIP e When displaying a signal with a different resolution perform the Edge Blending function from the start e Getting of MARKER will not b
16. MM Models nalofHDBaseT 13 The orientation of the Models port is upside down 10 11 12 HDMI 1 IN Connector Type A page 158 160 164 HDMI 2 IN Connector Type A page 158 160 164 DisplayPort IN Connector page 158 BNC IN R Cr CV G Y Y B Cb C H V Connec tors BNC x 5 page 157 162 BNC CV Input Connector BNC x 1 page 162 BNC Y C Input Connector BNC x 2 page 162 BNC AUDIO IN Mini Jack Stereo Mini page 160 162 COMPUTER IN Component Input Connector Mini D Sub 15 Pin page 157 163 COMPUTER AUDIO IN Mini Jack Stereo Mini page 157 163 Ethernet HDBaseT Port RJ 45 HDBaseT Mod els page 165 169 Ethernet Port RJ 45 MM Models page 169 USB A Port Type A page 225 HDBaseT Models For future expansion This port allows for power supply HDMI OUT Connector Type A page 161 AUDIO OUT 3D SYNC fao D es p 1 Introduction COMPUTER IN AUDIO IN 14 5 6 15 16 13 AUDIO OUT Mini Jack Stereo Mini page 161 14 3D SYNC Connector Mini DIN 4 Pin page 41 15 PC CONTROL Port D Sub 9 Pin page 269 Use this port to connect a PC or control system This enables you to control the projector using serial communication protocol If you are writing your own program typical PC control codes are on page 275 16 REMOTE Connector Stereo Mini Use thi
17. IMPORTANT You can use the Desktop Control Utility 1 0 to operate a computer located in a separate room from the projector over a network Therefore care must be exercised to prevent any third party from viewing the screen of your computer important documents copying files or turning off the power NEC assumes no liability for any loss or damages arising from information leak or system failure while you are using Desktop Control Utility 1 0 This will disconnect LAN connection when the computer goes in the standby mode while the Desktop Control Utility 1 0 is being used In the Windows amp Windows 7 Windows Vista select Control Panel Hardware and Sound Power Options Set Change when the computer sleeps to Never In the Windows XP click Control Panel Performance and Maintenance Power Options System Standby Never The screen saver function is off while Desktop Control Utility 1 0 is running Connecting the projector to a LAN Connect the projector to the LAN by following the instructions in Connecting to a Wired LAN page 169 Con necting to a Wireless LAN page 170 and 9 Application Menus page 138 216 8 User Supportware Using the projector to operate your computer s desktop screen IMPORTANT In case of Windows 8 Windows Windows Vista disable the user account control before using Desktop Control Utility 1 0 Windows Vista has User Accou
18. The standard specifies how digital image data can be moved from system to system 89 5 Using On Screen Menu DETAIL SETTINGS REFERENCE PRESENTATION CONTRAST R gt GAMMA CORRECTION BLACK DETAIL CI CONTRAST e gt CONTRAST B 4 am P BRIGHTNESS R 1f gt DYNAMIC CONTRAST OFF GI BRIGHTNESS G 4 amm C gt BRIGHTNESS B gt RED GREEN BLUE YELLOW MAGENTA CYAN GENERAL Storing Your Customized Settings REFERENCE This function allows you to store your customized settings in PRESET 1 to PRESET 7 First select a base preset mode from REFERENCE then set GAMMA CORRECTION and COLOR TEMPERA TURE HIGH BRIGHT Recommended for use in a brightly lit room PRESENTATION Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file VIDE u Recommended for typical TV program viewing MOVIE L 2 Recommended for movies GRAPHIC Recommended for graphics SROB Standard color values DICOM SIM Recommended for DICOM simulation format Selecting Gamma Correction Mode GAMMA CORRECTION Each mode is recommended for DYNAMIC Creates a high contrast picture NATURAL Natural reproduction of the picture BLACK DETAIL Emphasizes detail in dark areas of the picture NOTE This function is not available when DICOM SIM is selected for DETAIL SETTINGS Selecting Screen Size for DICO
19. When the projector is in Standby mode applying a computer signal from a computer connected to the COMPUTER IN input will power on the projector and simultaneously project the computer s image AUTO POWER ON SELECT page 130 e On the Windows 7 keyboard a combination of the Windows and P keys allows you to set up external display easily and quickly 19 2 Projecting an Image Basic Operation Adjusting the Picture Size and Position Use the lens shift dial the adjustable tilt foot lever the zoom lever zoom ring and the focus ring to adjust the picture size and position In this chapter drawings and cables are omitted for clarity Adjusting the projected image s vertical and horizontal Adjusting the focus position Focus ring Lens shift page 22 page 21 Finely adjusting the size of an image Adjusting the projected image s height and horizontal Zoom lever Zoom ring tilt page 25 Tilt foot page 25 NOTE Adjust the projected image s height using the tilt feet when you want to project the image at a position higher than the lens shift adjustment range 20 2 Projecting an Image Basic Operation Adjusting the vertical position of a projected image Lens shift CAUTION Perform the adjustment from behind or from the side of the projector Adjusting from the front could expose your eyes to strong light which could injure them Lens shift dial Horizontal e Turn the len
20. ou oa o o q oat PC with wireless LAN PC with built in wireless card inserted LAN function To enable direct communication i e peer to peer between personal computers and projectors you need to select the Ad Hoc mode 173 7 Maintenance This section describes the simple maintenance procedures you should follow to clean the filters the lens the cabinet and to replace the lamp and the filters Q Cleaning the Filters The air filter sponge keeps dust and dirt from getting inside the projector and should be frequently cleaned If the filter is dirty or clogged your projector may overheat WARNING e Please do not use a spray containing flammable gas to remove dust attached to the filters etc Doing so may result in fires NOTE The message for filter cleaning will be displayed for one minute after the projector is turned on or off When the message is displayed clean the filters The time to clean the filters is set to OFF at time of shipment page 110 To cancel the message press any button on the projector cabinet or the remote control The two layer filter on the projector improves cooling and dust proof capabilities compared with the conventional models The outsides the intake vent side of the first and second layer filters remove dust To clean the filter detach the filter unit and the filter cover A CAUTION e Before cleaning the filters turn off the projector disconnect
21. ADVANCED 2 Press the SELECT Y or A button to select NETWORK and press the ENTER button In the screen the APPLICATION MENU menu is displayed APPLICATION MENU y os IMAGE EXPRESS DESKTOP CONTROL REMOTE DESKTOP UTILITY UTILITY CONNECTION e NETWORK SETTINGS MM 3 From the APPLICATION MENU menu select NETWORK PROJECTOR The PROJECTOR NAME DISPLAY RESOLUTION PASSWORD URL will be displayed NETWORK PROJECTOR PROJECTOR NAME PA621U Series ADVANCED DISPLAY RESOLUTION 1280 x 800 PIXEL Rd WIRED LAN URL MM http 192 168 0 11 lan WIRELESS LAN URL MM PLEASE SET UP YOUR COMPUTER USING THIS INFORMATION ENTER EXIT 3 Convenient Features Projecting the Image with Network Projector 1 Click Start from the desktop of Windows 7 2 Click Programs 3 Click Accessories 4 Click Connect to a Network Projector When the Permission Connect to a Network Projector window appears click Yes The Connect to a Network Projector window appears How do you want to connect to a network projector gt Search for a projector recommended Search for projectors that are connected to your local network 9 Enter the projector address If you know the network address of the projector that you want to use enter the address Example http server projectors projectorl or server projectors projector Cancel 5 Click gt Search for a pr
22. 1 Press the POWER button The projector will be turned on and display a message to the effect that the projector is locked 2 Press the MENU button SECURITY KEYWORD 3 Type in the correct keyword and press the ENTER button The projector will display an image SECURITY KEYWORD ENTER NOTE The security disable mode is maintained until the main power is turned off unplugging the power 9 3 Convenient Features To disable the SECURITY function 1 Press the MENU button The menu will be displayed 2 Select SETUP CONTROL SECURITY and press the ENTER button INPUT ADJUST DISPLAY INFO TOOLS CONTROL PANEL LOCK OFF COMMUNICATION SPEED 38400bps CONTROL ID REMOTE SENSOR FRONT BACK BEEP ON ENTER EXIT lt HDMI1 ADVANCED The OFF ON menu will be displayed 3 Select OFF and press the ENTER button ws ON ENTER The SECURITY KEYWORD screen will be displayed SECURITY KEYWORD ENTER 4 Type in your keyword and press the ENTER button When the correct keyword is entered the SECURITY function will be disabled NOTE If you forget your keyword contact your dealer Your dealer will provide you with your keyword in exchange for your request code Your request code is displayed in the Keyword Confirmation screen In this example NB52 YGK8 2VD6 K585 JNE6 EYA8 is a request code 3 Convenient Features Q Proje
23. Model number owitcher Model number Adapter Model number 277 10 Appendix REGISTER YOUR PROJECTOR for residents in the United States Canada and Mexico Please take time to register your new projector This will activate your limited parts and labor warranty and InstaCare service program Visit our web site at www necdisplay com click on support center register product and submit your completed form online Upon receipt we will send a confirmation letter with all the details you will need to take advantage of fast reliable warranty and service programs from the industry leader NEC Display Solutions of America Inc 278 NEC NEC Display Solutions Ltd 2014 7N951973
24. TIP When using a device that supports AMX Device Discovery all AMX NetLinx control system will recognize the device and download the appropriate Device Discovery Module from an AMX server Placing a checkmark will enable detecting the projector from AMX Device Discovery Clearing a checkmark will disable detecting the projector from AMX Device Discovery CRESTRON ROOMVIEW Turn on or off when controlling the projector from Up to 12 numeric your PC characters CRESTRON CONTROL Turn on or off when controlling the projector from your controller e CONTROLLER IP ADDRESS Enter your IP address of CRE STRON SERVER e IP ID Enter your IP ID of CRESTRON SERVER 126 5 Using On Screen Menu SOURCE OPTIONS INPUT ADJUST DISPLAY NETWORK SETTINGS AUTO ADJUST NORMAL COLOR SYSTEM AUDIO SELECT DEFAULT INPUT SELECT LAST SEAMLESS SWITCHING OFF CLOSED CAPTION BACKGROUND BLUE P EXIT v MOVE MOVE lt HDMI1 ADVANCED Setting Auto Adjust AUTO ADJUST This feature sets the Auto Adjust mode so that the computer signal can be automatically or manually adjusted for noise and stability You can automatically make adjustment in two ways NORMAL and FINE OTF RCM The computer signal will not be automatically adjusted You can manually optimize the computer signal NORMAL Default setting The computer signal will be automatically adjusted Normally select this option PUN
25. e Press the INPUT button briefly to display the input terminal screen for operations on the main body Press the V A buttons to select B ETHERNET and then press the ENTER button to switch the input and display the application menu screen e You can also a USB mouse connected to the projector for subsequent operations ADJUST DISPLAY SETUP INFO m 1 HDMI1 ENTRY LIST 2 HDMI2 3 DisplayPort x5 4 BNC 5 BNC CY 6 7 COMPUTER fax 8 m 9 USB A ENTER gt HDMI ADVANCED 220 8 User Supportware 4 Press the SELECT Y A buttons to select NETWORK and then press the ENTER button The network menu screen will be displayed e The remaining operations can be performed using a USB mouse connected to the projector APPLICATION MENU Bo lt DESKTOP CONTROL NETWORK REMOTE DESKTOP UTILITY PROJECTOR CONNECTION NETWORK SETTINGS ENTER 5 Click IDESKTOP CONTROL UTILITY The DESKTOP CONTROL UTILITY menu screen will be displayed DESKTOP CONTROL UTILITY PASSWORD DESKTOP CONTROL UTILIT Y EXIT IOVI COMPUTER SEARCH 6 Click ENTRY A password input screen will be displayed ENTER PASSWORD ENTER EXIT 7 Input the password you have written down in step 4 of Operation on computer e Click the BS button on the right side of the PASSWORD field to
26. 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 02H 02H 02H 02H 02H 02H 02H 02H 00H 00H 00H 00H 02H 03H 01H 01H 01H 01H 01H 01H 01H 01H 12H 13H 14H 15H A1H A2H A6H 02H 06H OBH 01H 20H A9H AAH AEH OAH OEH 13H 09H 28H 10 Appendix NOTE 2 Jumper Request to Send and Clear to Send together on both ends of the cable to simplify cable connection NOTE 3 For long cable runs it is recommended to set communication speed within projector menus to 9600 bps 275 Q Troubleshooting Check List 10 Appendix Before contacting your dealer or service personnel check the following list to be sure repairs are needed also by referring to the Troubleshooting section in your user s manual This checklist below will help us solve your problem more efficiently Print this page and the next page for your check Frequency of occurrence lalways sometimes How often Power No power POWER indicator does not light blue See also Status Indicator STATUS Power cord s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet Lamp cover is installed correctly Lamp Hours Used lamp operation hours was cleared after lamp replacement No power even though you press and hold the POWER but ton Video and Audio No image is displayed from your PC or video equipment to the projector Still no image even though you connect the projector to the PC first then start
27. 4 3 screen size di height agonal 60 48 119 80 64 1626 121 9 10 80 232 60 1524 Y 120 9 243 8 182 9 x 150 120 3048 90 286 Screen width 256 10 Appendix Lens shifting range This projector is equipped with a lens shift function for adjusting the position of the projected image by turning the lens shift dials The lens can be shifted within the range shown below NOTE e he lens shift function cannot be used when using the NP11FL lens e Please do not use the lens shift function when projecting portrait images Please use it with the lens in the center Refer to the lens shift table on the next page for the drawing number of the lens shift range Desk front projection Wiath of projected image Height of projected image Description of symbols V indicates vertical height of the projected image H indicates horizontal width of the pro jected image Ceiling front projector 3 100 4 Height of projected image Width of projected image 257 10 Appendix Lens shift table NP15ZL WUXGA Type qj 50 V 2 10 30 3 WXGA Type V 1 1 1 XGA Type 10 V 096 D 30 For WUXGA Type the shift range in the horizontal direction is up to 15 H when using the lens unit NP13Z to project a screen V 50 V V 10 V 1 V V 0 H H H 096 H H H 50 V 60 V V 20 0 H H 20 0 H H V 50 V V 10 V 10 V V 2 H H H H exceeding Model 150 V 0 V 0 V 0
28. NAME ALERT MAIL NETWORK SERVICE CRESTRON INFORMATION WIRED LAN PROFILE 1 SETTING PROFILE 2 SETTING DISABLE APPLY Copyright C NEC Display Solutions Ltd 2014 All rights reserved e SETTINGS WIRED DHCP ON Automatically assign IP address subnet mask and gateway to the projector from your DHCP server DHCP OFF Set IP address subnet mask and gateway to the projector assigned by your network administrator IP ADDRESS Set your IP address of the network connected to the projector SUBNET MASK Set your subnet mask number of the network connected to the projector GATEWAY Set the default gateway of the network connected to the projector AUTO DNS ON DHCP server will automatically assign IP address of DNS server connected to the projector AUTO DNS OFF Set your IP address of DNS server connected to the projector 48 3 Convenient Features NAME PROJECTOR NAME Enter a name for your projector so that your computer can identify the projector A projector name must be 16 characters or less TIP Projector name will not be affected even when RESET is done from the menu HOST NAME Enter the hostname of the network connected to the projector A host name must be 15 or less DOMAIN NAME Enter the domain name of the network connected to the projector A domain name must be 60 characters or less ALERT MAIL ALERT MAIL This option will notify your computer of lamp replace time or error mess
29. Save k Gancel Help 9 Using the Viewer MM Models Projecting images stored in a USB memory device This section explains the basic operation of the Viewer The explanation provides the operational procedure when the Viewer toolbar is set to the factory default Preparation Before starting the Viewer store images to the USB memory using your computer Starting the Viewer 1 Turn on the projector page 16 2 Insert the USB memory into the USB port of the projec tor NOTE e Do not remove the USB memory from the projector while it s LED flashes Doing so may corrupt the data TIP You can a USB memory insert the projector when the drive list screen is displayed 3 Press the 9 USB A button The screen will change to the viewer display and a screen TE sss gs ee showing a list of the drives will be displayed after 2 to 3 C CO C Cj seconds CC MENU lt TF e Press the button to display the viewer with the main body operation Refer to page 18 for the selection method gt e For more information about the drive list screen see page 235 A jeu ee o display graphics in a shared folder see page 243 to display still images or movie files in a media server see page 247 g mmm UU SET VIEWER OPTIONS SELECT gt 229 4 Press the button to select USB1 and press the ENTER button The USB1 thum
30. Selection Of Network Connections Ex Select the network connection to be used Network Connection mu Pann Easy Connection Pts EQ Tryn PA H E Select the network device displaying Easy Connection if the product LAN setting is for Easy Connection This Will call up the Meeting List window 211 8 User Supportware 3 Click the Meeting Name to participate and click Connect amp Connect List Help Connect to eps Sed ae grees Coreg x Connect to P Address Status Resolution Busy 1024 x 768 J Administrator 18 Attendance EJ oo The computer will be connected to the selected conference and the attendant window will be displayed If the presenter selects Send to PC And Projector the image projected from the projector is displayed in the at tendant window amp Image Express Utility 2 File Edit View Help GJ Receive Image ga b Full Screen if Save Image Sales report 1st Qtr 2nd Qtr 3rd Qtr 4th Qtr chat E Become A Presenter Presenter Administrator Attendant 1 S File Transfer amp Memo 212 8 User Supportware e Saving received images 1 Click Memo in the attendant window A memo pane will be displayed E Click File Edit View Help Receive Image gt E Full Screen save moe Memo a Edit Lt J Sales report
31. able when AD HOC is selected from NETWORK TYPE SSID Enter an identifier SSID for wireless LAN Communication can Up to 32 alphanumeric be done only with equipment whose SSID matches SSID for your characters case wireless LAN sensitive NETWORK TYPE Select communication method when using wireless LAN INFRASTRUCTURE Select this option when communicating with one or more equipment connected to the wire less or wired LAN network via a wireless access point select this option when using the wireless LAN to directly communicate with a computer in peer to peer mode CHANNEL Select a channel Available channels vary depending on the country and region When you select INFRASTRUCTURE make sure that the projector and your access point are on the same channel when you select AD HOC make sure that the projector and your computer are on the same channel 143 5 Using On Screen Menu When WEP 64bit or WEP 128bit is selected for SECURITY TYPE KEY SELECT Selects one WEP key from the four keys below KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 Enter a WEP key KEYA e Maximum number of characters Alphanumeric ASCII Hexadecimal HEX When WPA PSK WPA EAP WPA2 PSK or WPA2 EAP is selected for SECURITY TYPE ENCRYPTION TYPE Select TKIP or AES KEY Enter encryption key Key length must be 8 or greater and 63 or less 144 5 Using On Screen Menu AUTHENTICATION required for wireless only Setting is
32. e For sharing a folder refer to your user guide or help file accompanied with your Windows computer Use a keyboard to give a name to the shared folder in alohanumeric characters e To connect the shared folder beyond the subnet set WINS CONFIGURATION NETWORK SETTINGS from the menu e Digital signature SMB signature is not supported Connecting the projector to the shared folder 1 Press the 9 USB A button on the remote control The drive list window will be displayed SET VIEWER OPTIONS SELECT e When operating with the main body use the INPUT button to select 9 USB A 243 9 Using the Viewer MINI Models 2 Displays the OPTIONS menu Press the Y button to select the x OPTIONS icon and press the ENTER button e When the OPTIONS menu is displayed the drive list will not be displayed 3 Display the SHARED FOLDER screen Press the Y button to select the s SHARED FOLDER icon and press the ENETR button SHARED FOLDER ENABLE SHARED FOLDER USER NAME PASSWORD 4 Select a folder number and place to enable it Press the lt button to a shared folder number and press the Y button to select ENABLE and then press the ENTER button SHARED FOLDER SHARED FOLDER USER ag PASSWORD 5 Enter the path user name and password for the shared folder Press the Y button to select the SHARED FOLDER field The softw
33. included on the companion NEC Pro jector CD ROM the projector can be controlled from a computer over a LAN PC Control Utility Pro 4 is a program compatible with Windows this page PC Control Utility Pro 5 is a program compatible with Mac OS page 195 Control Functions Power On Off signal selection picture freeze picture mute audio mute adjusting error message notification event schedule 29 PC Control Utility Pro 4 gt Ja File View Tool Group Projector Schedule Help 6x Hao bao All Projectors Setting Name Setting Status Lamp Rema Input Termi Addr 29 Grou Screen of PC Control Utility Pro 4 This section provides an outline of preparation for use of PC Control Utility Pro 4 Pro 5 For information on how to use PC Control Utility Pro 4 Pro 5 see Help of PC Control Utility Pro 4 Pro 5 page 194 195 Step 1 Install PC Control Utility Pro 4 Pro 5 on the computer Step 2 Connect the projector to a LAN Step 3 Start PC Control Utility Pro 4 Pro 5 To run PC Control Utility Pro 4 on Windows 8 Windows XP Home Edition and Windows XP Professional Microsoft NET Framework is required The Microsoft NET Framework Version 2 0 3 0 or 3 5 is available from Microsoft s web page Download and install the it on your computer TIP e PC Control Utility Pro 4 can be used with serial connection Using on Windows Step 1 Install PC Control Utility Pro 4 on the comput
34. Available buttons RESET ENTER Source HDMI1 ADVANCED Menu mode Highlight ADJUST DISPLAY SETUP INFO Radio button 1 HDMI1 ENTRY LIST 2 HDMI2 TEST PATTERN WALL COLOR 3 DisplayPort 5 4 BNC OFF 5 BNC CV WHITEBOARD G BNC Y C BLACKBOARD 7 COMPUTER BLACKBOARD GRAY fen 8 HDBaseT LIGHT YELLOW LIGHT GREEN LIGHT BLUE ENTER E SKY BLUE lt HDMI1 58 00 ADVANCED LIGHT ROSE PINK ECO mode symbol ENTER EXIT Off Timer remaining High Altitude symbol time Thermometer symbol Key Lock symbol Menu windows or dialog boxes typically have the following elements Highlight Indicates the selected menu or item Solid triangle Indicates further choices are available A highlighted triangle indicates the item is active Iro su Ga n EET Indicates a group of features in a dialog box Selecting on any tab brings its page to the front Radio button Use this round button to select an option in a dialog box DOLCE aurai niri PE Indicates the currently selected source Menu mode Indicates the current menu mode BASIC or ADVANCED Off Timer remaining time Indicates the remaining countdown time when the OFF TIMER is preset Slide DAL Indicates settings or the direction of adjustment ECO mode symbol
35. CLOCK PHASE This is not malfunction e The adjustments for CLOCK PHASE HORIZONTAL and VERTICAL will be stored in memory for the current signal The next time you project the signal with the same resolution horizontal and vertical frequency its adjustments will be called up and applied To delete adjustments stored in memory from the menu you select RESET CURRENT SIGNAL and reset the adjustments BLANKING Adjusts the display range blanking at the top bottom left and right edges of the input signal Selecting Overscan Percentage OVERSCAN Select overscan percentage Auto 0 5 and 10 for signal Projected image Overscaned by 10 NOTE e The OVERSCANJ item is not available when NATIVE is selected for ASPECT RATIO 94 5 Using On Screen Menu Selecting the Aspect Ratio ASPECT RATIO Use this function to select the screen s vertical horizontal aspect ratio Select the screen type 4 3 screen 16 9 screen or 16 10 screen at the screen setting before setting the aspect ratio page 112 The projector automatically identifies the signal being input and sets the optimum aspect ratio For Computer signal ASPECT RATIO 16 10 NATIVE cu For Component Video S Video signals When the screen type is set to 4 3 When the screen type is set to 16 9 or
36. DYNAMIC CONTRAST can be used PIP PICTURE BY PICTURE cannot be used when the signal input has a resolution of 1920 x 1200 or more The HDMI output terminal has a repeater function The output resolution is limited by the maximum resolution of the connected monitor and projector 70 4 Multi Screen Projection Q Displaying a Picture Using EDGE BLENDING A high resolution video can be projected on an even bigger screen by combining multiple projectors on the left right top and bottom This projector is equipped with an EDGE BLENDING Function that makes the edges boundaries of the projection screen indistinguishable NOTE e For projector throw distances refer to Throw distance and screen size on page 253 Before performing the Edge Blending function place the projector in the correct position so that the image becomes square in the appropriate size and then make optical adjustments lens shift focus and zoom e Adjust the brightness of each projector using LAMP ADJUST under LAMP MODE In addition use REF WHITE BALANCE to adjust the CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS and UNIFORMITY Before explaining use of the Edge Blending function This section explains the case for Example Placing two projectors side by side As shown the projected image on the left is referred to as Projector A and the projected image on the right is referred to Projector B Unless otherwise specified hereinafter the proje
37. Select SITE SURVEY and press the ENTER button ADVANCED SSID LANA P3 NETW PE DB CHANNEL CID SELECT EXT E The SSID list will displayed 5 Select a connecting SSID and then select OK TYPE SSID PJ WLANAP1 e gt gt 2 EZ 8 8 So So So So 35 d SELECT MOVE MOVE Finally press the ENTER button e Select the SSID for which WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK is set e Select INFRASTRUCTURE 3 B J for NETWORK TYPE WPA PSK WPA2 PSK or WPA2 EAP is not available when AD HOC 8 is selected 6 Select the SECURITY tab The SECURITY page will be displayed 7 Select the SECURITY TYPE field and press the ENTER button SELECT EXT MOVE The pull down list will be displayed 8 Select WPA EAP or WPA2 EAP and press the ENTER button 9 Select the TKIP AES field and press the ENTER button SECURITY TYPE WPA EAP SELECT 2 MOVE The pull down list will be displayed 10 Select TKIP or AES and press the ENTER button Select TKIP or AES according to the setting for your access point 146 5 Using On Screen Menu 11 Select the AUTHENTICATION tab mud USER CID SELECT ExIT MOVE The AUTHENTICATIONJ page will be displayed Select either EAP TLS or IPEAP MSCHAPv2 for EAP TYPE The setting items vary depending on the EAP type See the
38. The CTL or CTL A button will move the screen one page down or up To return to the thumbnail screen press the EXIT button Pressing the ENTER button will change the display mode between whole screen and part screen PDF VIEWER e When a passoword input window is displayed it means that the PDF file is password protected Pressing the ENTER button will show the software E m keyboard Use the software keyboard to enter your password Select OK and press the ENTER button The PDF file will be displayed Formore information on the software keyboard see page 151 NOTE Bookmarks and notes that were added after PDF conversion will not be displayed If fonts were not embedded at the time of PDF conversion those fonts Will not be displayed TIP It takes some time about 30 seconds to two minutes to display a large size file or to turn pages of a PDF file that has many pages 232 Index file extension idx e Index files which is converted by using Viewer PPT Converter 3 0 will appear in the Thumbnail screen Only folders and JPEG files converted by using Viewer PPT Converter 3 0 will appear in the Thumbnail screen TIP e Viewer PPT Converter 3 0 can be downloaded from our Website URL http www nec display com dl en index html e To select slideshow of index files open the PRESENTA TION folder in the DRIVE LIST screen However index files will not appear Only folde
39. WIRED LAN mU TS UTO DNS gt G o 0 192 168 0 10 55 255 255 0 NS CONFIGURATION ECONNECT 2 192 168 0 1 OFF ON PROJECTOR NAME ROJECTOR NAME OST NAME OMAIN NAME x ssks aI S NETWORK SETTINGS ALERT MAIL PA622U Series 9 x j J o co gt HTTP R NETWORK SERVICE ROOMVIEW CRESTRON CONTROL x _ _ _ _ ssks AUTO ADJUST NORMAL OFF NORMAL FINE 0 OLOR SYSTEM NC VIDEO AUTO AUTE NTSC3 58 NTSC4 43 PAL PAL M PAL N PAL60 SECAM H 20 cC m JI lt mi OFF ON NC Y C AUTO UTO NTSC3 58 NTSC4 43 PAL PAL M PAL N PAL60 SECAM DMI1 HDMI1 DMI2 HDMI2 isplayPort DisplayPort DBaseT 10 HDBaseT HDBaseT BNC THERNET ETHERNET SB A USB A LAST AUTO HDMI1 2 DisplayPort BNC BNC CV DEFAULT INPUT SELECT LAST BNC Y C COMPUTER HDBaseT SEAMLESS SWITCHING OFF ON CLOSED CAPTION OFF OFF CAPTION CAPTION2 CAPTIONS TEXT1 TEXT2 TEXT3 4 ACKGROUND BLUE TANDBY MODE ORMAL IRECT POWER ON OFF OFE ON UTO POWER ON SELECT OFF UTO POWER OFF 0 05 0 10 0 15 0 20 0 30 1 00 FF TIMER OFF 0 30 1 00 2 00 4 00 8 00 12 00 16 00 URRENT SIGNAL LL DATA LL DATA INCLUDING ENTRY LIST LEAR LAMP HOURS CLEAR FILTER HOURS gt e ap 24 POWER OPTIONS OFF 9 PA621U Series w
40. 0 V H 3 3 3 50 H 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 H 0 H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H H H H H H Ex When projecting on a 150 screen The explanation is for a XGA Type projector 4 3 panel with a NP12ZL lens fitted Please replace the screen dimensions and maximum shift value in the calculations for the WXGA Type and WUXGA Type projectors 16 10 panel as well According to the tables of screen sizes and dimensions page 256 H 304 8 cm V 228 6 cm Adjustment range in the vertical direction The projected image can be moved upwards 0 5 x 228 6 cm 114 cm downwards 0 1 x 228 6 cm 22 cm when the lens is at the center position For a ceiling front installation the above figures are inverted Adjustment range in the horizontal direction The projected image can be moved to the left 0 3 x 304 8 cm 91 cm to the right 0 3 x 304 8 cm 91 cm Figures differ by several because the calculation is approximate 258 Compatible Input Signal List Analog Computer Signal Refresh Rate Hz 56 60 72 75 85 iMac 60 70 75 85 iMac 4 3 6 9 XGA 1152 x 8684 4 3 60 70 7585 j 1280 x 768 15 9 OT 1280 x 800 16 10 o 9 amp du 1898 9 58 ex ve pg C r 5 1366 x 768 16 9 EO 60 75 85 0 75 60 65 70 75 60 Reduced Blanking Component 0 5 D 43 169 jo S SDTV 480i 720x 48 43 169
41. 3 12 13 14 Configuration 2 16 ing 1 18 19 0 Main link lane 2 268 Ethernet HDBaseT Port RJ 45 ______ 6 JRxD HDBTi 8 jDisconnectionHDBT3 1 HDBaseT port is not supported on MM models USB A Port Type A PC CONTROL Port D Sub 9 Pin E Communications protocol Pino 6 Unused C 8 CTS transmission allowed 9 Unused 269 10 Appendix 10 Appendix Troubleshooting This section helps you resolve problems you may encounter while setting up or using the projector Indicator Messages Power Indicator Of o Poweisof Cid Flashing Preparing to turn power on Blue long flashes Off timer enabled Program timer off time enabled Orange short Projector cooling Wait a while flashes Orange long flashes Program timer on time enabled Power Red Standby mode NORMAL p Orange Standby mode HDBaseT STANDBY 1 Set to NETWORK STANDBY for MM models Status Indicator Indicator displa Projector status mU problem or mM mode of 2 Page 180 of customer support center for repairs Flashing Orange Network conflict It is not possible to connect the projectors built in LAN and wireless LAN simultaneously to the same network To connect the projector s built in LAN and wireless LAN simultaneously connect them to differen
42. 59 gt lt Mute Freeze Play GCT The 4 point Correction window will be displayed 2 Click the Start Correction button and then Start 4 point Correction button A green frame and a mouse pointer will be displayed e Four marks will be appeared at four corners of the green frame GCT 4 point Correction l ej e es File Option Help 4 point Correction gt Performance Test 4 point Correction 5 File Option Help DT END Start 4 point Correction C Show grid 203 8 User Supportware 3 Use the mouse to click the mark of which corner you wish to move 4 The currently selected mark will turn red In the above example Windows screens are omitted for clarification Drag the selected mark to the point you wish to correct and drop it e When you click somewhere within the project image area the nearest mark will go to the position where the mouse cursor is 5 Repeat Step 3 and 4 to correct the distortion of the projected image 8 After completing right click the mouse The green frame and the mouse pointer will disappear from the projected image area This will complete the cor rection Click the X close button on the 4 point Correction window The 4 point Correction window will disappear and the 4
43. C Forced eco mode PA621U PA521U will shift to the eco mode in stages starting from 33 C e These specifications and the product s design are subject to change without notice 265 10 Appendix Cabinet Dimensions Unit mm inch 162 6 4 359 14 1 499 19 6 Lens center Lens center Holes for ceiling mount 266 10 Appendix Mounting the cable cover sold separately Mounting the separately sold cable cover NP04CV on the projector allows you hide the cables for a cleaner appearance CAUTION After mounting the cable cover be sure to fasten using the screws provided If not the cable cover could fall damaging the cable cover and possibly resulting in injury Do not bundle the power cord and place it under the cable cover Doing so could lead to fire Do not apply excessive force to the cable cover Doing so could damage the cable cover resulting in the projector falling or causing injury Mounting Preparations 1 Connect the power cord and cables to the projector the connection cords are omitted from the diagrams 2 Prepare a Phillips screwariver 1 Insert the two round protrusions on the left and right edges of the cable cover into the grooves in the bottom of the projector to line it up NOTE Be careful not to let the power cord and cables get pinched by the cable cover 2 Turn the cable cover screw clockwise e Tighten the screw secure
44. Desktop Control in that order The Selection Of Network Connections window is displayed This displays a list of the network devices connected to the computer you are using 2 Select the network device to use and click OK The Startup password settings window will be displayed e case of Windows 7 Windows Vista the User Account Control Window is displayed Click OK or input the administrator password Screen when Desktop Control Utility 1 0 is started first time Screen if starting password has been set already Set the password Setting of password is required when using Desktop Control Utility 1 0 Password Password check IMPORTANT amp Startup password entry Enter the startup password Password e Be sure to write down the starting password in case you forget it e he starting password must be input each time Desktop Control Utility 1 0 is started e Should you forget the starting password reinstall the Desktop Control Utility 1 0 A screen like the one below is displayed when the software is started on a PC installed with Windows XP Service Pack 2 SP2 or later Click Unblock if this is displayed Windows Security Alert p help protect your computer Windows Firewall has blocked some features of this program Do you want to keep blocking this program Name IEU20 Publisher NEC Display Solutions
45. ECO MODE automatically changes to ON mode to protect the projector This is called Forced ECO Mode When the projector is in the Forced Eco Mode the picture brightness decreases slightly and the TEMP indicator lights orange At the same time the Thermometer symbol J is displayed at the bot tom right of the screen When the projector comes back to normal temperature the Forced Eco Mode is cancelled and the ECO MODE returns to OFF mode 31 3 Convenient Features Checking Energy Saving Effect CARBON METER This feature will show energy saving effect in terms of CO emission reduction kg when the projector s ECO MODE is set to OFF or ON This feature is called as CARBON METER There are two messages TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS and CARBON SAVINGS SESSION The TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS message shows the total amount of emission reduction from the time of shipment up to now You can check the information on USAGE TIME from INFO of the menu page 133 INPUT ADJUST DISPLAY SETUP e SOURCE 1 SOURCE 2 LAMP LIFE REMAINING LAMP HOURS USED 00000 H FILTER HOURS USED 00000 H TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS 0 000 kg CO2 ap EXIT MOVE lt HDMI1 ADVANCED The CARBON SAVINGS SESSION message shows the amount of CO emission reduction between the time of changing to ECO MODE immediately after the time of power on and the time of power off The CARBON SAVINGS SESSION message w
46. Figures differ by several with the table above because the calculation is approximate Ex Throw distance when projecting on a 150 screen with the XGA Type using the NP13ZL lens According to the Screen Size for reference table page 256 H screen width 304 8 cm The throw distance is 304 8 cm x 1 5 to 304 8 cm x 3 0 457 2 cm to 914 4 cm because of the zoom lens 37 74 11 5 17 6 37 48 46 92 941 147 144 22 0 49 64 61 123 122 196 19 3 29 4 254 10 Appendix Projection range for the different lenses j NP11FL WUXGA Type 0 7 2 6 m WXGA Type 0 7 2 6 m XGA Type 0 6 2 5 m lt 3 NPS30ZL WUXGA Type 1 0 11 3 m WXGA Type 1 0 11 3 m XGA Type 1 0 10 9 m gt NP12ZL WUXGA Type 0 7 16 5 m WXGA Type 0 7 16 7 m XGA Type 0 7 16 0 m 40 150 60 500 60 500 60 500 30 500 NP13ZL 1 2 31 9 m WXGA Type 1 2 32 1 m XGA Type 1 2 30 8 m ME NP14ZL WUXGA 3 7 50 9 m WXGA Type 3 7 51 2 m XGA Type 3 6 49 2 m NP15ZL WUXGA Type 5 9 76 4 m WXGA Type 5 9 76 9 m XGA Type 5 7 73 8 m 255 10 Appendix Tables of screen sizes and dimensions WUXGA Type WXGA Type Size inches mes Bub 9 60 509 1202 318 808 68 1723 424 1077 Seren width XGA Type I Size inches Screen width Screen height tinches _ _ em __ _ inehes _ __ em _ NE 35 C E
47. Find and share music pictures and video on your network lt Learn more about sharing Sharing settings Find media that others are sharing Share my media to Settings lt lt Other users MT Series this PG Allow Deny Customize Your network GybO 4 a private network Devices that you allow can o find your shared media Networking How does sharing change firewall settings This will make pictures and video in Library available from the projector 248 9 Using the Viewer MINI Models Setting up Media Sharing in Windows Media Player 12 1 Start Windows Media Player 12 Stream v Create playlist Allow Internet access to home media Allow remote control of my Player Automatically allow devices to play my media More streaming options 2 Select Stream and then select Automatically allow devices to play my media Allow All Media Devices want automatically allow devices play your media If you automatically allow access to your media any computer or device that connects to your network can play your shared music pictures and videos y Tell me more about setting up Internet home media access Automatically allow all computers and media devices gt Do not automatically allow computers and media devices Cancel Automatically allowing devices to
48. Included on CD ROM Names and Features of Bundled Software Programs Virtual Remote Tool When connecting the computer and projector using the network wired LAN Windows only the Virtual Remote screen will appear in the computer screen and operations such as signal switchover and power on off of the projector will be possible It is also possible to send an image to the projector and register it as the back ground logo Once the image is registered it can be locked to prevent the logo from being overwritten Image Express Utility Lite This is a software program used to project your computer s screen stream ing movie or sound from the computer over the wired wireless network The computer cable VGA is not required 196 This software program can be used to control the power ON OFF and source selection of the projector from your computer The Geometric Correction Tool GCT and audio function allows you to cor rect distortion of images projected on a curved wall page 203 The GCT function is not available for streaming video Image Express Utility Lite for This is a software program used to project your computer s screen over the Mac OS wired wireless network The computer cable VGA is not required page 202 This software program can be used to control the power ON OFF and source selection of the projector from your computer Image Express Utility 2 0 This is a software program used to send the screens of your p
49. Lite and Image Express Utility 2 0 are contained on the supplied NEC Projector CD ROM To use EASY CONNECTION select WIRELESS LAN PROFILES EASY CONNECTION NOTE The EASY CONNECTION function is available on Windows 7 Windows Vista or Windows XP SP3 140 5 Using On Screen Menu WIRED LAN or WIRELESS LAN ADVANCED menu only WIRED LAN MM WIRELESS LAN MM PROFILES PROFILE 1 m PROFILES PROFILE 1 v DHCP v DHCP 192 168 0 11 E 192 168 100 10 E 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 a 192 168 0 1 192 168 100 1 a WINS CONFIGURATION WINS CONFIGURATION AUTO DNS v AUTO DNS DNS CONFIGURATION G 09 mow SELECT CD EXIT MOVE PROFILES Up to two settings for the Ethernet port or USB wireless LAN unit can be stored in memory of the projector Total of four set tings can be stored Five settings can be stored two for the built in Ethernet port two for wireless LAN and one for WPS Select PROFILE 1 or PROFILE 2 and then do settings for DHCP and the other options After doing this select OK and press the ENTER button This will store your settings in memory To recall the settings from memory After selecting PROFILE 1 or PROFILE 2 from the PRO FILES list Select OK and press the ENTER button To execute EASY CONNECTION using Image Express Utility Lite or Image Express Utility 2 0 select WIRELESS LAN PROFILES EASY CON
50. MUTE and BLANK buttons are pressed immediately after the energy saving function is activated sometimes the brightness may not return to normal immediately HP e he video will disappear but not the menu display 29 STANDBY CED ON FREEZE BLANK MUTE AV MUTE TEST Edg End Multi Geometric 22 C C CO Compuer SPA ew t VOL 29918 x D00MESMI SHUTTER C LENSSHIFT C PICTURE DISPLAY ASPECT COLOR 3D Set SETUP CTL ECO INFO HELP NEC Freezing a Picture Press the FREEZE button to freeze a picture Press again to resume motion NOTE The image is frozen but the original video is still playing back Enlarging a Picture You can enlarge the picture up to four times NOTE e Depending on an input signal the maximum magnification may be less than four times or the function may be restricted To do so 1 Press the D ZOOM button to magnify the picture 2 Press the AY 4 button The area of the magnified image will be moved 3 Press the D ZOOM button Each time the D ZOOM button is pressed the image is reduced NOTE e he image will be enlarged or reduced at the center of the screen e Displaying the menu will cancel the current magnification 30 VOL KIAIN D Zi SHUTTER C 3 Convenient Features STANDBY 91 0 ON FREEZE BLANK MUTE AV MUTE EdgeBlend Multi Geometric PBP POP AUTO ADJ OO vama HU
51. OK System Properties Computer Name Hardware Advanced System Protection Remote Remote Assistance Allow Remote Assistance connections to this computer What happens when enable Remote Assistance Remote Desktop Click an option and then specify who can connect ifneeded Don t allow connections to this computer Allow connections from computers running any version of Remote Desktop less secure Allow connections only from computers running Remote Desktop with Network Level Authentication more secure Help me choose Select Users Checking the IP address on Windows 7 1 Click Start from the desktop of Windows 7 2 Click Control Panel 3 Click View network status and tasks displayed under Network and Internet 59 3 Convenient Features 4 Click View status displayed in blue on the right of Local Area Connection in the window The Local Area Connection Status window appears E Tek TUNE Status General Connection IPv4 Connectivity Local IPv6 Connectivity Limited Media State Enabled Duration 00 30 36 Speed 100 0 Mbps Activity Sent A Received Bytes 10 296 266 ll 451 691 E Properties Diagnose 5 Click Details Write down the value for IPv4 IP Address xxx xxx xxx xxx displayed Network Connection Details Network Connection Details Property Va
52. PIP PICTURE SWAP OFF PIP SETTING EXIT MOVE HDMIT1 ADVANCED This displays the PIP PICTURE BY PICTURE screen in the on screen menu 2 Select SUB INPUT using the V A buttons and press the ENTER button This displays the SUB INPUT screen 3 Select the input signal using the V A buttons and press the ENTER button SUB INPUT OFF m HDMI1 HDMI2 m DisplayPort x5 BNC e99 BNC CV BNC Y C lt COMPUTER HDBaseT This screen belongs to a HDBaseT model The PIP PICTURE IN PICTURE or PICTURE BY PICTURE screen set up under MODE is projected page 100 e When the signal name is displayed in grey this means that it cannot be selected e The signal can also be selected by pressing the PIP button or PBP POP button on the remote control 4 Press the MENU button The on screen menu will disappear 5 When returning to single screen display the PIP PICTURE BY PICTUE screen one more time and select OFF in the SUB INPUT screen of the Step 3 TIP e During dual screen projection if the selected input is not supported by the sub screen the sub screen will appear as a black screen 4 Multi Screen Projection Switching the main display with the sub display and vice versa 1 Press the MENU button to display the on screen menu and select DISPLAY PIP PICTURE BY PIC TURE INPUT ADJUST SETUP INFO SUB INPUT MODE
53. POWER OFF function OFF TIMER is turned off only models with the OFF TIMER function Parts of the image are lost Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button Still unchanged even though you carry out RESET in the projector s menu Image is shifted in the vertical or horizontal direction Horizontal and vertical positions are correctly adjusted on a computer signal Input source s resolution and frequency are supported by the projector Some pixels are lost Image is flickering Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button Still unchanged even though you carry out RESET in the projector s menu Image shows flickering or color drift on a computer signal Still unchanged even though you change FAN MODE from HIGH ALTITUDE to AUTO Image appears blurry or out of focus Still unchanged even though you checked the signal s resolution on PC and changed it to projector s native resolution Still unchanged even though you adjusted the focus No sound Audio cable is correctly connected to the audio input of the projector Still unchanged even though you adjusted the volume level AUDIO OUT is connected to your audio equipment only models with the AUDIO OUT connector Buttons on the projector cabinet do not work only models with the CONTROL PANEL LOCK function CONTROL PANEL LOCK is not turned on or is disabled in the menu Still unchanged even thoug
54. Please save the original box and packing materials if you ever need to ship your projector Projector lt CS VES Dust cap for lens Remote control AA alkaline batteries Input selection char The projector is shipped without 7N901081 x2 acter sticker a lens For the types of lens and throw distances see page 253 Power cord Lens theft prevention screw Straps 24223901 for preventing lamp cover from US 7N080241 24V00841 falling EU 7N080022 This screw makes it difficult to Attaching the straps to the lamp cover prevents remove the lens mounted on the them from falling when the projector is suspended projector gt page 156 from the ceiling For North America only Limited warranty For customers in Europe You will find our current valid Guar e Important Infomation For North Projector CD ROM antee Policy on our Web Site America 7N8N4122 For Other Users manual PDF and the www nec display solutions com countries than North America utility software 7N8N4122 and 7N8N4132 7N951973 e Quick Setup Guide For North America 7N8N4142 For Other countries than North America 7N8N4142 and 7N8N4152 1 Introduction Introduction to the Projector This section introduces you to your new projector and describes the features and controls Congratulations on Your Purchase of the Projector This projector is one of the very best projectors available today The projector enables yo
55. Projector to Operate Your Computer via a Network REMOTE DESKTOP MM Models By selecting the PC connected to the same network as that of the projector the PC screen image can be projected to the screen via network Then by operating the keyboard you can operate Windows 8 Windows 7 Windows Vista or Windows XP on the PC connected with the network With the Remote Desktop function you can remotely operate the PC placed at a distance from the projector NOTE The REMOTE DESKTOP function will work on the following Windows editions Windows 8 Pro Windows 8 Enterprise Windows Professional Windows Ultimate Windows Enterprise Windows Vista Home Premium Windows Vista Business Windows Vista Ultimate Windows Vista Enterprise Windows XP Professional with Service Pack 3 In this user s manual this feature is described using Windows as an example A keyboard is required to use the Remote Desktop function The Remote Desktop function can be operated with a keyboard Using a wireless mouse with a wireless keyboard is more useful for operating Use a commercially available wireless keyboard a wireless mouse and a USB wireless receiver Use a commercially available USB keyboard and USB mouse A USB keyboard with a built in USB hub cannot be used with the projector A wireless keyboard or mouse that supports Bluetooth cannot be used with the projector We do not warrant
56. RESET is done from the menu Hints on How to Set Up LAN Connection To set up the projector for a LAN connection Select WIRED LAN PROFILES PROFILE 1 or PROFILE 2 Two settings can be set for wired LAN Next turn on or off for DHCP IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK and GATEWAY and select OK and press the ENTER button page 123 To recall LAN settings stored in the profile number Select PROFILE 1 or PROFILE 2 for wired LAN and then select OK and press the ENTER button page 123 To connect a DHCP server Turn on DHCP for wired LAN Select ON and press the ENTER button To specify IP address without using the DHCP server turn off DHCP page 123 To receive lamp replacement time or error messages via e mail Select ALERT MAIL and set SENDER S ADDRESS SMTP SERVER NAME and RECIPIENT S ADDRESS Last select OK and press the ENTER button page 125 122 5 Using On Screen Menu WIRED LAN PROFILE 1 v DHCP 192 168 0 10 E 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 1 E v AUTO DNS RECONNECT UuXSsELECT EXIT v MOVE PROFILES e The settings for using the built in Ethernet HDBaseT port in the projector can be recorded in the projector memory in two Ways Select PROFILE 1 or PROFILE 2 and then do settings for DHCP and the other options After doing this select OK and press the ENTER button This will store your settings in memory To recall the settings
57. ROOMVIEW are registered trademarks of Crestron Electronics Inc in the United States and other countries Ethernet is either a registered trademark or trademark of Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Other product and company names mentioned in this user s manual may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders TOPPERS Software Licenses The product includes software licensed under TOPPERS License For more information on each software see readme pdf inside the about TOPPERS folder on the supplied CD ROM NOTES 1 The contents of this user s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission 2 The contents of this user s manual are subject to change without notice 3 Great care has been taken in the preparation of this user s manual however should you notice any questionable points errors or omissions please contact us 4 Notwithstanding article 3 NEC will not be responsible for any claims on loss of profit or other matters deemed to result from using the Projector Important Information Safety Cautions Precautions Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference This manual is a common User s Manual for the following models 1 and 2 The explanation in the manual is based mainly on the NP PA622U model In this manual some of the descriptions in the following two types of model group names have been replaced
58. SCREEN ZOOM COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO AUTO 4 3 WINDOW LETTERBOX WIDE SCREEN FULL INPUT NOISE REDUCTION OFF LOW MEDIUM HIGH FF LOW VIDEO NORMAL NORMAL MOVIE STILL MODE AIN CONTRAST AUTO ENHANCEMENT IGNAL TYPE IDEO LEVEL FF AUTO NORMAL AUTO AUTO UTO RGB COMPONENT UTO NORMAL ENHANCED The asterisk indicates that the default setting varies depending on the signal 1 Only HDBaseT models will be displayed 2 Only MM models will be displayed 8 The GAMMA CORRECTION item is available when an item other than DICOM SIM is selected for REFERENCE 4 The SCREEN SIZE item is available when DICOM SIM is selected for REFERENCE 5 When PRESENTATION or HIGH BRIGHT is selected in REFERENCE the COLOR TEMPERATURE is not available 6 The INPUT RESOLUTION item can be selected for COMPUTER input and BNC analog RGB input 79 5 Using On Screen Menu Menu AUTO OFF 2D FRAME PACKING SIDE BY SIDE HALF SIDE ADJUST SO SENINGS BY SIDE FULL TOP AND BOTTOM FRAME ALTERNATIVE LINE ALTERNATIVE SBNU OFF HDMI1 2 DisplayPort BNC BNC CV BNC Y C COMPUTER 7 MODE START POSITION TOP LEFT TOP RIGHT BOTTOW LEFT EOTTOM RIGHT HORIZONTAL POSITION VERTICAL POSITION SUE 1 1 JBRGEMEDUM SMAL S
59. Selecting this option displays submenu for a confirmation Select VES and press the ENTER button The OFF item is selected for FILTER MESSAGE at the time of shipment When OFF is selected you do not need to clear the filter usage hour NOTE Elapsed time of the filter use will not be affected even when RESET is done from the menu 132 5 Using On Screen Menu Menu Descriptions amp Functions INFO Displays the status of the current signal and lamp usage This item has nine pages The information included is as follows TIP Pressing the HELP button on the remote control will show the INF0 menu items USAGE TIME INPUT ADJUST DISPLAY SETUP e SOURCE 1 SOURCE 2 LAMP LIFE REMAINING LAMP HOURS USED 00000 H FILTER HOURS USED 00000 H TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS 0 000 kg CO2 P EXIT MOVE gt MOVE HDMI1 ADVANCED This screen belongs to a HDBaseT model The sub menu tab in the INFO display in MM models will become USAGE TIME SOURCE 1 SOURCE 2 WIRED LAN VERSION 1 VERSION 2 OTHERS CONDITIONS LAMP LIFE REMAINING LAMP HOURS USED H FILTER HOURS USED H TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS kg CO2 The progress indicator shows the percentage of remaining bulb life The value informs you of the amount of lamp usage When the remaining lamp time reaches 0 the LAMP LIFE REMAINING bar indicator changes from 0 to 100 Hours and starts counting down If the remaining lam
60. Tr meme a GEOMETRIC TOP LEFT TOP RIGHT LEFT RIGHT BOTTOM LEFT TOP LEFT TOP RIGHT LEFT RIGHT BOTTOM LEFT enmicaconNeR BOTTOM RESET CONIROL ON Jopoa CSC Wo MARKR ON RANGE POSTION CONTROL ON jogon j BORN MARKR RANGE S contro MARKER ON ii RANGE EDGE POSTION BLENDING contro ON mE MARKR ON j RANGE POSTION TOE TORCENTER BLACK LEVEL BOTOMAET O O SSS SS SS SSS SS WHITE BALANCE CONIRASTB BRGHINESSR MULTI BRGHTNESSB SCREEN HORZONTALZOOM HORIZONTAL POSTION SS PICTURE SETTING VERTICAL POSTION wiH fUNT2UNTS 3UNTS 4UNTS OO nung ST UNIT 2 UNITS 3UNTS 2UNTS j HORIZONTAL POSITION Ast UNIT 2nd UNIT 3rd UNIT 4Ih UNIT VERTICAL POSITION IstUNIT 2nd UNIT 3rd UNIT 4I UNIT 7 ETHERNET will be displayed for MM models 80 5 Using On Screen ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS ITALIANO ESPA OL SVENSKA DANS
61. a combination of function keys will enable disable the external display Usu ally the combination of the Fn key along with one of the 12 function keys gets the external display to come on or off For example NEC laptops use Fn F3 while Dell laptops use Fn F8 key combinations to toggle through external display selections e Non standard signal output from the computer If the output signal from a notebook PC is not an industry standard the projected image may not be displayed correctly Should this happen deactivate the notebook PC s LCD screen when the projector display is in use Each notebook PC has a different way of deactivate reactivate the local LCD screens as described in the previous step Refer to your computer s documentation for detailed information e Image displayed is incorrect when using a Mac When using a Mac with the projector set the DIPswitch of the Mac adapter not supplied with the projector ac cording to your resolution After setting restart your Mac for the changes to take affect For setting display modes other than those supported by your Mac and the projector changing the DIP switch on a Mac adapter may bounce an image slightly or may display nothing Should this happen set the DIP switch to the 13 fixed mode and then restart your Mac After that restore the DIP switches to a displayable mode and then restart the Mac again NOTE Video Adapter cable manufactured by Apple Computer is needed for a Mac
62. and component signals ROB Switches to the RGB input COMPONENT owitches to the component signal input VIDEO LEVEL Selection of the video signal level when connecting an external device to the HDMI 1 IN terminal HDMI 2 IN terminal DisplayPort input terminal and HDBaseT input terminal of the projector ForMM models use the HDMI 1 input terminal HDMI 2 input terminal and DisplayPort input terminal AUTO The video level is switched automatically based on the information from the device outputting the signal Depending on the connected device this setting may not be made properly In this case switch to INORMAL or ENHANCED from the menu and view with the optimum setting NORMAL This disables the enhanced mode ENHANCED This improves the image s contrast expressing the dark and light sections more dynamically SUPER WHITE The video contrast is improved and the dark areas appear more dynamic 98 5 Using On Screen Menu 3D SETTINGS DISPLAY PICTURE IMAGE OPTIONS VIDEO e SETUP STEREO VIEWER SINGLE gt gt STEREO FILTER SINGLE CHE FORMAT AUTO L R INVERT OFF CIEC P EXIT v MOVE MOVE lt gt HDMIT ADVANCED Please refer to 3 8 Projecting 3D videos page 41 for the operation STEREO VIEWER Stack up a single or multiple projectors and carry out the settings for projecting 3D videos Sel
63. certificate client certificate and CA certificate for PROFILE 1 or 2 on a file by file basis e Install a root CA certificate for a CA certificate e f you install a digital certificate over your existing digital certificate the existing digital certificate will be overwritten with the new digital certificate e Once a digital certificate has been installed its information cannot be deleted even if you stop setting WPA EAP or WPA2 EAP 14 On the FILES screen select a digital certificate PKCS 12 format file saved in your USB memory device and press the ENTER button FILES ALFA DER BRAVO PFX XE SELECT CD EXIT MOVE gt MOVE The password screen will be displayed 15 Select PASSWORD field and press the ENTER button ENTER PASSWORD 2 3 4 6 7 8 lt 1 Jj PJ SJ US vJwJxJvJzJej J J J sP jJ BS J lt gt gt _ J CANCEL J CD SELECT Gu EXIT The character entry screen software keyboard will be displayed Set the password of the private key A password must be 1 character or more and 32 characters or less The selected digital certificate file will be installed on the projector e When the root CA certificate is not included in the file that was selected in Step 14 proceed to Step 16 When the root certification authority certificate is included proceed to Step 18 16 Select CA CERTIFIC
64. delete the character to the left of the character insertion point 8 After inputting the password click the button on the right side of the PASSWORD field You are returned to the DESKTOP CONTROL UTILITY menu screen 221 8 User Supportware 9 Click COMPUTER SEARCH The COMPUTER LIST screen will be displayed IP ADDRESS STATUS ENTER EXIT If the connection destination has not been found as a result ofa COMPUTER SEARCH search for the connection destination by inputting the IP address of the computer at the connection destination click Input IP Address 10 Click the computer at the connection destination and then OK The desktop screen of the computer at the connection destination will be displayed 222 8 User Supportware e Operating the projector manipulating desktop screen The displayed desktop screen can be manipulated by using the USB mouse connected to the projector If the EXIT button of the projector or remote control is pressed while the desktop screen is displayed an auxiliary operation bar is displayed at the lower left of the screen Manipulate the auxiliary operation bar by using the buttons of the projector or remote control Siti te ESC lt 1 gt cut off icon Disconnects communication with the computer lt 2 gt Shift icon When the highlight is moved to this icon and the ENTER button is pressed shift lock status is set The shift lock is canceled i
65. digital certificate is expired Or DATE TIME PRESET is not set correctly Time Error The DATE TIME PRESET has been cleared Set the correct date and time 152 5 Using On Screen Menu HOST NAME ADVANCED menu only Setting up the host name MM of the projector ENTER EXIT HOST NAME Set a host name of the projector Up to 15 alphanumeric characters 153 5 Using On Screen Menu HTTP SERVER ADVANCED menu only Password setting when using a HTTP server CONFIRM PASSWORD ENTER EXIT E HTTP SERVER Set a password for your HTTP server Up to 10 alphanumeric characters 154 6 Connecting to Other Equipment Mounting a lens sold separately Six separate bayonet style lenses can be used with this projector The descriptions here are for the NP13ZL 2x zoom lens Mount other lenses in the same manner NOTE The projector and lenses are made of precision parts Do not subject them to shock or excessive forces Remove the separately sold lens when moving the projector If not the lens could be subject to shock while the projector is being moved damaging the lens and the lens shift mechanism Turn off the power and wait for the cooling fan to stop before mounting or removing the lens Never touch the lens surface while the projector is operating Be very careful not to let dirt grease etc on the lens surface and not to scratch the lens surface Perform these operations on a flat surface over a
66. due to differences in the basic functions of the projectors 1 The following models are described as HDBaseT Models NP PA622U NP PA522U NP PA672W NP PA572W NP PA722X NP PA622X 2 The following models are described as MM Models NP PA621U NP PA521U NP PA671W NP PA571W NP PA721X NP PA621X CAUTION P To turn off main power be sure to remove the plug from power outlet The power outlet socket should be installed as near to the equipment as possible and should be easily accessible CAUTION TO PREVENT SHOCK DO NOT OPEN THE CABINET THERE ARE HIGH VOLTAGE COMPONENTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL shock Therefore it is dangerous to make any kind of contact with any part inside of the unit This symbol alerts the user that important information concerning the operation and maintenance of this unit has been provided The information should be read carefully to avoid problems This symbol the user that uninsulated voltage within the unit be sufficient to cause electrical WARNING TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE DO NOT USE THIS UNIT S PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD OR IN AN OUTLET UNLESS ALL THE PRONGS CAN BE FULLY INSERTED DOC Compliance Notice for Canada only This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Machine Noise Information Regulation 3 GPSGV The highest sound pressure level is less than 70 dB A in acc
67. gently Next press the wireless LAN unit in with a finger e he cap you have removed will be used when the wireless LAN unit is removed so store it in a safe place NOTE If the wireless LAN unit is hard to insert do not push it in by force 5 Mount the filter unit back onto the projector cabinet Insert the filter unit onto the projector with the sides on which the left and right hooks are located on the outside Hook 171 6 Close the filter cover After closing push the filter cover near the buttons until a click sound is heard The filter cover will be secured in position To remove the wireless LAN unit 1 Remove the filter unit following steps 1 to 3 above 2 Remove the wireless LAN unit If the wireless LAN unit is hard to remove place a cloth etc over needle nose pliers to grasp the wireless LAN unit and pull it out NOTE Do not grasp the wireless LAN unit with excessive force Doing so Will damage it 3 Mount the filter unit and filter cover as described in steps 5 and 6 above 172 6 Installation and Connections Button 6 Installation and Connections Example of wireless LAN connection Network Type Infrastructure PC with wireless LAN PC with built in wireless card inserted LAN function USB Wireless LAN Unit Wireless access point Wired LAN Network Type Ad Hoc USB Wireless LAN Unit _ w cote cote
68. he currently projected signal cannot be deleted e When the locked signal is selected it will be displayed in gray which indicates it is not available TIP e Data on the clipboard can be passed onto the Entry List e Data on the clipboard will not be lost after the Entry List is closed Copying and pasting a signal from the Entry List COPY PASTE 1 Press the A or Y button to select a signal you wish to copy 2 Press the 4 A or Y button to select COPY and press the ENTER button The copied signal will be displayed on the clipboard at the bottom of the Entry List 3 Press the 4 or button to move to the list Press the A or Y button to select a signal 5 Press the 4 gt A or V button to select PASTE and press the ENTER button Data on the clipboard will be pasted to the signal A Deleting all the signals from the Entry List ALL DELTE 1 Press the 4 gt A or Y button to select ALL DELETE and press the ENTER button The confirmation message will be displayed 2 Press the 4 or button to select YES and press the ENTER button NOTE The locked signal cannot be deleted 88 5 Using On Screen Menu Menu Descriptions amp Functions ADJUST PICTURE INPUT DISPLAY SETUP INFO e IMAGE OPTIONS VIDEO 3D SETTINGS MODE STANDARD PRESET 2 PRESENTATION ENTM DETAIL SETTINGS CONTRAST 4 emm gt BRIGHTNESS gt SHARPNESS 1 e gt grp RESET Cu SELECT CUP EXI
69. indicator in the cabinet will blink red and the message THE LAMP HAS REACHED THE END OF ITS USABLE LIFE PLEASE REPLACE THE LAMP AND FILTER USE THE SPECIFIED LAMP FOR SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE will appear Even though the lamp may still be working replace the lamp to maintain the optimal projector performance After replacing the lamp be sure to clear the lamp hour meter gt page 131 CAUTION e DO NOT TOUCH THE LAMP immediately after it has been used It will be extremely hot Turn the projector off and then disconnect the power cord Allow at least one hour for the lamp to cool before handling e Use the specified lamp for safety and performance e DONOT REMOVE ANY SCREWS except one lamp cover screw and two lamp housing screws You could receive an electric shock Do not break the glass on the lamp housing Keep finger prints off the glass surface on the lamp housing Leaving finger prints on the glass surface might cause an unwanted shadow and poor picture quality e The projector will turn off and go into standby mode when you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours after the lamp has reached the end of its life If this happens be sure to replace the lamp If you continue to use the lamp after the lamp reaches the end of its life the lamp bulb may shatter and pieces of glass may be scattered in the lamp case Do not touch them as the pieces of glass may cause injury If this happens contact your NEC dealer f
70. left to loosen them e Screws cannot be removed 167 6 Installation and Connections 3 Slide the securing lever towards the top until it comes to a stop and then turn the screws to the right to tighten them e Tighten the screws while pressing the securing lever towards the top Loosen the screws first before re adjusting the lens shift 4 Fix the four securing lever covers NOTE e Determine the screen position first before using the securing levers e Do not turn the zoom ring when using the securing lever Please do not remove the lens either e he securing lever is used to support the lens and not to secure the lens As a result the screen may shift when the lens is touched 168 6 Installation and Connections Connecting to a Wired LAN The projector comes standard with a Ethernet HDBaseT port RJ 45 which provides a LAN connection using a LAN cable To use a LAN connection you are required to set the LAN on the projector menu Select SETUP NETWORK SETTINGS gt WIRED LAN 123 Example of LAN connection Example of wired LAN connection LAN cable not supplied NOTE Use a Category 5 or higher LAN 169 6 Installation and Connections Connecting to a Wireless LAN sold separately MM Models The separately sold wireless LAN unit allows you to use a wireless LAN environment When using the projector in a wireless LAN environment the IP address and other settings must be
71. lt S TN SN 9 Using the Viewer MM Models Exiting the Viewer 1 Press the INPUT button on the remote control and ES qim aa eene select an input terminal other than USB A em m en mme When operating with the main body use the INPUT HW NL Dein button to select an input terminal other than 9 USB A FREEZE BLANK MUTE AV MUTE BNC CV BNC Y C VIEWER USB REFRESH ADJUST DISPLAY SETUP INFO js 1 HDMIT ENTRY LIST 2 HDMI2 TEST PATTERN s 3 DisplayPort Qs 4 BNC 5 BNC CV G BNC Y C 7 COMPUTER mm A 8 m 9 USB A AEUZX SELECT CU EXIT MOVE MOVE lt HDMI1 ADVANCED SET VII OPTIONS a 7 LECT 234 9 Using the Viewer MM Models Names and functions of Viewer screen The Viewer has three screens Drive list screen Thumbnail screen and Slide screen Cursor yellow Cursor yellow Menu Menu Scroll bar Folder icon n E EH E Bcde pdi Butterfly wmv Fghij pdt Photo 01 bmp gt iN k hi ei Drive list screen Thumbnail screen Path information VIEWER _ Drive information File information Photo_02 glf 6 12 11 17 2010 15 49 06 401KE Cu sELECT Menu guide Operation button guide Control bar The operation for still image differs from that for movie Slide screen Drive list screen Displays a list of drives connecte
72. menu allows you to set up the User Supportware and Network Settings NETWORK SETTINGS The User Supportware is contained on the supplied NEC Projector CD ROM ADVANCED and BASIC can be selected in the MENU MODE under SETUP CONTROL TOOLS ADMINISTRATOR MODE page 114 The BASIC menu contains minimum essentials of menus and commands APPLICATION MENU y QS DESKTOP CONTROL NETWORK REMOTE DESKTOP UTILITY PROJECTOR CONNECTION NETWORK SETTINGS MM L ENTER MOWE MOVE IMAGE EXPRESS UTILITY This shows information for projector name resolution and network wired wireless which are required to use Image Express Utility Use this information to set up for your computer PROJECTOR NAME PA621U Series DISPLAY RESOLUTION 1280 x 800 NETWORK INFORMATION WIRED LAN MM WIRELESS LAN MM CONNECTION STATUS CONNECTION WAITING FOR CONNECTION IP ADDRESS 192 168 0 11 192 168 100 10 SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 SSID NETWORK TYPE INFRASTRUCTURE CHANNEL WEP WPA OFF SIGNAL LEVEL 0 PLEASE SET UP YOUR COMPUTER USING THIS INFORMATION SELECT EXIT MOVE DESKTOP CONTROL UTILITY This allows you to set up for password entry deletion computer searching and IP address on network wired wireless which are required to use Desktop Control Utility PASSWORD DESKTOP CONTROL UTILIT Y COMPUTER SEARCH CID SELECT CD EXIT MOVE 138 5 Using On Screen NET
73. menu window will not be displayed try the following procedure For Windows 1 Click start on Windows 2 Click All Programs Accessories gt Run 3 Type your CD ROM drive name example Q V and LAUNCHER EXE in Name example Q LAUNCHER EXE 4 Click OK The menu window will be displayed 186 8 User Supportware Click a software program you wish to install on the menu window The installation will start 44 Virtual Remote Tool InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Virtual Remote Tool The InstallShield R Wizard will install Virtual Remote Tool on your computer To continue click Next WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties e Follow the instructions on the installer screens to complete the installation HP Uninstalling a Software Program Preparation Exit the software program before uninstalling To uninstall the software program the Windows user account must have Administrator privilege Windows 8 Windows 7 and Windows Vista or Computer Administrator privilege Windows XP e For Windows 8 Windows 7 Windows Vista 1 Click Start and then Control Panel The Control Panel window will be displayed Click Uninstall a program under Programs The Programs and Features window will be displayed Select the software program and click it Click Uninstall Change or Unin
74. movie file is selected The control bar for still images differs from that for movie files 1 Pressing the ENTER button in Slide screen will display the control bar at the bottom of the screen 2 Use the 4 or button to select a file and press the ENTER button e The selected function will be executed Functions of still image control bar 8 PREV Goes back to the previous image gt PLAY Plays the image This button also is used to stop or start playing an image Goes the next image D RIGHT Rotates the image 90 clockwise e To cancel select another folder m LEFT Rotates the image 90 counter clockwise e To cancel select another folder SIZE B BEST FIT Displays the image with its aspect ratio in the projector s displayable maximum resolution BH ACTUAL Displays the image in its actual size SIZE x CLOSE Closes the control bar e You can also press the EXIT button to close the control bar Stops playing slides or slideshow and closes the control bar to return to the thumbnail Screen 238 9 Using the Viewer MM Models Functions of movie control bar LI PREV Goes back to the beginning of a movie file e Goes back to the beginning of the previous movie file if executed immediately after being started playing Fast rewinds a movie file for about 7 seconds PLAY PAUSE gt PLAY Plays a movie file a PAUSE Stops playing a movie file Fast forward
75. of the video area that you wish to divide The edge blending width will also be automatically set to that width TILING This assigns the divided screens to the projectors The edge blending function will also be set automatically HORIZONTAL This enlarges the video area in the horizontal direction ZOOM VERTICAL This enlarges the video area in the vertical direction ZOOM HORIZONTAL This shifts the video area in the horizontal direction POSITION VERTICAL PO This shifts the video area in the vertical direction TILING WIDTH This selects the number of projectors to be arranged horizontally HEIGHT This selects the number of projectors to be arranged vertically HORIZONTAL This selects the position of the projector starting from the left among those arranged POSITION horizontally VERTICAL PO This selects the position of the projector starting from the top among those arranged SITION vertically 107 5 Using On Screen Menu Conditions for using tiling e All the projectors need to fulfil the following conditions The panel size must be the same The projection screen size must be the same The left and right ends or top and bottom ends of the projection screen must be consistent The settings for the left and right edges of the edge blending are the same The settings for the top and bottom edges of the edge blending are the same If the tiling conditions are satisfied the video screen of the projector at each i
76. page 31 To close the message press the EXIT button 3D CAUTION MESSAGE This selects whether to display a caution message or not when switching to a video The default condition when shipped from the factory is ON The 30 caution message screen will not be displayed The 3D caution message screen will be displayed when switching a 3D video Press the ENTER button to cancel the message e he message will disappear automatically after 60 seconds or when other buttons are pressed If it disap pears automatically the 3D caution message will be displayed again when switching to a 3D video Selecting Menu Display Time DISPLAY TIME This option allows you to select how long the projector waits after the last touch of a button to turn off the menu The preset choices are MANUAL AUTO 5 SEC AUTO 15 SEC and AUTO 45 SEC The AUTO 45 SEC is the fac tory preset Selecting Interval Time for Filter Message FILTER MESSAGE This option allows you to select the time preference between displaying the message for cleaning the filters Clean the filter when you get the message PLEASE CLEAN FILTER page 174 Five options are available OFF 100 H 500 H 1000 H 2000 H The default setting is OFF NOTE Your setting will not be affected even when RESET is done from the menu 110 5 Using On Screen Menu INSTALLATION INPUT ADJUST DISPLAY e CONTROL ORIENTATION DESKTOP FRON
77. point correction will take effect Click the button on the control window to exit the GCT HP e After performing the 4 point correction you can save the 4 point correction data to the projector by clicking File Export to the projector on the 4 point Correction window See the Help of Image Express Utility Lite for operating 4 point Correction window and other functions than GCT page 200 204 8 User Supportware Projecting Images from the Projector over a LAN Image Express Utility 2 0 MM Models What you can do with Image Express Utility 2 0 e Using Image Express Utility 2 0 allows you to send the screens of your computers to the projector via wired wire less LAN The difference from Image Express Utility Lite is that projected images can be sent from a computer to not only one projector but also to two or more projectors at the same time When Meeting Mode is used projected images can be sent and received between two or more computers High speed high quality image transmissions based on NEC s original compression algorithm NEC s original compression algorithm allows high quality images to be sent over the network at high speed from your computer to the projector e Simultaneous projection by multiple projectors Images can be sent from a computer to not only one projector but also to two or more projectors at the same time e Easy Connection function
78. projector of Sending Images to Projector page 207 The screen of your computer will be projected from the projector e Disclose a file to the participants of the conference NOTE To disclose a file to the participants selection can be made only in folder units Therefore a folder only having files that can be disclosed to the participants must be created in advance 1 Click the projector icon a on the Windows taskbar A pop up menu will be displayed Reconnect Stop Sending Send To PC And Projector Send To Projector Only Save File For Reopening Options Presenter Changeover Settings Create Setup Disk Projector Control 2 Before clicking Send to PC and Projector check that there is a e mark applied 3 Click the Image Express Utility 2 0 button on the taskbar gt as Image Express M as Projector Control The presenter window will be opened 4 Click Select Folder nF Image Express Utility 2 Presenter File Edit Tools Help E cick Presenter Supervisor Attendant 0 210 8 User Supportware 5 Selecta folder saving the file to be disclosed to the participants and click OK The file in the selected folder will be displayed in the list of files to transfer 6 Click Download The file will be shown to the participants NOTE When the computer is connected to the projector the computer screen that is in
79. range of the WXGA type XGA type and for ceiling hanging front projection PA622U PA522U Width of projected image Height of projected image 100 H Description of symbols V indicates vertical height of the projected image H indicates horizontal width of the projected im age Focus Applicable lens NP12ZL NP13ZL NP14ZL NP15ZL Use the FOCUS ring to obtain the best focus 22 2 Projecting an Image Basic Operation Applicable lens NP30ZL The NP30ZL lens unit aligns the peripheral focus around the optical axis Peripheral focus ring Focus Ring 1 Turn the focus ring left and right to align the focus around the optical axis The diagram shows an example when the lens shift is moved to the top The top of the screen is adjusted Ficus Pina When the lens is in the center the center of the screen ABCDE FGHIJ KLMNO PQRST 2 Turn the peripheral focus ring to the left and right to align the focus of the overall screen At this point the focus around the optical axis adjusted in Peripheral focus 1 remains unchanged Optical axis 23 2 Projecting an Image Basic Operation Applicable lens NP11FL With the NP11FL lens adjust the focus and picture distortion Preparations Turn the lens shift dials vertical and horizontal on the projector to return the lens shift to the center Approximate lens center position explained here for the desktop front projection mode Horizont
80. required for connecting the projector to the network wired LAN NETWORK SETTINGS e PC Control Utility Pro 4 Pro 5 e Virtual Remote Tool e Configure the email notification ALERT MAIL When the projector is connected to a network wired LAN notifications on the lamp replacement period and vari OUS errors are sent to the email address that has been set up e Operate the projector Operations such power on off of the projector input terminal switchover volume control picture control etc can be carried out e Configure the PJLink PASSWORD and AMX BEACON etc 2 Possible operations on the dedicated HTTP server screen for MM models e When using the following functions on the MM models configure the settings required to connect the projector to the network wired LAN wireless LAN e Image Express Utility Lite Image Express Utility 2 0 e Desktop Control Utility 1 0 e Network Projector e Remote Desktop Viewer when a shared folder media server is used To view the HTTP server screen 1 Basic HTTP server screen common to both HDBaseT models and MM models 1 Connect the projector to the computer with a LAN cable sold commercially gt page 169 2 Select SETUP NETWORK SETTINGS WIRED LAN in the on screen menu to configure the network settings page 122 3 Start up the web browser on your computer and enter the address or URL in the input field Specify the address or URL as http lt IP Add
81. select this option if fine adjustment is needed It takes more time to switch to the source than when NOR MAL 15 selected TIP e The default setting when shipped from the factory is NORMAL e When the AUTO ADJ button is pressed the same FINE adjustment is carried out COLOR SYSTEM This feature allows you to select the TV video signal which differs from country to country NTSC PAL etc This is set to AUTO by factory default Set this if the projector cannot identify the signal automatically AUDIO SELECT This selects the audio input of the HDMI 1 IN terminal HDMI 2 IN terminal DisplayPort input terminal and Ethernet HDBaseT When inputting analog audio connect the audio output terminal of the connecting device with the BNC audio input terminal and set the Audio Select to BNC ForMM models use the HDMI 1 input terminal HDMI 2 input terminal DisplayPort input terminal Ethernet port USB A port 127 5 Using On Screen Menu Selecting Default Source DEFAULT INPUT SELECT You can set the projector to default to any one of its inputs each time the projector is turned on El Sets the projector to default to the previous or last active input each time the projector is turned on AUTO u entm searches for an active source in order of HDMI1 HDMI2 DisplayPort BNC BNC CV gt BNC Y C COMPUTER HDBaseT and displays the first found source HDMIT Displays t
82. server in every 24 hours and at the time of projector s startup UPDA E u synchronizes the projector s built in clock immediately The UPDATE button is not available unless the INTERNET TIME SERVER check box is turned on SUMMER TIME SETTINGS If you place a check mark the clock for daylight saving will be enabled MOUSE This function cannot be used in this device It is used for future expansion purposes only 118 5 Using On Screen Disabling the Cabinet Buttons CONTROL PANEL LOCK This option turns on or off the CONTROL PANEL LOCK function NOTE e How to cancel the CONTROL PANEL LOCK When the CONTROL PANEL LOCK is set to ON press the EXIT button or the INPUT button on the main body for about 10 seconds to cancel the CONTROL PANEL LOCK setting TIP e When the CONTROL PANEL LOCK is turned on a key lock icon will be displayed at the bottom right of the menu e This CONTROL PANEL LOCK does not affect the remote control functions Enabling Security SECURITY This feature turns on or off the SECURITY function Unless the correct keyword is entered the projector cannot project an image page 38 NOTE Your setting will not be affected even when RESET is done from the menu Selecting Communication Speed COMMUNICATION SPEED This feature sets the baud rate of the PC Control port D Sub 9P It supports data rates from 4800 to 115200 bps The default is 38400 bps Sel
83. settings when they are changed 50 3 Convenient Features NETWORK SETTINGS MM Models http lt IP Address of Projector MM gt index html NETWORK SETTINGS MM SETTINGS NAME NETWORK SERVICE INFORMATION WIRED LAN 9 PROFILE 1 SETTING ara 2 SETTING ODISABLE APPLY neil WIRELESS LAN EASY CONNECTION SETTING SIMPLE ACCESS POINT SETTING PROFILE 1 SETTING OPROFILE 2 SETTING DISABLE O APPLY Copyright C NEC Display Solutions Ltd 2014 All rights reserved e SETTINGS WIRED or WIRELESS DHCP ON Automatically assign IP address subnet mask and gateway to the projector from your DHCP server DHCP OFF Set IP address subnet mask and gateway to the projector assigned by your network administrator IP ADDRESS Set your IP address of the network connected to the projector SUBNET MASK Set your subnet mask number of the network connected to the projector GATEWAY Set the default gateway of the network connected to the projector WINS Setthe IP address of your WINS server of the network connected to the projector when DHCP is turned on this option is not available AUTO DNS ON DHCP server will automatically assign IP address of DNS server connected to the projector AUTO DNS OFF Set your IP address of DNS server connected to the projector Setting for WIRELESS LAN the optional Wireless LAN Unit required EASY CONNECTION Execute a wireles
84. signals from external devices serial LAN and remote control signals IR commands e Refer to the owners manual accompanied with your HDBaseT transmission for connecting with your external de vices Connection example mi Computer for output use Our companys remote control PX750U PH1000U Nomo P jo amp x4 m PH1400U Series E vel B HDMI output video device J lt NOTE e Please use a shielded twisted pair STP cable of Category 5e or higher for the LAN cable sold commercially e The maximum transmission distance over the LAN cable is 100 m the maximum distance is 70 m for a 4K signal e Please do not use other transmission equipment between the projector and transmission equipment The picture quality may be degraded as a result e his projector is not guaranteed to work with all HDBaseT transmission devices sold commercially 165 6 Installation and Connections Portrait projection vertical orientation Portrait screens from a computer can be projected by installing the projec tor in a vertical orientation All the screens such as the on screen menu will be rotated in an counter clockwise direction The projector is equipped with a sensor to automatically detect the instal lation state When the projector is installed in a portrait configuration for the first time with the lamp lit up a ca
85. similar features Turkish RoHS information relevant for Turkish market EEE Y netmeli ine Uygundur This device is not intended for use in the direct field of view at visual display workplaces To avoid incommoding reflec tions at visual display workplaces this device must not be placed in the direct field of view Important Information Health precautions to users viewing images Before viewing be sure to read health care precautions that may be found in the user s manual included with your 3D eyeglasses or your 3D compatible content such as Blu ray Discs video games computer s video files and the like To avoid any adverse symptoms heed the following Do not use 3D eyeglasses for viewing any material other than 3D images Allow a distance of 2 m 7 feet or greater between the screen and a user Viewing 3D images from too close a distance can strain your eyes Avoid viewing 3D images for a prolonged period of time Take a break of 15 minutes or longer after every hour of viewing If you or any member of your family has a history of light sensitive seizures consult a doctor before viewing 3D images While viewing 3D images if you get sick such as nausea dizziness queasiness headache eyestrain blurry vision convulsions and numbness stop viewing them If symptoms still persist consult a doctor View 3D images from the front of the screen Viewing from an angle may cause fatigue or eyestrain Power managem
86. table below EAP TLS 1 character or more and 32 characters or less Client Certificate PKCS 12 format file CA Certificate DER format file Certificate authority s certificate PEAP MSCHAPv2 User Name 1 character or more and 32 characters or less Password 1 character or more and 32 characters or less CA Certificate DER format file Certificate authority s certificate D Selecting EAP TLS for EAP TYPE The following section explains the operation for selecting EAP TLS For selecting PEAP MSCHAPv2 go on to Step 12 on page 149 12 Select the USER NAME field and press the ENTER button 2 3 4 6 7 8 lt GJ 8 1 aj wl 2 _ Bs J 4 gt gt The character entry screen software keyboard will be displayed Set a user name A user name must be 1 character or more and 32 characters or less e See page 148 for using the software keyboard to enter characters 147 5 Using On Screen Menu 13 Select CLIENT CERTIFICATE and press the ENTER button EAP TYPE EAP TLS D USER NAME SELECT MOVE A list of files IFILES screen will be displayed e For operating the FILES screen see 4 Using the Viewer in the User s Manual PDF To return to the AUTHENTICATION page press the EXIT button NOTE Installing a digital certificate You can install each digital
87. the Viewer MINI Models Notices on shared folder and media server Files from a shared folder or media server may not be projected if security or antivirus software is installed on your computer e Open the following firewall ports Media server 1900 2869 10243 10280 10284 Shared folder UDP TCP UDP TCP UDP TCP 445 UDP TCP e Set your computer for sharing and security to grant access to files in the shared folder and set your security or antivirus software to grant access to files in the shared folder Consult your network administrator for more informa tion e Movie files in the shared folder or the media server may not be played back correctly depending on your network environment or the bit rate of your file NOTE Do not disconnect between the projector and your computer by removing the LAN cable or turning off the projector when a Pow erPoint file or PDF file is displayed from a shared folder Doing so will make Viewer inoperable NOTE e he following operations by using the buttons on the projector are not possible when the VIEWER screen such as the slide screen and the thumbnail screen is displayed Keystone correction by using the A or W button Auto Adjustment by using the AUTO ADJ button Volume control with the lt or button e Freezing picture by using the FREEZE ASPECT or AUTO ADJ button on the remote control is not possible when the VIEWER screen such as the slide screen and th
88. the power again e Set FAN MODE to HIGH ALTITUDE when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet 1700 meters or higher Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet 1700 meters or higher without setting to HIGH ALTITUDE can cause the projector to overheat and the projector could shut down If this happens wait a couple minutes and turn on the projector page 112 If you turn on the projector immediately after the lamp is turned off the fans run without displaying an image for some time and then the projector will display the image Wait for a moment Will turn off e Ensure that the OFF TIMER AUTO POWER OFF or PROGRAM TIMER is off page 115 130 No picture e Check if the appropriate input is selected page 18 If there is still no picture press the INPUT button or one of the input buttons again e Ensure your cables are connected properly Use menus to adjust the brightness and contrast page 91 e Ensure that the lens cover is open page 16 e Reset the settings or adjustments to factory preset levels using the RESET in the Menu page 131 Enter your registered keyword if the Security function is enabled page 38 e fthe HDMI input or the DisplayPort signal cannot be displayed try the following Reinstall your driver for the graphics card built in your computer or use the updated driver For reinstalling or updating your driver refer to the user guide accompanied
89. the power cord and then allow the cabinet to cool Failure to do so can result in electric shock or burn injuries 1 Press down on the buttons on the left and right and then pull the filter cover towards you to open it The cover will open about 90 degrees before it stops Filter cover Button When mounting the projector to a ceiling The filter cover will open about 90 degrees before it comes to a stop at the stopper position Remove your hands as the stopper will be detached if it is opened further The filter cover will stop at a position of about 90 degrees However the filter cover may close if the projector vibrates OSS lt S No AUes D SSS S py lt Z Y 2 174 7 Maintenance 2 Remove the filter unit by pulling out the tab 3 Remove the four filters Hold and remove the filters fitted to the two sides of the filter unit 4 Use a vacuum cleaner to vacuum all the dust inside Get rid of dust in the filter NOTE e Whenever you vacuum the filter use the soft brush attachment to vacuum This is to avoid damage to the filter e Do not wash the filter with water Doing so can result in filter clog ging 5 Remove the dust on the front and back of the filter unit e Please also remove all dust from the filter cover of the pro Jector 175 7 Maintenance 6 Attach 4 new filters to both sides of the filter un
90. the projector is turned on 1 Press the MENU button The menu will be displayed 2 Press the button to select SETUP and press the Y button or the ENTER button to select BASIC 3 Press the button to select SOURCE OPTIONS 4 Press the Y button four times to select DEFAULT INPUT SELECT and press the ENTER button INPUT ADJUST DISPLAY 4 NETWORK SETTINGS AUTO ADJUST NORMAL COLOR SYSTEM AUDIO SELECT LAST SEAMLESS SWITCHING OFF CLOSED CAPTION OFF BACKGROUND BLUE uL SELECT us EXIT MOVE HDMIT1 ADVANCED The DEFAULT INPUT SELECT screen will be displayed page 128 DEFAULT INPUT SELECT O LAST AUTO gt HDMI1 HDMI2 DisplayPort BNC lt BNC CY lt BNCCY C gt COMPUTER lt HDBaseT 9 19 This screen belongs HDBase T model NOTE Models e Ethernet cannot be detected automatically even if DEFAULT INPUT SELECT has been set to AUTO Select ETHERNET in DEFAULT INPUT SELECT to enable Ethernet to be selected automatically when power to the projector is turned on 5 Select a source as the default source and press the ENTER button Press the EXIT button a few times to close the menu 7 Restart the projector source you selected step 5 will be projected NOTE Even when AUTO is turned on the HDBaseT will not be automatically selected To set your network as the default source select HDBaseT TIP
91. to Set Up LAN Connection To set up the projector for a LAN connection Select WIRED LAN or WIRELESS LAN gt PROFILES PROFILE 1 or PROFILE 2 Two settings can be set for wired or wireless LAN Next turn on or off for DHCP IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK and GATEWAY and select OK and press the ENTER button page 142 To recall LAN settings stored in the profile number Select PROFILE 1 or PROFILE 2 for wired or wireless LAN and then select OK and press the ENTER button page 141 To connect a DHCP server Turn on DHCP for wired or wireless LAN Select ON and press the ENTER button To specify IP address without using the DHCP server turn off DHCP page 142 To set only for wireless LAN NETWORK TYPE and WEP WPA Select PROFILE 1 or PROFILE 2 for wireless LAN and then select ADVANCED and OK and press the ENTER button The Advanced menu will be displayed page 143 To select an SSID Select ADVANCED SITE SURVEY and press the ENTER button Select an SSID and press the button to select OK and press the ENTER button If you do not use SITE SURVEY type the SSID and select INFRASTRUCTURE or AD HOC page 143 To execute EASY CONNECTION using Image Express Utility 2 0 The EASY CONNECTION is a mode that can abbreviate the troublesome LAN settings when using the Image Express Utility and connecting the PC and projector via a wireless LAN The Image Express Utility
92. will not be using the remote control for a long time remove the batteries Ensure that you have the batteries polarity aligned correctly Do not use new and old batteries together or use different types of batteries together Dispose of used batteries according to your local regulations Important Information Note for US Residents The lamp in this product contains mercury Please dispose according to Local State or Federal Laws Lamp Replacement Use the specified lamp for safety and performance To replace the lamp follow all instructions provided on page 178 sure to replace the lamp and filter when the message THE LAMP HAS REACHED THE END OF ITS USABLE LIFE PLEASE REPLACE THE LAMP AND FILTER USE THE SPECIFIED LAMP FOR SAFETY AND PERFOR MANCE appears If you continue to use the lamp after the lamp has reached the end of its usable life the lamp bulb may shatter and pieces of glass may be scattered in the lamp case Do not touch them as the pieces of glass may cause injury If this happens contact your dealer for lamp replacement A Lamp Characteristic The projector has a discharge lamp for special purposes as a light source A lamp has a characteristic that its brightness gradually decreases with age Also repeatealy turning the lamp on and off will increase the possibility of its lower brightness A CAUTION e DO NOT TOUCH THE LAMP immediately after it has been used It will be extremely hot Turn th
93. with your computer or graphics card or contact the support center for your computer manufacturer Install the updated driver or OS on your own responsibility We are not liable for any trouble and failure caused by this installation e ForHDBaseT models the signal may not be supported depending on the HDBaseT transmission device In addition RS232C interface may not be supported e Both the composite video signal from each input connector as the computer BNC and BNC CV and the S video signal from the BNC Y C Input connector are not output from HDMI OUT Connector of this projector e sure to connect the projector and notebook PC while the projector is in standby mode and before turning on the power to the notebook PC In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before being powered up Ifthe screen goes blank while using your remote control it may be the result of the computer s screen saver or power management software e See also the page 274 Picture suddenly e Check if the projector is in the Forced ECO mode because of too high ambient temperature If this is the case lower becomes dark the internal temperature of the projector by selecting HIGH for FAN MODE page 112 Color tone or hue is e Check if an appropriate color is selected in WALL COLOR If so select an appropriate option page 112 unusual e Adjust HUE in PICTURE gt page 92 Image isn t s
94. 1 HDMI 1 1 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 IN 2 HDMI 2 2 HDMI 2 TIP For users of audio video equipment with an HDMI connector Select Enhanced rather than Normal if HDMI output is switchable between Enhanced and Normal This will provide improved image contrast and more detailed dark areas For more information on settings refer to the instruction manual of the audio video equipment to be connected e When connecting the HDMI 1 IN or HDMI 2 IN connector of the projector to the Blu ray player the projector s video level can be made settings in accordance with the Blu ray player s video level In the menu select ADJUST VIDEO VIDEO LEVEL and make necessary settings e fthe HDMI input sound cannot be heard in the menu select AUDIO SELECT gt HDMI1 or HDMI2 e f the HDMI input s sound is not output check that SOURCE OPTIONS AUDIO SELECT HDMI1 or HDMI2 the projectors on screen menu is set to HDMI page 127 164 6 Installation and Connections Connecting to a HDBaseT transmission device sold commercially HDBaseT Models HDBaseT is a connection standard for home appliances that is established by the HDBaseT Alliance Use a LAN cable sold commercially to connect the Ethernet HDBaseT port of the projector RJ 45 to a HDBaseT transmission device sold commercially The Ethernet HDBaseT port of the projector supports HDMI signals HDCP from transmission devices control
95. 16 10 ASPECT RATIO ASPECT RATIO AUTO O AUTO 4 3 4 3 WINDOW LETTERBOX LETTERBOX WIDE SCREEN WIDE SCREEN ZOOM FULL 5 Resolution Aspect Ratio 640 x 480 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1280 x 768 1280 x 800 1366 x 768 1440 x 900 1280 x 1024 1400 x 1050 1600 x 900 1600 x 1200 1680 x 1050 1920 x 1080 1920 x 1200 2560 x 1600 The projector will automatically determine the incoming signal and display it in its aspect ratio The projector may erroneously determine the aspect ratio depending on its signal If this occurs select the appropriate aspect ratio from the following 95 16 9 5 Using On Screen Menu NATIVE The projector displays the current image in its true resolution when the incoming computer signal has a lower or higher resolution than the projectors native resolution page 2 When the incoming computer signal has a higher resolution than the projector s native resolution the center of an image will be displayed G e LETTER BOX The image of a letterbox signal 16 9 is stretched equally in the horizontal and vertical directions to fit the screen LETTER BOX WIDE SCREEN The image of a squeeze signal 16 9 is stretched left and right in 16 9 Squeeze ZOOM The image of a squeeze signal 16 9 is stretched left and right in 4 3 Parts of the displayed image are cropped at the left and right edges and therefore not visible Squeeze N FULL Project to full screen size TIF e Image pos
96. 2U U refers to a WUXGA type W refers to a WXGA type X refers to a XGA type Model Name Symbol Example PA622U NP is not indicated on top of the cabinet 1 Introduction About the Projector s NETWORK SETTINGS NETWORK SETTINGS need to be carried out when connecting this projector to a wired or wireless LAN For HDBaseT Models Please configure the projector using the following 1 NETWORK SETTINGS 2 NETWORK SETTINGS can not be used For MM Models The following two types of NETWORK SETTINGS 1 and 2 can be used Use the NETWORK SETTINGS 1 and 2 for different purposes depending on the software and function described in the table below 1 NETWORK SETTINGS under SETUP in the on screen menu Page 122 Or NETWORK SETTINGS in the HTTP server Page 48 2 NETWORK SETTINGS MM in the application menu Page 140 Or NETWORK SETTINGS in the HTTP server MM Page 51 NETWORKSETTNGS MM Function PC control Shared folder viewer PJLink Media Server viewer AMX BEACON Network Projector CRESTRON Remote Desktop ALERT MAIL HTTP server PROJECTOR ADJUST MENT Synchronize with an Internet time server User Supportware PC Control Utility Pro 4 Image Express Utility Lite PC Control Utility Pro 5 Image Express Utility 2 0 Virtual Remote Tool Desktop Control Utility 1 0 A wireless LAN unit sold separately is required to conne
97. 6 to H x 7 1 5 9 m min to 76 9 m max H Horizontal refers to the screen width Figures differ by several with the table above because the calculation is approximate Ex Throw distance when projecting on a 150 screen with the WXGA Type using the NP13ZL lens According to the Screen Size for reference table page 256 H screen width 323 1 cm The throw distance is 323 1 cm x 1 5 to 323 1 cm x 3 0 484 7 cm to 969 3 cm because of the zoom lens 3 0 4 0 388977 7 6 12 2 12 0 18 3 XGA Type 07 09 V 0 9 1 2 C __ 60 1 4 1 9 1 8 3 7 3 6 5 8 5 7 8 7 80 100 Lens model name NP12ZL NP13ZL NP14ZL NP15ZL 1 9 2 5 2 4 4 9 4 8 7 8 7 6 11 6 2 4 3 2 3 0 6 1 6 0 9 7 9 6 14 6 100 5 9 77 74 148 147 236 232 353 7 4 9 6 92 185 184 295 291 442 Calculation of the throw distance from the screen size NP1 1FL lens throw distance m H x 0 8 0 6 m min to 2 5 m max NP30ZL lens throw distance m H x 0 8 to H x 1 1 1 0 m min to 10 9 m max NP12ZL lens throw distance m H x 1 2 to H x 1 6 0 7 m min to 16 0 m max NP13ZL lens throw distance m H x 1 5 to H x 3 0 1 2 m min to 30 8 m max NP14ZL lens throw distance m H x 3 0 to H x 4 8 3 6 m min to 49 2 m max NP15ZL lens throw distance m H x 4 7 to H x 7 3 5 7 m min to 73 8 m max H Horizontal refers to the screen width
98. 60 Composite Video S Video Aspect Ratio Refresh Rate Hz NTSC 6 PAL60 259 10 10 Appendix HDMI Refresh Rate Hz HD CO co G HD WXGA 2 UM 4 2048 x 1080 WQHD 23 98 24 25 29 97 30 IHDTV 108 1920 x 10800 16 9 2425305060 Cid 16 HDTV 1080i 1920 x 1080 16 9 48 50 60 HDTV 720 1280 x 720 16 9 50 60 4 5 4 O O 0 A CcO lt OJO O N O O O 0 60 Reduced Blankino N O cO O cO 16 9 SDTV 480i p 720 1440 x 480 4 3 16 9 6 SDTV 576i p 720 1440 x 576 4 3 16 9 HDMI 3D Signal Resolution dots Refresh Rate Hz 23 98 24 Side By Side 1920 x 1080p Side By Side Side Side 16 9 To To Si Si Side By Side e By Si Side By Side e By Si 25 50 1920 x 1080i 59 94 60 50 59 94 60 D D D 260 DisplayPort Refresh Rate Hz 640 x 480 SVGA __ D K 4 SVGA 4 22 2048 1080 WQHD 16 9 9 SDTV 480i p 720 1440 x 480 4 3 16 9 SDTV 576i p 720 1440 x 576 4 3 16 9 DisplayPort 3D Signal Resolution dots Refresh Rate Hz 3D Format Frame Packing 23 98 24 Side By Side Top and Bottom 1920 x 1080p Top and Bottom Side By Sid
99. 91 92 SOURCE SELECT This switches the input connector of the projector HDMI1 owitches to the HDMI 1 IN connector EE Switches to the HDMI 2 IN connector DisplayPort Switches to the DisplayPort switch to BNC analog RGB video input BNC CV switch to BNC CV video input BING a owitch to BNC Y C video input COMPUTER owitches to the COMPUTER IN connector HDBaseT Models HDbBaseT owitch to image input sent from a transmission device that supports HDBaseT MM Models ETHERNEI Switch to the data display that is sent from the network USB A Switch to the data display of the USB memory that has been set up in the projector PROJECTOR STATUS This displays the condition of the projector LAMP LIFE REMAINING Displays the remaining life of the lamp as a percentage LAMP HOURS USED Displays how many hours the lamp has been used FILTER HOURS USED Displays how many hours the filter has been used ERROR STATUS Displays the status of errors occurring within the projector LOG OFF Logging off your projector and returning to the authentication screen LOGON screen 47 3 Convenient Features NETWORK SETTINGS http lt IP Address of Projector Basic gt index html POWER ON OFF LOGOFF PROJECTOR ADJUSTMENT NETWORK SETTINGS SETTINGS
100. ATE and press the ENTER button The drive list screen will be displayed 148 5 Using On Screen 17 On the FILES screen select a digital certificate DER format file saved in your USB memory device and press the ENTER button e Select your root CA certificate here The selected digital certificate will be installed on the projector 18 After completing required settings select OK and press the ENTER button The WIRELESS page will be returned 19 Select RECONNECT and press the ENTER button 20 Select OK and press the ENTER button This will complete setting EAP TLS for EAP TYPE in WPA EAP or WPA2 EAP HF Clearing the digital certificate that is installed on the projector To clear the digital certificate installed on the projector follow the steps below By doing the following procedure all the digital certificates for the currently displayed profile will be cleared 1 Select CLEAR CERTIFICATES in the bottom left of the AD VANCED setting screen and press the ENTER button A message for confirmation will be displayed 2 Select YES and press the ENTER button CD set eer m move move The digital certificates will be cleared TIP e The PKCS 12 format digital certificate including a CA certificate will be installed as a root CA certificate 2 Selecting PEAP MSCHAPv2 for EAP TYPE 12 From the AUTHENTICATION page select EAP TYPE field and press the ENTER button CD SE
101. BURG 240 Projecting data from shared folder 243 Connecting the projector to the shared folder 243 Disconnecting the shared folder from the projector 246 Projecting data from media server a a a 247 Setting up Media Sharing in Windows Media Player 11 247 Setting up Media Sharing in Windows Media Player 12 249 xi Table of Contents Connecting the projector to the media server 250 Disconnecting the projector from the media 251 Restrictions on displaying files socero P Mot Dacos mter 252 Some restrictions on PowerPoint files 252 Some restrictions on Excel files 252 Some restrictions on PDF files 252 10 Appendix naa 253 Throw distance and screen size r a a aa 253 Lens types and throw distance
102. BaseT Ethernet Port Video can be transmitted from a computer equipped with a RF 45 port that is connected to a wired LAN to the projector and the projector can also be controlled from the computer In addition the MM models can also be used over a wireless LAN by using a wireless LAN unit sold separately MM models serve as Ethernet ports LAN compatible Viewer MM Models The projector s built in Viewer allows you to view images or movie files in the shared folder of your PC connected to a wired or wireless LAN The Viewer supports the Media Sharing function of Windows Media Player 11 CRESTRON ROOMVIEW compatibility The projector supports CRESTRON ROOMVIEW allowing multiple devices connected in the network to be man aged and controlled from a computer or controller Convenient utility software User Supportware provided as standard HDBaseT Models The three utility software stored in the enclosed NEC Projector CD ROM Virtual Remote Tool PC Control Utility Pro 4 for Windows and PC Control Utility Pro 5 for Mac OS can be used The following three utility software on the CD ROM cannot be used Image Express Utility Lite for Windows Mac OS Image Express Utility 2 0 for Windows and Desktop Control Utility 1 0 for Windows MM Models The six utility software stored in the attached NEC Projector CD ROM Virtual Remote Tool PC Control Utility Pro 4 for Windows PC Control Utility Pro 5 for Mac OS Image Expres
103. Book which does not have a mini D Sub 15 pin connector Mirroring on a MacBook When using the projector with a MacBook output may not be set to 1024 x 768 unless mirroring is off on your MacBook Refer to owner s manual supplied with your Mac computer for mirroring e Folders or icons are hidden on the Mac screen Folders or icons may not be seen on the screen Should this happen select View Arrange from the Apple menu and arrange icons 274 PC Control Codes and Cable Connection PC Control Codes Function Code Data POWER 0N 02H 00H POWER OFF 02H 01H INPUT SELECT HDMI1 02H 03H INPUT SELECT HDMI2 02H 03H INPUT SELECT DisplayPort 02H 03H INPUT SELECT BNC 02H 03H INPUT SELECT BNC CV 02H 03H INPUT SELECT BNC Y C 02H 03H INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 02H 03H INPUT SELECT HDBaseT 02H 03H PICTURE MUTE ON 02H 10H PICTURE MUTE OFF 02H 11H SOUND MUTE ON 02H 12H SOUND MUTE OFF 02H 13H NOTE Contact your local dealer for a full list of the PC Control Codes if needed Cable Connection Communication Protocol Baud NOTE Depending on the equipment a lower baud rate may be recommended for long cable runs 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H No parity bit PC Control Connector D SUB 9P NOTE 1 Pins 1 4 6 and 9 are no used To GND of PC T To RTS of PC To CTS of PC To TxD of PC To RxD of PC
104. C 0 2 F 28 9 C 83 5 F DESKTOP TILTDOWN c f c fo ADVANCED INTAKE TEMPERATURE INSTALLATION POSITION Y AXIS X AXIS Z AXIS About the X AXIS Y AXIS and Z AXIS CONDITIONS 5 Using On Screen Menu PROJECTOR NAME SERIAL NUMBER EXHAUST TEMPERATURE Arrow direction of the Z AXIS in the figure represents the top of the projector FORO E Display the projector image at an angle of 100 100 degrees to the horizontal in the X axis direction Y AXIS Display the projector image at an angle of 100 100 degrees to the horizontal in the Y axis direction 136 X AXIS value of the projector Horizontal plane gt X axis PO Gravity direction Y AXIS value of the projector Horizontal plane 2805 CE 5 Gravity direction 5 Using On Screen Menu 2 Display the projector image at an angle of 100 100 Z AXIS value of degrees to the vertical in the Z axis direction the projector Horizontal mU plane Z axis 2 Gravity direction HDBaseT INPUT ADJUST DISPLAY SETUP SIGNAL QUALITY NORMAL OPERATION MODE HDBaseT LINK STATUS HDBaseT HDMI STATUS NO HDMI lt gt ADVANCED SIGNAL QUALITY OPERATION MODE LINK STATUS HDMI STATUS 137 5 Using On Screen Menu Q Application Menu MM Models When ETHERNET is selected from the INPUT menu the application menu APPLICATION MENU will be dis played The application
105. CENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS IT PROVIDES THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE BY CLICKING ON THE I accept the terms in the license agreement BUTTON YOU ARE CONSENTING TO BE BOUND BY THIS AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT CLICK THE I do not accept the terms in the license agreement BUTTON AND THE INSTALLATION PROCESS WILL NOT OANT TE I accept the terms in the license agreement I do not accept the terms in the license agreement InstallShield Read END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT carefully 4 If you agree click I accept the terms in the license agreement and then click Next e Follow the instructions on the installer screens to complete the installation e When the installation is complete you will return to the menu window HE e Uninstalling PC Control Utility Pro 4 To uninstall PC Control Utility Pro 4 do the same procedures stated as in Uninstalling a Software Program page 187 193 8 User Supportware Step 2 Connect the projector to a LAN Connect the projector to the LAN by following the instructions in Connecting to a Wired LAN page 169 and 9 Controlling the Projector by Using an HTTP Browser page 44 Step 3 Start PC Control Utility Pro 4 Click Start All programs or Programs NEC Projector User Supportware PC Control Utility Pro 4 gt PC Con
106. COMPUTER This projects the video of the device connected to the computer video input terminal This projects the analog RGB signal or component signal 8 HDBaseT Projecting the HDBaseT or WIRED LAN signal 8 ETHERNET 2 Switch to the data display that is sent from the network 9 USB A Switch to the data display viewer display of the USB memory that has been set up in the projector page 225 ENTRY LIST Displays a list of signals See the following pages TEST PATTERN Closes the menu and switches to the test pattern screen 1 Only HDBaseT models will be displayed 2 Only MM models will be displayed 85 Using the Entry List 5 Using On Screen Menu When any source adjustments are made the adjustments are automatically registered in the Entry List The adjust ment values of registered signals can be loaded from the Entry List whenever necessary However only up to 100 patterns can be registered in the Entry List When 100 patterns have been registered in the Entry List an error message is then displayed and no additional patterns can be registered You should thus delete adjustment values of signals that are no longer needed Displaying the Entry list 1 Press the MENU button The menu will be displayed 2 Press the 4 button to select INPUT The INPUT list will be displayed ADJUST m 1 HDMI1 2 HDMI2 m 3 DisplayPort x5 4 BNC 5 BNC CY 6 BNC Y C 7 CO
107. DISPLAY This option turns on or off input name display such as HDMI1 2 DisplayPort BNC BNC CV BNC Y C COM PUTER HDBaseT to be displayed on the top right of the screen Turning messages on and off MESSAGE DISPLAY This option selects whether or not to display projector messages at the bottom of the projected image Even when OFF is selected the security lock warning is displayed The security lock warning turns off when the security lock is canceled Turning ON OFF Control ID ID DISPLAY ID DISPLAY This option turns on or off the ID number which is displayed when the ID SET button on the remote control Is pressed page 120 109 5 Using On Screen Turning On Eco Message ECO MESSAGE This option turns on or off the following messages when the projector is turned on The Eco Message prompts the user to save energy When OFF is selected for ECO MODE you will get a message to prompt you to select ON for ECO MODE When ON is selected for ECO MODE ECO MODE ON THANK YOU FOR SAVING THE ENVIRONMENT CA EXIT Gap EXIT To close the message press any one of the buttons The message will disappear if no button operation is done for 30 seconds When OFF is selected for ECO MODE USING MODE REDUCES CARBON FOOTPRINT AND LENGTHENS LAMP LIFE X EXIT Pressing the ENTER button will display the ECO MODE screen
108. ER This controls the power of the projector Power is switched OFF seein Power is switched off VOLUME This controls the volume the projector m Increases the volume adjustment value CR ON Decreases the volume adjustment value AV MUTE This controls the mute function of the projector PICTURE ON Mutes the video PICTURE OFF Cancels the video muting SOUND ON Mutes the audio SOUND OFF Cancels the audio muting ALL Mutes each of the video and audio functions ALL CES a asa a Cancels the muting of each of the video and audio functions 46 3 Convenient Features PICTURE Controls the video adjustment of the projector BRIGHTNESS Increases the brightness adjustment value BRIGHTNESS V Decreases the brightness adjustment value CONTRAST A Increases the contrast adjustment value CONTRAST V Decreases the contrast adjustment value COLOR 4 Increases the color adjustment value COLOR V Decreases the color adjustment value HUE A Increases the hue adjustment value HUE W Decreases the hue adjustment value SHARPNESS A Increases the sharpness adjustment value SHARPNESS Decreases the sharpness adjustment value e The functions that can be controlled will vary depending on the signal being input to the projector page
109. ER video input connectors support Windows Plug and Play The BNC video input connector does not support Win dows Plug and Play A Mac signal adapter commercially available may be required to connect a Mac computer To connect a Mac computer equipped with a Mini DisplayPort to the projector use a commercially available Mini DisplayPort gt DisplayPort converter cable 160 6 Installation and Connections Connecting an External Monitor Stereo mini plug audio cable HDMI cable not supplied not supplied HDMI IN AUDIO IN G J Gee JD eo Computer cable VGA not supplied You can connect a separate external monitor to your projector to simultaneously view on a monitor the computer analog image you re projecting Please refer to Page 67 when displaying the PIP PICTURE BY PICTURE screen NOTE When outputting HDMI signals turn on the power of the video device on the output side and keep it connected before inputting video signals into this device The HDMI output terminals of the projector are equipped with repeater functions When a device is connected to the HDMI output terminal the resolution of the output signal is limited by the resolution supported by the connected device Connecting and disconnecting an HDMI cable or selecting another input source on the second and subsequent proj
110. ETWORK SETTINGS MM NETWORK INFORMATION screen on the on screen menu of the projector and check the SSID character string Select the network you wish to connect and click Select The target selection window will be displayed Place a check mark for projectors to be connected and then click Connect e When multiple projectors are displayed display the INPUT TERMINAL gt ETHERNET NETWORK SET TINGS MM NETWORK INFORMATION screen on the on screen menu of the projectors to be connected and check the IP ADDRESS When connecting with the projector is established you can operate the control window to control the projector gt page 199 NOTE Projectors in which the STANDBY MODE in the on screen menu has been set to NORMAL power indicator is lighted up in red and those in which the PROGRAM TIMER has been set up power indicator blinks slowly will not be displayed in the connection destination options when the unit is in the standby mode 198 8 User Supportware 5 Operate the control window 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 E Picture pg x gt Mute Fr Play GOT 1 Streaming Displays the streaming window Movie files on the PC can be transferred to the projector via the network and played on the projector Refer to Movie streaming function in the help file of Image Express Utility Lite 2 Source selects an input source of the projector 3 Pictur
111. H x 1 5 to H x 3 0 1 2 m min to 31 9 m max NP14ZL lens throw distance m H x 2 9 to H x 4 7 3 7 m min to 50 9 m max NP15ZL lens throw distance m H x 4 6 to H x 7 1 5 9 m min to 76 4 m max H Horizontal refers to the screen width Figures differ by several with the table above because the calculation is approximate Ex Throw distance when projecting on a 150 screen with the WUXGA Type using the NP13ZL lens According to the Screen Size for reference table page 256 H screen width 323 1 cm The throw distance is 323 1 cm x 1 5 to 323 1 cm x 3 0 484 7 cm to 969 3 cm because of the zoom lens 253 10 Appendix WXGA Type 30 40 aoa 42 25 60 Bo 00 30 40 5 9 9 1 100 Lens model name NP12ZL NP13ZL NP14ZL NP15ZL 2 5 3 3 3 2 6 4 6 3 10 1 9 9 15 2 3 4 4 5 41 54 5 2 6 8 6 9 9 0 87 113 TIP Calculation of the throw distance from the screen size NP1 1FL lens throw distance m H x 0 8 0 7 m min to 2 6 m max NP30ZL lens throw distance m H x 0 8 to H x 1 0 1 0 m min to 11 3 m max NP12ZL lens throw distance m H x 1 2 to H x 1 5 0 7 m min to 16 7 m max NP13ZL lens throw distance m H x 1 5 to H x 3 0 1 2 m min to 32 1 m max NP14ZL lens throw distance m H x 2 9 to H x 4 7 3 7 m min to 51 2 m max NP15ZL lens throw distance m H x 4
112. INGS Selecting ECO MODE will allow you to select ECO MODE by setting ADVANCED SET TINGS ADVANCED SETTINGS s Select power on off a type of video source or ECO MODE for the selected item in FUNCTION REPEAT Place a check mark to repeat the program continuing basis To use the program this week only clear the check mark 4 Select OK and press the ENTER button This will complete the settings You will be returned to the PROGRAM LIST screen 5 Select BACK and press the ENTER button PROGRAM LIST FUNCTION POWER OFF DELETE MOVE MOVE You will be returned to the PROGRAM TIMER screen 6 Press the EXIT button You will be returned to the TOOLS screen NOTE Up to 30 different timer settings can be programmed When PROGRAM TIMER is turned on the STANDBY MODE setting is ignored The Program Timer is executed on a set time basis not in a program basis Once the program not marked with a check in REPEAT has been executed the check mark in the ACTIVE check box will be cleared automatically and the program will be disabled When the on time and the off time set for the same time the off time setting will take preference Two different sources are set for the same time the larger program number will take preference The on time setting will not be executed while the cooling fans are running or an error is occurring If
113. INPUT PBP POP AUTO ADJ HDMI 1 HDM 2 i _ BNC CV CG Computer E CO NOTE Some signals may take time to display or may not be displayed correctly e Ifthe Auto Adjust operation cannot optimize the computer signal try to adjust HORIZONTAL VERTICAL CLOCK and PHASE manually page 93 94 Turning Up or Down Volume Sound level from the speaker can be adjusted Important Do not turn up the volume to the maximum level on the external speaker system connected to the AUDIO OUT of the projector Doing so may produce an unexpected loud sound at the time of turning on or off the projector causing damage to your hearing When adjusting the volume on the external speaker system set volume level of the speaker system to less than half its rating and adjust the volume on the projector to get appropriate sound level VOLUME Increase volume OX DO smt j LENS SHIFT Decrease volume DISPLAY ASPECT ENTER EXIT Set SETUP co CTL ECO INFO 0 00 TIP When no menus appear the lt and buttons on the projector cabinet work as a volume control NOTE HDBaseT Models e Volume control is not available with the lt or button when an image is enlarged by using the D ZOOM button or when the menu is displayed MM Models e When the on screen menu is displayed and the screen has been enlarged us ing the button the volume cannot be adjusted using the button if
114. ISPLAY SETUP INPUT TERMINAL RESOLUTION 1024x768 HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY 48 58 kHz VERTICAL FREQUENCY 62 13 Hz SYNC TYPE SEPARATE SYNC SYNC POLARITY H V SCAN TYPE NON INTERLACE SOURCE NAME 1024x768 ENTRY 1 lt gt HDMIT ADVANCED INPUT TERMINAL RESOLUTION HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY SYNC TYPE SOURCE NAME ENTRY NO 134 5 Using On Screen SOURCE 4 INPUT ADJUST DISPLAY SETUP SIGNAL TYPE RGB VIDEO TYPE NTSC BIT DEPTH G bits VIDEO LEVEL FULL LINK RATE 2 7 Gbps LINK LANE 1 lane 3D FORMAT FRAME PACKING lt HDMI1 ADVANCED SIGNAL TYPE VIDEO TYPE BIT DEPTH VIDEO LEVEL LINK RATE LINK LANE 3D FORMAT WIRED LAN INPUT ADJUST DISPLAY SETUP IP ADDRESS 192 168 0 10 SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 GATEWAY 192 168 0 1 MAC ADDRESS 00 00 00 00 00 00 HDMI1 ADVANCED IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK GATEWAY MAC ADDRESS VERSION 1 INPUT ADJUST DISPLAY SETUP FIRMWARE 1 00 DATA 1 00 SUB CPU 1 00 C ADVANCED FIRMWARE DATA SUB CPU VERSION 2 MM only FIRMWARE MM 135 OTHERS INPUT ADJUST DISPLAY SETUP DATE TIME PROJECTOR NAME MODEL SERIAL NUMBER CONTROL ID 1 PA622U Series NP PAG22U C HDMI1 ADVANCED DATE TIME MODEL NO CONTROL ID when CONTROL ID is set CONDITIONS INPUT ADJUST DISPLAY SETUP INTAKE TEMPERATURE EXHAUST TEMPERATURE INSTALLATION POSITION X AXIS Y AXIS Z AXIS 0 8
115. IT DEPTH p SOURCE I jJ NEM j pp o pu p p o j p pM ENEMY SSS poe 15 Only MM models will be displayed 16 CONTROL ID will be displayed when CONTROL ID has been set up 17 Only HDBaseT models will be displayed 84 5 Using On Screen Menu Menu Descriptions amp Functions INPUT ADJUST DISPLAY SETUP INFO 1 HDMI1 ENTRY LIST 2 HDMI2 TEST PATTERN 3 DisplayPort x5 4 BNC 5 BNC CV 6 BNC Y C gt 7 Ac 8 CUL SELECT CUP EXIT v MOVE gt MOVE HDMI ADVANCED This screen belongs to a HDBase T model 1 HDMI1 This projects the video of the device connected to the HDMI 1 IN terminal 2 HDMI2 This projects the video of the device connected to the HDMI 2 IN terminal 3 DisplayPort This projects the video of the device connected to the Display Port input terminal 4 BNC This projects the video of the device connected to the video input terminal This projects the analog RGB signal or component signal 5 BNC CV This projects the video of the device connected to the BNC CV video input terminal This projects the composite video signal 6 BNC Y C This projects the video of the device connected to the BNC Y C video input terminal This projects the S video signal 7
116. K PORTUGU S CESTINA MAGYAR POLSKI LANGUAGE ENGLISH NEDERLANDS SUOMI NORSK T RK E 5 7 EMnvik rh xz E 0 ROM N HRVATSKA INDONESIA 29 Ing 29 9 BB Aw MENU COLOR SELECT COLOR COLOR MONOCHROME INPUT DISPLAY ON OFFON MESSAGE DISPLAY OFF ON ID DISPLAY ON OFF ON ECO MESSAGE 3D CAUTION MESSAGE ON OFF ON DISPLAY TIME en MANUAL AUTO 5 SEC AUTO 15 SEC AUTO 45 SEC FILTER MESSAGE OFF 100 H 500 H 1000 H 2000 H AUTO DESKTOP FRONT CEILING REAR DESKTOP REAR ORIENTATION AUTO CEILING FRONT SCREEN TYPE FREE 4 3 SCREEN 16 9 SCREEN 16 10 SCREEN SETUP OFF WHITEBOARD BLACKBOARD BLACKBOARD GRAY LIGHT WALL COLOR OFF YELLOW LIGHT GREEN LIGHT BLUE SKY BLUE LIGHT ROSE PINK FAN MODE AUTO UTO HIGH HIGH ALTITUDE CO MODE FF ON E AMP ADJUST ONTRAST G INSTALLATION ONTRAST B RIGHTNESS R RIGHTNESS G RIGHTNESS B p DEREN REF WHITE BALANCE NENNEN NIFORMITY R NIFORMITY B ORIZONTAL G ORIZONTAL ERTICAL ERTICAL ERTICAL B STATIC CONVERGENCE lt lt lt Sele m e 20 gt 2 gt rp m 20 5 Using On Screen Default SETUP CONTROL ADMINISTRA TOR MODE x O OFF FUNCTION ADVANCED PROGRAM SETTINGS TIMER SETTINGS INPUT OFF SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT M
117. LECT CD XT MOVE The pull down list will be displayed 13 Select PEAP MSCHAPv2 and press the ENTER button 14 Select USER NAME field and press the ENTER button The character entry screen software keyboard will be displayed Set a user name e A user name must be 32 characters or less page 147 149 5 Using On Screen 15 After completing setting a user name select the PASSWORD field and press the ENTER button EAPTYPE U PEAP MSCHS Pv2 B 2JaJaJjsJsJzJaJejoj FJ lt 1 Jj PJ wJxJvJzJej J J J _Mope sP jJ BS J lt gt gt _ CANCEL J The character entry screen software keyboard will be displayed Set a password e A password must be 32 characters or less 16 After completing setting the password select CA CERTIFICATE field and press the ENTER button The drive list screen will be displayed e For operating the FILES screen see 4 Using the Viewer in the User s Manual PDF To return to the AUTHENTICATION page press the EXIT button NOTE Installing a digital certificate You can install each digital certificate client certificate and CA certificate for PROFILE 1 or 2 on a file by file basis e Install a root CA certificate for a CA certificate e f you install a digital certificate over your existing digital certificate the existing digital certificate will be overwritten with the new dig
118. LEFT BOTTOM RIGHT Sub display Main display Reference point Reference point BORDER Select the display boundary of the main display and sub display of the PICTURE BY PICTURE screen Main display Sub display Main display Sub display Display boundary TIP For WUXGA type six steps can be selected For WXGA type XGA type three steps can be selected 101 5 Using On Screen Menu GEOMETRIC CORRECTION SETUP EDGE BLENDING INPUT ADJUST INFO KEYSTONE CORNERST ONE HORIZONTAL CORNER VERTICAL CORNER PINCUSHION PC TOOL RESET XUX EXIT v MOVE MOVE HDMI1 ADVANCED KEYSTONE Display the trapezoid correction screen and adjust the trapezoidal distortion of the projection screen To display the KEYSTONE screen select DISPLAY SEOMETRIC CORRECTION KEYSTONE in the on screen menu The IGEOMETRIC CORRECTION screen can also be displayed by pressing the Geometric button on the remote control HORIZONTAL Adjustments when projecting from a diagonal direction to the screen VERTICAL Adjustments when projecting from the top or bottom direction to the screen EE Li e Adjusts the distortion when performing trapezoidal correction with the screen moved in the vertical direction using the lens shift THROW RATIO Adjusts according to the projection ratio of the optional lens used Model name of len
119. Ltd Keep Blocking Unblock Ask Me Later Windows Firewall has blocked this program from accepting connections from the Internet or a network If you recognize the program or trust the publisher you can unblock it When should unblock 4 program 218 8 User Supportware 3 Input the starting password of Desktop Control Utility 1 0 and click OK The Current password window will be displayed Current password 9 The current password for logging onto the from the projector is as follows Password PMHN o j ew NOTE The character string displayed in the password field varies each time Desktop Control Utility 1 0 is started 4 Write down the character string displayed in the password field Write down in the screen example of step 3 5 Click OK Desktop Control Utility 1 0 will be started Move to the room where the projector is installed with the paper on which you have written down the password in step 4 219 8 User Supportware Operating the projector connecting computer 1 Connecta USB mouse that is commercially available to the projector 2 Turn on the power to the projector Set the LAN setting of the projector in advance 3 Press the 8 Ethernet button on the remote control The application menu screen will be displayed ES DESKTOR a NETWORK REMOTE DESKTOP PROJECTOR CONNECTION APPLICATION MENU e NETWORK SETTINGS MM
120. M SIM SCREEN SIZE This function will perform gamma correction appropriate for the screen size LARGE For screen size of 150 MEDIUM For screen size of 100 SMALL For screen size of 50 NOTE This function is available only when DICOM SIM is selected for DETAIL SETTINGS 90 5 Using On Screen Adjusting Color Temperature COLOR TEMPERATURE This option allows you to select the color temperature of your choice A value between 5000 and 10500 K can be set in 100 K units NOTE When PRESENTATION or HIGH BRIGHT is selected in REFERENCE this function is not available Adjusting Brightness and Contrast DYNAMIC CONTRAST When set the most optimal contrast ratio is adjusted according to the video d ua usos Dynamic contrast is disabled MOTION IMAGE Most optimal settings for moving images STILL IMAGE Most optimal settings for static images Rapidly follows any changes in the video NOTE e Depending on the conditions projector settings such as DYNAMIC CONTRAST may not be able to be selected Adjusting White Balance WHITE BALANCE This allows you to adjust the white balance Contrast for each color RGB to adjust the white level of the screen Brightness for each color RGB is used to adjust the black level of the screen COLOR CORRECTION Corrects the color for all signals Adjusts the tone for the colors red green blue yellow magenta and
121. MENT MODE ul SELECT us EXIT MOVE The confirmation screen is displayed 36 3 Convenient Features 11 Press the 4 or button to highlight the OK and press the ENTER button This completes the CORNERSTONE correction e Select CANCEL and press the ENTER button to return to the CORNERSTONE screen Selecting CANCEL will return to the adjustment screen without saving changes Step 3 Selecting RESET will return to the factory default Selecting UNDO will exit without saving changes NOTE e Even when the projector is turned on the last used correction values are applied e Carry out either one of the following actions to clear the adjustment value of CORNERS TONE e In Step 11 select RESET and then press the ENTER button e Press the Geometric button for 2 or more seconds e Run DISPLAY GEOMETRIC CORRECTION gt RESET in the on screen menu e Using CORNERSTONE correction can cause the image to be slightly blurred because the correction is made electronically 37 3 Convenient Features Preventing the Unauthorized Use of the Projector SECURITY A keyword can be set for your projector using the Menu to avoid operation by an unauthorized user When a keyword is set turning on the projector will display the Keyword input screen Unless the correct keyword is entered the pro jector cannot project an image The SECURITY setting cannot be cancelled by using the RESET of the menu To
122. MPUTER 8 HDBaseT ENTER gt EXIT SETUP INFO ENTRY LIST TEST PATTERN ADVANCED This screen belongs to a HDBaseT model 3 Use the 4 gt A or Y to select ENTRY LIST and press the ENTER button The ENTRY LIST windows will be displayed If the ENTRY LIST window is not displayed switch the menu to ADVANCED To switch the menu between ADVANCED and BASIC select SETUP CONTROL gt TOOLS ADMIN ISTRATOR MODE gt MENU page 114 SOURCE NAME 1280x1024 60Hz NO 001 RESOLUTION 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 COMPUTER BNC CV HDMI1 HDBaseT COMPUTER BNC CV HDMI1 COMPUTER ALL DELETE BNC CV PAGE UP HDMI1 COMPUTER PAGE DOWN EDIT 86 5 Using On Screen Entering the currently projected signal into the Entry List STORE 1 Press the or Y button to select any number 2 Press the 4 or button to select STORE and press the ENTER button SOURCE NAME 1280x1024 60Hz NTSC358 AAA 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 RESOLUTION 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 COMPUTER BNC CV HDMI1 HDBaseT BNC CV HDMI1 COMPUTER BNC CV HDMI1 COMPUTER BNC CV HDMI1 Calling up
123. Multi Screen Projection 9 segmented portions for Black Level adjustment The center projector This function adjusts the brightness level of 9 segmented portions for the center projector and 4 segmented portions for the left bottom projector as shown below TOP CENTER TOP LEFT TOP RIGHT ON Mee ee eee eee CENTER LEFT CENTER CENTER RIGHT ITE BOTTOM LEFT BOTTOM RIGHT BOTTOM CENTER TOP CENTER TOP RIGHT CENTER RIGHT CENTER e The number of black level division screens maximum of nine divisions changes depending on the number of edge blending positions selected top bottom right left In addition when the top bottom and left right ends are selected the corner division screen appears e he edge blending width is the width set in the range and the corner is formed by the intersecting area of the top bottom ends or left right ends e The BLACK LEVEL can be adjusted to make it brighter only 76 5 Using On Screen Menu Using the Menus NOTE The on screen menu may not be displayed correctly while interlaced motion video image is projected 1 Press the MENU button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the menu INPUT DISPLAY SETUP INFO e IMAGE OPTIONS VIDEO 3D SETTINGS MODE STANDARD PRESET 2 PRESENTATION CTI DETAIL SETTINGS CONTRAST 4 em gt BRIGHTNESS gt GDES SHARPNESS 1 emi gt GLP RESET CUL SELECT
124. NEC Projector PA622U PA522U PA672W PA572W PA722X PA622X PA621U PA521U PA671W PA571W PA721X PA621X User s Manual Ver 3 7 14 Apple Mac Mac OS and MacBook are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Internet Explorer NET Framework and PowerPoint are either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries MicroSaver is a registered trademark of Kensington Computer Products Group a division of ACCO Brands Adobe Adobe PDF Adobe Reader and Acrobat are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Virtual Remote Tool uses Winl2C DDC library Nicomsoft Ltd HDMI the HDMI Logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC Homi HIGH DEFINITION MULTIMEDIA INTERFACE DisplayPort and DisplayPort Compliance Logo are trademarks owned by the Video Electronics Standards Associa tion gt HDBaseT is a trademark of HDBaseT Alliance HDBT Trademark PJLink is a trademark applied for trademark rights in Japan the United States of America and other countries and areas Wi Fi Wi Fi Alliance and Wi Fi Protected Access WPA WPA2 are registered trademarks of the Wi Fi Alli ance Blu ray is a trademark of Blu ray Disc Association CRESTRON and
125. NECTION To stop emitting radio waves from the USB Wireless LAN Unit select DISABLE from the PROFILES list Selecting SIMPLE ACCESS POINT will allow the projector to create an infrastructure network The IP address of the projector will be set automatically Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically to set the IP ad dress of a connected computer It takes a few seconds for a change of your computer s IP ad dress to come into effect in Windows 7 Windows Vista while it takes one or two minutes in Window XP When you connect with your computer to save your profile and select Automatically connect when within range from the Properties tab of Wireless Network in Windows for your selected profile your wireless LAN will be accessed under the following conditions e at the time of turning on the computer or the projector e when the notebook type is within the range of the projector s wireless LAN can be achieved Data transmission between wireless LAN and wired LAN is not possible When the SIMPLE ACCESS POINT mode is used to send images it is recommended to connect to only one computer 141 5 Using On Screen Menu When selecting WPS the network will be connected by using settings stored automatically with the WPS function Selecting WPS will allow the projector to access the network by using the settings the WPS function automatically stored DHCP Place a check mark to automatically assign an IP ad
126. ON FRI MON SAT EVERY DAY x O POWER INPUT ECO MODE HDMI1 HDMI DisplayPort BNC BNC CV COMPUTER HDBaseT DATE MM DD YYYY IME HH MM INTERNET TIME SERVER P ADDRESS x ssks x ssks OFF ON pu xs OFF ON 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 FIRST WEEK SECOND WEEK THIRD WEEK FOURTH WEEK LAST WEEK SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT x j 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 FIRST WEEK SECOND WEEK THIRD WEEK FOURTH WEEK LAST WEEK x ssks 01 00 00 30 00 30 01 00 OFF CONTROL ID REMOTE SENSOR fi FRONT BACK FRONT BACK HDBase T BEEP ON OFF ON DATE AND TIME SETTINGS DAY START IME START SETTINGS MON EXIT DAY EXIT IME EXIT p ST OFF ce s po p MEE S p Po P i 12 00 11 30 11 00 10 30 10 00 09 30 09 00 08 30 08 00 07 30 07 00 06 30 06 00 05 30 05 00 04 30 TIME 04 00 03 30 03 00 02 30 02 00 01 30 01 00 00 30 ZONE GMT 00 00 00 30 01 00 01 30 02 00 02 30 03 00 03 30 SETTIMGS 04 00 04 30 05 00 05 30 06 00 06 30 07 00 07 30 08 00 08 30 09 00 09 30 10 00 10 30 11 00 11 30 12 00 12 30 13 00 a NN S NENNEN I E MEN po NENNEN po Ss p p OFF 8 HDBaseT will not be displayed for MM models 82 5 Using On Screen Default ROFILES DISABLE PROFILE 1 PROFILE 2 P ADDRESS UBNET MASK
127. ONNECTION window appears 2 Operate the wireless keyboard to input the IP address of Windows 7 and click CONNECTION The log on screen of Windows 7 is displayed in the screen projected by the projector 3 Operate the wireless keyboard to input the user s password and press Enter The remote desktop function is started Windows 7 desktop is displayed in the screen projected by the projector Log out the computer Use the wireless keyboard connected to the projector to operate Windows 7 NOTE When the projection is made with the remote desktop function the background color of the desktop is changed to solid color 61 3 Convenient Features Exiting the Remote Desktop 1 Operate the wireless keyboard to click Start from the desktop screen projected by the projector PC Control Utility 3 0 0 9 Connect to a Network Projector Computer w o Ulead Photo Explorer 8 0 SE Basic Network 4 Connect To Viewer PPT Converter 3 0 Q Desktop Control Control Panel Default Programs Windows Media Center Help and Support gt All Programs Windows Security 2 Click X on the right of the start menu The remote desktop function is stopped 3 Press the button for an input terminal other than S Ethernet on the remote control Switch the input terminal using the INPUT button for operations on the main body Selling OPTIONS in REMOTE DESKTOP Clicking OPTIONS displays the
128. On Screen Menu Turning On or Off Remote Sensor REMOTE SENSOR This option determines which remote sensor on the projector is enabled in wireless mode The options are FRONT BACK FRONT BACK and HDBaseT Only HDBaseT models will be displayed NOTE e he remote control of the projector will not be able to receive signals if the power supply of the HDBaseT transmission device connected to the projector is switched on when this has been set to HDBaseT JIP e f the remote control system does not function when direct sunlight or strong illumination strikes the remote control sensor of the projector change another option Enabling Key Sound and Error Sound BEEP This feature turns on or off the button sound or alarm when an error occurs or the following operations are per formed e Displaying the main menu e Switching sources e Resetting data by using RESET Pressing POWER ON or STANDBY button 121 5 Using On Screen NETWORK SETTINGS INPUT ADJUST DISPLAY e SOURCE OPTIONS WIRED LAN PROJECTOR NAME DOMAIN ALERT MAIL NETWORK SERVICE P EXIT MOVE Imporlant e Consult with your network administrator about these settings e When using a wired LAN connect the Ethernet cable LAN cable to the Ethernet HDBaseT port Ethernet port for MM models on the projector page 169 TIP The network settings you make will not be affected even when
129. Operation Connecting Your Computer Connecting the Power Cord 1 Connect your computer to the projector This section will show you a basic connection to a computer For information about other connections see 2 Making Connections on page 157 Connect the display output terminal mini D sub 15 pin on the computer to the computer video input terminal on the projector with a commercially available computer cable with ferrite core and then turn the knobs of the con nectors to secure them 2 Connect the supplied power cord to the projector First connect the supplied power cord s three pin plug to the AC IN terminal of the projector and then connect the other plug of the supplied power cord in the wall outlet Upon connecting the power cable the POWER indicator of the projector will light up in orange If there are no input signals the device will go into the standby mode after about 10 seconds and light up in red The STATUS indicator will light off This will apply for both indicators when NORMAL is selected for STANDBY MODE See the Power Indicator section page 270 To wall outlet Computer cable with ferrite core sold commercially Make sure that the prongs are fully inserted into both the AC IN and the wall outlet A CAUTION Parts of the projector may become temporarily heated if the projector is turned off with the POWER button or if the AC power supply is disconnected duri
130. P HDCP technology HDCP is an acronym for High bandwidth Digital Content Protection High bandwidth Digital Content Protection HDCP is a system for preventing illegal copying of video data sent over a High Definition Multimedia Interface HDMI If you are unable to view material via the HDMI input this does not necessarily mean the projector is not functioning properly With the implementation of HDCP there may be cases in which certain content is protected with HDCP and might not be displayed due to the decision intention of the HDCP community Digital Content Protection LLC Video Deep Color 8 10 12 bit LipSync Audio LPCM up to 2 ch sample rate 32 44 1 48 KHz sample bit 16 20 24 bit 5 95 to 104 F 35 to 40 C Forced eco mode PA622U PA522U will shift to the eco mode in stages starting from 33 C e These specifications and the product s design are subject to change without notice 263 10 Appendix MM Models Method Three primary color liquid crystal shutter projection method Specifications of main Liquid crystal panel PA721X PA621X 786 432 1024 dots x 768 lines PA671W PA571W 1 024 000 1280 dots x 800 lines Projection lenses Zoom Manual zoom range depends on lens Focus Manual Lens shifting Manual PA721X PA671W PA621U 350 W AC lamp 264 W when Eco mode is on PA621X PA571W PA521U 330 W AC lamp 264 W when Eco mode is on lOpticaldevice J Opticalisolation b
131. PEAP MSCHAP v2 WPA2 EAP AES PEAP MSCHAP v2 USE DIGITAL CERTIFI Select this if you use a digital certificate for WPA EAP TKIP PEAP MSCHAP v2 WPA CATE EAP AES PEAP MSCHAP v2 WPA2 EAP TKIP PEAP MSCHAP v2 WPA2 EAP AES PEAP MSCHAP v2 52 3 Convenient Features NAME HOST NAME Enter the hostname of the network connected to the projector A host name must be 15 or less NETWORK SERVICE HTTP PASSWORD Set a password for HTTP server A password must be 10 characters or less CRESTRON ROOMVIEW for managing from the computer DISABLE Disables ROOMVIEW ENABLE Enables ROOMVIEW CRESTRON CONTROL for managing from the controller DISABLE Disables CRESTRON CONTROL ENABLE Enables CRESTRON CONTROL IP ADDRESS Set your IP address of CRESTRON SERVER Setyour IP ID of CRESTRON SERVER TIP The CRESTRON settings are required only for use with CRESTRON ROOMVIEW For more information visit http www crestron com e INFORMATION WIRED LAN Display a list of settings of wired LAN connection WIRELESS LAN Display a list of settings of wireless LAN connection UPDATE Reflect settings when they are changed 53 3 Convenient Features Projecting Your Computer s Screen Image from the Projector via a Network NETWORK PROJECTOR MM Models By selecting the projector connected to the same network as that of your PC the PC screen image can be projected to the screen via network There is no need of c
132. PERFORMANCE screen Making settings to OPTIONS will allow you to display the desktop background or to enable the window animation function during the Remote Desktop operation However doing this will cause the display s or mouse s response to slow down If the displays or mouse s response is slowed down try one or more of the following DESKTOP BACKGROUND Clear the check mark to display the desktop background in solid color MENU AND WINDOW ANIMATION Clear the check mark to disable menu and window animation THEMES Clear the check mark not to use Themes SHOW CONTENTS OF WINDOW WHILE DRAGGING Clear the check mark to show only the window pane while dragging 62 4 Multi Screen Projection Q Things that can be done using multi screen projection This projector can be used singly or arranged in multiple units for multi screen projection We will introduce an example using two projection screens here Case 1 Using a single projector to project two types of videos at the same time PIP PICTURE BY PICTURE Case 2 Using four projectors liquid crystal panel XGA to project video with a resolution of 1920 x 1080 pixels TILING Case 1 Using a single projector to project two types of videos PIP PICTURE BY PICTURE Connection example and projection image In the case of PICTURE BY PICTURE In the case of PIP On screen menu operations Display DISPLAY PIP PICTURE BY PICTURE MODE screen in the on
133. PICTURE PIP SETTING X EXIT MOVE HDMI1 ADVANCED This displays the PIP PICTURE BY PICTURE screen in the on screen menu 2 Select PICTURE SWAP using the W A buttons and then press the ENTER button Display the screen for switching the display positions 3 Select ON using the Y button and then press the ENTER button PICTURE SWAP OFF e oN S ED The video of the main display will switch with that of the sub display Sub display video Main display video ko Sub display video When turned OFF When turned ON Main display video The signal output from the HDMI output terminal does not change even if the display positions are switched 4 Press the menu button The on screen menu will disappear 69 4 Multi Screen Projection Restrictions The following operations are enabled only for the main display e Audio visual adjustments e Video magnification compression using the partial D ZOOM ZOOM buttons However magnification compression is up to the positions set in PICTURE BY PICTURE BORDER only e TEST PATTERN The following operations are enabled for both the main display and sub display These operations cannot be ap plied individually Momentary deletion of video audio e Video pause PIP PICTURE BY PICTURE cannot be used when a 3D video is being displayed When using the PIP PICTURE BY PICTURE function CLOSED CAPTION and
134. POLUM screen PC TOOL For future support Recall the geometric correction data that is registered in the projector beforehand There are three types of registered data NOTE e KEYSTONE CORNERSTONE and PINCUSHION cannot be selected when setting the geometric correction using a PC tool e To clear the GEOMETRIC CORRECTION data that has been set up press the Geometric button for 2 or more seconds e As electrical correction is carried out in geometric correction the brightness may be affected and the picture quality may be degraded RESET Reset the adjustment value that has been set up in GEOMETRIC CORRECTION return to the initial value 105 5 Using On Screen Menu EDGE BLENDING INPUT ADJUST GEOMETRIC CORRECTION e SETUP INFO MODE OFF C ALXSELECT EXIT v MOVE MOVE HDMI1 ADVANCED This adjusts the edges boundaries of the projection screen when projecting high resolution videos using a combina tion of several projectors in the up down left and right positions MODE This enables or disables the EDGE BLENDING function When MODE is set to ON the TOP BOTTOM LEFT RIGHT and BLACK LEVEL settings can be adjusted TOP BOTTOM LEFT RIGHT This selects the EDGE BLENDING locations on the left right top and bottom on the screen The following settings can be adjusted when an item is selected page 71 CONTROL Enable TOP BOTTOM LEFT and RIGHT functions MARKER
135. Press the ID SET button on the remote control The CONTROL ID screen will be displayed CONTROL ID 1 CONTROL ID OFF BNC BNC CV BNC YIC 5 Computer HDBaseT USB A E lt X EXIT X I 0 200 KAT C3 C C LENSSHIFT EXIT If the projector can be operated with the current remote control ID the AC TIVE will be displayed If the projector cannot be operated with the current remote control ID the INACTIVE will be displayed To operate the inactive projector assign the control ID used for the projector by using the following procedure Step 3 3 Press one of numeric keypad buttons while pressing and holding the ID SET button on the remote control Example INPUT PBP POP AUTOADJ OOO To assign 3 press the 3 button on the remote control No ID means that all the projectors can be operated together with a single remote control To set No ID enter 000 or press the CLEAR button TIP The range of IDs is from 1 to 254 4 Release the ID SET button voL RIAK 20 C CJ updated CONTROL ID screen will displayed NOTE x Wu sm The IDs can be cleared in a few days after the batteries are run down or removed M e Accidentally pressing any one of the buttons of the remote control will clear currently cec NEC specified ID with batteries removed 120 5 Using
136. T SHUTTER C LENS SHIFT PICTURE DISPLAY COLOR j3DSet SETUP CTL INFO HELP NEC LENSSHIFT PICTURE DISPLAY ASP COLOR 3D Set SET CTL INFO HELP 3 Convenient Features Changing Eco Mode Checking Energy Saving Effect Using Eco Mode ECO MODE This feature enables you to select two brightness modes of the lamp OFF and ON modes The lamp life can be extended by turning on the ECO MODE OFF This is the default setting 100 Brightness ON Low lamp power consumption approx 80 Brightness To turn on the ECO MODE do the following 1 Press the ECO button on the remote control to display ECO MODE screen 2 Use the A or Y button to select ON 3 Press the ENTER button To change from ON to OFF Go back to Step 2 and select OFF Repeat Step 3 NOTE e The ECO MODE can be changed by using the menu Select SETUP INSTALLATION LAMP MODE ECO MODE e The lamp life remaining and lamp hours used can be checked in USAGE TIME Select INFO USAGE TIME e ECO MODE is always set to OFF for 1 minute immediately after the lamp is turned on The lamp condition will not be affected even when ECO MODE is changed e After a lapse of 1 minute from when the projector displays a blue black or logo screen ECO MODE will automatically switch to ON e f the projector is overheated in OFF mode there may be a case where the
137. T SCREEN TYPE 4 3 SCREEN WALL COLOR OFF FAN MODE AUTO LAMP MODE REF WHITE BALANCE STATIC CONVERGENCE XUX EXIT v MOVE MOVE HDMI1 ADVANCED Selecting Projector Orientation ORIENTATION This reorients your image for your type of projection The options are desktop front projection ceiling rear projection desktop rear projection and ceiling front projection NOTE e Please consult the retail store if you require special installation services e g when mounting the projector to a ceiling Never install the projector on your own This may result in the projector falling down and causing injury to people e When using the projector suspended from a ceiling ensure that people do not stay below the projector In the event the lamp were to break there is a risk that glass fragments may fall from the projector AUTO This automatically detects and projects the DESKTOP FRONT and CEILING FRONT NOTE e The DESKTOP REAR and CEILING REAR will not be detected Please select manually DESKTOP FRONT CEILING REAR E TIP e Check whether the automatic DESKTOP FRONT is installed within 10 degrees for floor installation and whether the CEILING FRONT is within 10 degrees for ceiling installation Select manually when the projection screen is inverted 111 5 Using On Screen Menu Selecting Aspect Ratio and Position for S
138. T v MOVE gt MOVE lt gt HDMI1 ADVANCED MODE This function allows you to determine how to save settings for DETAIL SETTINGS of PRESET for each input STANDARD saves settings for each item of PRESET Preset 1 through 7 PROFESSIONAL Saves all the settings of PICTURE for each input NOTE e When TEST PATTERN is displayed MODE cannot be selected PRESET This function allows you to select optimized settings for your projected image You can adjust neutral tint for yellow cyan or magenta There are seven factory presets optimized for various types of images You can also use DETAIL SETTINGS to set user adjustable settings to customize each gamma or color Your settings can be stored in PRESET 1 to PRESET 7 HIGH BRIGHT Recommended for use in a brightly lit room PRESENTATION Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file Recommended for typical TV program viewing MOVIE u aaa Recommended for movies GRAPHIC Recommended for graphics SUID Standard color values DICOM SIM Recommended for DICOM simulation format NOTE e DICOM SIM option is for training reference only and should not be used for actual diagnosis DICOM stands for Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine It is a standard developed by the American College of Radiol ACR and the National Electrical Manufacturers Association
139. URS USED TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS WIRED LAN and WIRELESS LAN To reset the lamp usage time see Clearing Lamp Hour Meter CLEAR LAMP HOURS below ALL DATA INCLUDING ENTRY LIST Reset all the adjustments and settings for all the signals to the factory preset except LANGUAGE BACKGROUND FILTER MESSAGE EDGE BLENDING MULTI SCREEN SCREEN TYPE GEOMETRIC CORRECTION REF WHITE BALANCE STATIC CONVERGENCE ADMINISTRATOR MODE CONTROL PANEL LOCK SE CURITY COMMUNICATION SPEED DATE AND TIME SETTINGS CONTROL ID STANDBY MODE FAN MODE LAMP LIFE REMAINING LAMP HOURS USED FILTER HOURS USED TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS WIRED LAN and WIRELESS LAN Also deletes all the signals in the ENTRY LIST and returns to the factory preset NOTE Locked signals in Entry List cannot be reset Clearing Lamp Hour Meter CLEAR LAMP HOURS Resets the lamp clock back to zero Selecting this option displays submenu for a confirmation Select YES and press the ENTER button NOTE e Flapsed time of the lamp use will not be affected even when RESET is done from the menu e Performing CLEAR LAMP HOURS will return the LAMP ADJUST in LAMP MODE to its default adjustments When the projec tor is used for multi screen projection use LAMP ADJUST to adjust the brightness again 131 5 Using On Screen Clearing the Filter Usage Hours CLEAR FILTER HOURS Resets the filter usage back to zero
140. UT Blu ray player Audio Equipment Select the source name for its appropriate input connector after turning the projector Input connector Button on the remote control COMPUTER IN 7 COMPUTER 7 COMPUTER BNC IN 4 BNC 4 BNC NOTE e When the signal format is set to AUTO default factory setting when shipped the computer signal and component signal are automatically distinguished and switched If the signals cannot be distinguished select COMPONENT under ADJUST VIDEO SIGNAL TYPE in the on screen menu of the projector e To connect to a video device with a D connector use the sold separately D connector converter adapter model ADP DT1E 163 6 Installation and Connections Connecting HDMII Input You can connect the HDMI output of your Blu ray player hard disk player or notebook type PC to the HDMI 1 IN or HDMI 2 IN connector of your projector HDMI OUT HDMI 1 IN HDMI2 N DisplayPort IN COMPUTERIN AUDIO IN e ae o 2 USB 8 HDBaseT Au PNE Oa TO BNC IN CONTROL EMOTE Ri E E umi E vU LLL Iu se XM HDMI cable not supplied Use High Speed HDMI Cable 0 0 0 AUDIO IN R 0 Audio cable not supplied Input connector dung de Button on the remote control HDMI 1 IN
141. WORK PROJECTOR This shows information for projector name resolution and network wired wireless which are required to use Network Projector Use this information to set up for your computer NETWORK PROJECTOR PROJECTOR NAME PA621U Series ADVANCED DISPLAY RESOLUTION 1280 x 800 PIXEL CD WIRED LAN URL MM http 192 168 0 11 1an WIRELESS LAN URL MM PLEASE SET UP YOUR COMPUTER USING THIS INFORMATION ENTER EXIT REMOTE DESKTOP CONNECTION This allows you to set up for computer name entry and effects for Remote Desktop REMOTE DESKTOP CONNECTION CONNECTION ENTER EXIT ADVANCED MENU AND WINDOW ANIMATION THEMES SHOW CONTENTS OF WINDOW WHILE DRAGGING ENTER EXIT NOTE e A USB keyboard is required to set up the Remote Desktop Connection 139 5 Using On Screen Menu NETWORK SETTINGS MM NETWORK SETTINGS MM o goa WIRED LAN WIRELESS LAN WPS NETWORK HOST NAME HTTP SERVER INFORMATION l SELECT CD MOVE MOVE Important e Consult with your network administrator about these settings e When using a wired LAN connect the LAN cable Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port LAN of the projector gt page 169 e When using a wireless LAN attach the wireless LAN unit VPO2LM2 sold separately to the projector page 1 0 TIP The NETWORK SETTINGS MM you make will not be affected even when RESET is done from the menu Hints on How
142. Windows XP e Exit all running programs before installation If another program is running the installation may not be completed e Image Express Utility Lite will be installed to the system drive of your computer If the message There is not enough free space on destination is displayed free up enough space about 100 MB to install the program 1 Insert the accompanying NEC Projector CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The menu window will be displayed TIP If the menu window will not be displayed try the following procedure For Windows 7 1 Click start on Windows 2 Click All Programs Accessories gt 3 Type your CD ROM drive name example and LAUNCHER EXE in Name example Q ILAUNCH ER EXE 4 Click OK The menu window will be displayed 2 Click Installing Image Express Utility Lite on the menu window The installation will start END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT screen will be displayed Read END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT carefully 3 If you agree click l agree and then click Next e Follow the instructions on the installer screens to complete the installation When the installation is complete you will return to the menu window When the installation is complete a completion message will be displayed 4 Click OK This completes the installation HP e Uninstalling Image Express Utility Lite To uninstall Image Express Utility Lite do the same p
143. X folder 4 Double click PC Control Utility Pro 5 pkg The installer will start 5 Click Next END USER LICENSE AGHEEMENT screen will be displayed 6 Read END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT and click Next The confirmation window will be displayed 7 Click I accept the terms in the license agreement Follow the instructions on the installer screens to complete the installation Step 2 Connect the projector to a LAN Connect the projector to the LAN by following the instructions in Connecting to a Wired LAN 169 and Controlling the Projector by Using an HTTP Browser page 44 Step 3 Start PC Control Utility Pro 5 1 Open your Applications folder in Mac OS 2 Click the PC Control Utility Pro 5 folder 3 Click the PC Control Utility Pro 5 icon PC Control Utility Pro 5 will start NOTE e For the Schedule function of the PC Control utility Pro 5 to work you must have your computer running and not in sleep mode Select Energy Saver from the System Preferences in Mac and disable its sleep mode before running the scheduler e When NORMAL is selected for STANDBY MODE from the menu the projector cannot be turned on via the network wired LAN connection HP Viewing the Help of PC Control Utility Pro 5 e Displaying the Help file of PC Control Utility Pro 5 while it is running e From the menu bar click Help Help in this order The Help screen will be displayed e D
144. a certified DisplayPort cable D e Depending on the computer some time may be required until the image is displayed e Some DisplayPort cables commercially available have locks e disconnect the cable press the button on the top of the cable s connector then pull the cable out e Power can be supplied to the connecting device from the Display Port input terminal maximum of 1 65 W How ever power will not be supplied to the computer e When signals from a device that uses a signal converter adapter are connected to the DisplayPort input connector in some cases the image may not be displayed e When the HDMI output of a computer is connected to the DisplayPort input connector use a converter commer cially available 159 6 Installation and Connections Cautions when using a DVI signal When the computer has a DVI output connector use a commercially available converter cable to connect the computer to the projector s HDMI 1 or HDMI 2 input connector only digital video signals can be input Also con nect the computer s audio output to the projectors BNC audio input connector In this case switch the HDMI1 or HDMI2 setting at on screen menu s audio selection on the projector to BNC page 127 To connect the computer s DVI output connector to the projector s DisplayPort input connector use a commercially available converter NOTE When Viewing a DVI Digital Signal Turn off the power of the computer and pr
145. a signal from the Entry List LOAD Press the A or V button to select a signal and press the ENTER button Editing a signal from the Entry List EDIT 1 Press the A or Y button to select a signal you wish to edit 2 Press the 4 A or V button to select EDIT and press the ENTER button The Edit window will be displayed EDIT ENTRY NO RESOLUTION 1024 x 768 INPUT HDMI1 p amp LOCK X SKIP SOURCE NAME Enter a signal name Up to 18 alohanumeric characters can be used INPUT The input terminal can be changed The input terminal may be switched to HDMI1 HDMI2 Dis play Port BNC BNC CV BNC Y C COMPUTER HDBaseT ETHERNET for MM models LOCK Set so that the selected signal cannot be deleted when ALL DELETE is executed The changes made after LOCK execution cannot be saved SKIP Set so that the selected signal will be skipped during auto search 3 Set the above items and select OK and press the ENTER button NOTE The input terminal cannot be changed to the currently projected signal 87 5 Using On Screen Menu Cutting a signal from the Entry List CUT 1 Press the A or Y button to select a signal you wish to delete 2 Press the 4 A or V button to select CUT and press the ENTER button The signal will be deleted from the Entry List and the deleted signal will be displayed on the clipboard at the bottom of the Entry List NOTE e
146. able VGA e By using EASY CONNECTION function the complicated network settings can be simplified and the computer will automatically connect to the projector e The screen of your computer can be sent to up to four projectors at the same time e Audio transfer capability for Windows only e Image Express Utility Lite allows you to send the computer s screen image and audio to the projector over wired wireless LAN or USB connection e Audio transfer capability is available only when the computer connects with the projector in peer to peer net work Playing streaming video for Windows only e Image Express Utility Lite allows you to send streaming video from the computer to a single projector over wired or wireless LAN without the need of connecting a computer cable For list of supported movie files and playback requirements see page 225 of 4 Using the Viewer Geometric Correction Tool GCT for Windows only See Projecting an Image from an Angle Geometric Correction Tool in Image Express Utility Lite gt page 203 NOTE e When Image Express Utility Lite is used the audio from the COMPUTER AUDIO IN Mini Jack Stereo Mini may not be synchro nized with the video 196 8 User Supportware Using on Windows Step 1 install Image Express Utility Lite on the computer NOTE e To install or uninstall the program the Windows user account must have Administrator privilege Windows 7 Windows Vista and
147. aced GIF transparation GIF and animation GIF are not supported If an unsupported image is selected the icon will be displayed NOTE Maximum number of pixels of image which can be displayed are e Baseline JPEG 10000 x 10000 Progressive JPEG 1280 x 1280 GIF 1280 x 1280 Others 4000 x 4000 Some files supported by the above requirements may not be displayed Supported movie files File name extension Video compression expansion method Audio compression expansion method mpg mpeg MPEG2 MPEG Audio Layer2 MPEG Audio Layer3 wmv WMV9 WMAQ Standard mp4 H 264 AVC AAC LC Playback requirements Resolution 320 x 240 to 1280 x 720 Video frame rate up to 30fps Bitrate up to 15Mbps Audio sampling rate up to 48kHz Channel up to 2ch stereo Audio bit rate up to 256 Kbps Max file size up to 2GB 225 9 Using the Viewer MINI Models NOTE e Movie files converted by using the video audio format which is not supported by this projector cannot be played back In this case there will be no icon to show that playback is not possible Files with Digital Rights Management DRM protection cannot be played back Some of the movie files that meet the above requirements may not be played back Movie files may not be played back correctly depending on your network environment or the bit rate of your file WMV format video file will be displayed in an aspect ratio of 1 to 1 independently of its original aspec
148. age 118 Make sure that the projector is in the standby condition with the POWER cord connected The projector has a built in clock The clock will keep working for about two weeks after the main power is turned off If the main power is not supplied to the projector for two weeks or more the built in clock stops working Setting a new program timer 1 On the PROGRAM TIMER screen use the A or Y button to select SETTINGS and press the ENTER but ton PROGRAM TIMER SETTINGS The PROGRAM LIST screen will be displayed 2 Select a blank program number and press the ENTER button PROGRAM LIST NO DAY TIME FUNCTION EDIT DELETE BACK 15 ENTER EXIT The EDIT screen will be displayed 3 Make settings for each item as required EDIT EVENT NO 01 DAY UN gt TIME FUNCTION ADVANCED SETTINGS OFF gt REPEAT ACTIVE uu Place a check mark to enable the program DA Select days of the week for the program timer To execute the program from Monday to Friday select MON 115 5 Using On Screen Menu FRI To execute the program in everyday basis select EVERYDAY UME teet bison Set the time to execute the program Enter time in 24 hour format FUNCTION Select a function to be executed Selecting POWER will allow you to turn on or off the projector by setting ADVANCED SETTINGS Selecting INPUT will allow you to select a video source by setting ADVANCED SETT
149. ages via e mail when using wired LAN Placing a checkmark will turn on the Alert Mail feature Clearing a checkmark will turn off the Alert Mail feature Sample of a message to be sent from the projector The lamp and filters are at the end of its usable life Please replace the lamp and filters Projector Name NEC Projector Lamp Hours Used 100 H SENDER S ADDRESS Enter sender s address SMTP SERVER NAME Enter the SMTP server name to be connected to the projector HECIPIENT S ADDRESS Enter your recipients address Up to three addresses can be entered 1 2 3 TEST MAIL Send a test mail to check whether your settings are correct or not NOTE e f you execute a test you may not receive an Alert mail Should this happen check if network settings are correct f you entered an incorrect address in a test you may not receive an Alert mail Should this happen check if the Recipient s Address is correct SAVE Click this button to save your settings to the projectors memory 49 3 Convenient Features NETWORK SERVICE PJLink PASSWORD Set a password for PJLink A password must be 32 characters or less Do not forget your password However if you forget your password consult with your dealer HTTP PASSWORD Set a password for HTTP server A password must be 10 characters or less When a password is set up you will be prompted for your user name arbitrary and password during LOGON AMX BEACON Turn on or off for d
150. ait projection cannot be used Design and manufacturing conditions for the stand Please engage an installation service provider for the design and manufacture of the customized stand to be used for portrait projection Please ensure that the following are complied with when designing the stand 1 Maintain an opening of at least 310 x 170 mm so as not to obstruct the intake vent filter of the projector 2 Maintain a distance of at least 130 mm between the projector intake vent and the floor for the opening of the filter COVer 3 Use the four screw holes at the back of the projector to secure it to the stand Screw hole center dimension 200 x 250 mm Screw hole dimension on the projector M4 with a maximum depth of 8 mm Please design the stand such that the rear legs at the back of the projector do not contact the stand The front legs can be turned and removed 4 Horizontal adjustment mechanism for example bolts and nuts in four locations Please design the stand such that it does not topple over easily 166 6 Installation and Connections Reference drawings The drawing showing the dimensional requirements is not an actual stand design drawing Side View Front View Bottom View 310 or greater Filter cover when opened Horizontal adjuster Lens shift securing method 1 Pull the securing lever cover towards you to remove it e The cover cannot be detached from the projector 2 Turn the screws to the
151. al dial First turn the dial to the left edge then turn it further so that the knob is horizontal From this position turn the dial 1 full turn clockwise Vertical dial First turn the dial to the bottom edge then turn it further so that the knob is horizontal From this position turn the dial 2 full turns counterclockwise 1 Turn the distortion ring to the left edge Lens shift dials 2 Turn the focus lever clockwise and counterclockwise to adjust the focus at the center of the screen 3 Use the distortion ring to correct the screen s distor tion This also brings the edges of the screen into focus 4 Use the focus lever to adjust the screen s overall fo cus f the focus at the center of the screen is off turn the distortion ring a little counterclockwise The focus at the center of the screen can now be adjusted with the focus lever 24 2 Projecting an Image Basic Operation Zoom Turn the zoom lever or zoom ring clockwise and counterclockwise e The separately sold NP11FL lens does not have a zoom ring Adjusting the Tilt Feet 1 Turn the left and right tilt feet to adjust The tilt feet lengthen and shorten when turned The height of the projected image is adjusted by turning the left and right tilt feet If the projected image is tilted turn one of the tilt feet to adjust the image so that it is level Ifthe projected image is distorted see 3 6 Correcting Horizontal
152. al input RANDOM MR Reduces flickering random noise in an image MOSQUITO NR Reduces mosquito noise that appears around the edges of an image during Blu ray playback BLOCK NR Reduces block noise or mosaic like patterns by selecting ON Selecting Interlaced Progressive Conversion Process Mode DEINTERLACE This function allows you to select an interlaced to progressive conversion process for video signals NORMAL Automatically distinguishes a moving image from a static image to create a distinct image Please select MOVIE if there are any obvious jitter and noises a a Select when projecting moving images This is suitable for signals with a lot of jitter and noise Hg u u uu Select when projecting static images The video will flicker when a moving image is projected NOTE This function is not available with RGB signals CONTRAST Using the characteristics of the human eye a picture quality with a sense of contrast and resolution is achieved Suite vision is switched off Contrast and picture quality are automatically improved using the suite vision function NORMAL Adjust the gain manually 97 5 Using On Screen Menu SIGNAL TYPE Selection of RGB and component signals Normally this is set to AUTO Please change the setting if the color of the image remains unnatural Automatically distinguishes RGB
153. and Vertical Keystone Distortion COHNERSTONE page 35 and GEOMETRIC CORRECTION page 102 e The tilt feet can be lengthened by a maximum of 20 mm e The tilt feet can be used to tilt the projector by a maximum of 4 NOTE e Do not lengthen the tilt feet any more than 20 mm 0 8 Doing so will make the tilt feet s mount section unstable and could cause the tilt feet to come off the projector Do not use the tilt feet for any purpose other than adjusting the projector s projection angle Handling the tilt feet improperly such as carrying the projector by grasping the tilt feet or hooking it onto a wall using the tilt feet could damage the projec for Tilt foot 25 2 Projecting an Image Basic Operation Optimizing Computer Signal Automatically Adjusting the Image Using Auto Adjust When projecting a signal from the computer video input terminal BNC video input terminal anlaog RGB HDMI 1 input terminal HDMI 2 input terminal DisplayPort input terminal including the HDBaseT input signal adjust the picture quality with a single touch of the button if the edges of the screen are cut off or if the projection quality is bad Press the AUTO ADJ button to optimize a computer image automatically This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the first time Poor picture Normal picture STANDBY 19 9 ON FREEZE BLANK MUTE AV MUTE TEST EdgeBlend Multi Geometric
154. are e The configuration file of Image Express Utility Lite is located in Users lt your user name gt Library Preferences Jp necas Image Express Utility Lite plist e The configuration file of PC Control Utility Pro 5 is located in Users your user name gt Application Data NEC Projector User Supportware PC Control Utility Pro 5 188 8 User Supportware Operating the Projector Via the LAN Virtual Remote Tool This will help you perform operations such as projector s power on or off and signal selection via a LAN connection It is also used to send an image to the projector and register it as the logo data of the projector After registering it you can lock the logo to prevent it from changing Control Functions Power On Off signal selection picture freeze picture mute audio mute Logo transfer to the projector and remote control operation on your PC Virtual Remote screen Seres Computer cabl OFF COMPUTER eco CCS Series Computer cable d a w 2 Remote Control Window Toolbar This section provides an outline of preparation for use of Virtual Remote Tool For information on how to use Virtual Remote Tool see Help of Virtual Remote Tool page 191 TIP e Virtual Remote Tool can be used also with a serial connection NOTE e Logo data graphics that can be sent to the projector with Virtual Remote Tool has the fol
155. are keyboard will be displayed For using the software keyboard see page 151 f your computer is not password protected entering a password is not required e Up to four shared folders can be added e The maximum length of a path of the shared folder must be 15 alphanumeric characters for computer name and 23 alphanumeric characters for folder name SHARED FOLDER v ENABLE 2J3JaJjsJeJzJaJ Joj AJ FJ GJ 1 KJ LJ PJ RJ USER NAME PASSWORD Us wi vJzJej_ JJ LBS J lt lt gt gt OK J CANCEL 244 9 Using the Viewer MINI Models 6 Exit the setting Press the Y button to select OK and press the ENTER button This will close the SHARED FOLDER screen e Ifan error message appear your settings are not correct Try again SHARED FOLDER v ENABLE SHARED FOLDER WPC SHARED 7 USER NAME BBB PASSWORD 245 9 Using the Viewer MINI Models Disconnecting the shared folder from the projector e Disable the number of a shared folder you wish to disconnect Press the Y button to select ENABLE and press the ENTER button to clear it NOTE e When a PowerPoint file or PDF file is displayed do not disconnect your LAN cable If doing so the Viewer will not work SHARED FOLDER ww snK s ws Cui SELECT GD EXIT MOVE HP Connecting settings for Shared folder Settings
156. as been set in the HOSTS file of the computer being used Example 1 When the host name of the projector has been set to pj nec co jp access is gained to the network setting by specifying http pj nec co jp index html for the address or the entry column of the URL Example 2 When the IP address of the projector is 192 168 73 1 access is gained to the network setting by specifying http 192 168 73 1 index html for the address or the entry column of the URL PROJECTOR ADJUSTMENT Projector adjustment screen for HDBaseT models Projector adjustment screen for MM models PROJECTOR ADJUSTMENT NETWORK SETTINGS PROJECTOR ADJUSTMENT NETWORK SETTINGS a j j 2 ET Er EZ EZ gt fo vy Ff v En En SOURCE SELECT AVMUTE SOURCE SELECT AVMUT E HDMI1 HDMI2 DisplayPort E HDMI1 HDMI2 DisplayPort SOUND e eoo 9s BNC BNC CV BNC YIC ET BNC BNC CV BNC YIC EL PROJECTOR STATUS PROJECTOR STATUS ende EE 100 LAMP LIFE REMAINING 100 ERROR STATUS LAMP HOURS USED 1 NORMAL OPERATION LAMP HOURS USED NORMAL OPERATION FILTER HOURS USED 2 his FILTER HOURS USED Copyright C NEC Display Solutions Ltd 2013 All rights reserved mi Copyright C NEC Display Solutions Ltd 2014 rights reserved m POW
157. ation for operating a projector connected by LAN E Supported video chip wired or wireless serial connections RS 232C or computer connection cable e Operating the Projectc signal cable from the computer E Uninstalling Virtual R E i following projector operations are possible from the computer E Troubleshooting The following project t possible from th ut Copyright Revision e Power on off Input signal switching Muting temporarily disabling audio video e Freezing locking the projected image Logo image transfer Operating Remote Control When transferring the logo image Depending o logo t i n the projector to be connected it may not be possible to use the ogo transmission function Check the supported projectors When connecting by computer connection cable connector that can be used for the connection will differ depending on the projector It may not be able to communicate with the projector because the graphics e Displaying the help file using the Start Menu 1 Click Start All programs or Programs NEC Projector User Supportware Virtual Remote Tool and then Virtual Remote Tool Help in this order The Help screen will be displayed 191 8 User Supportware Controlling the Projector over LAN PC Control Utility Pro 4 Pro 5 Using the utility software PC Control Utility Pro 4 or PC Control Utility Pro 5
158. aximum resolution ACTUAL SIZE Displays the image in its actual size HEPEAT Turns on or off the repeat function ONE REPEAT Repeats one file only ALL REPEAT Repeats all files in the current folder TIP e Turning on REPEAT will display black screen during intermission between movies e AUTO PLAY SETTING Sets auto play for slideshow when a USB memory device is inserted into the USB port of the projector or when VIEWER is selected for SOURCE AUTO PLAY SETTING AUTO PLAY Cuz SELECT GD EXIT MOVE PICTURE Plays a first found still image in a drive MOVIE Plays a first found movie file in a drive Plays a first found PowerPoint file in a drive TIP e Auto play behavior is different between when a USB memory device is inserted into the USB port of the projector and when VIEWER is selected for SOURCE e Auto play starts for the first found file supporting the file type set up for Auto Play The file will be searched in the drive root or lower level e When VIEWER is selected for SOURCE the last selected file will be automatically played if it is found or the last selected folder will be searched and the first found file will be automatically played To automatically play a movie file in a USB memory store one movie file or change its file name so that it can be searched first 241 9 Using the Viewer MINI Models SORT SETTING Sets the order of displaying thumbnails or slides SORT SETTING
159. bnail screen will be displayed TIP e For more information about thumbnail screen see page 237 5 Use the AV 4 or button to select an icon The arrow symbol on the right indicates there are more pages pressing the CTL Y page down button will show the next page pressing the CTL A page up will Show the previous page 6 Press the ENTER button Operation varies depending on the selected file e Still image The selected slide will be displayed The lt or gt button can be used to select the next right slide or the previous left slide in the thumbnail screen e Pressing the ENTER button will display the control bar with which is used to select or rotate an slide page 240 230 9 Using the Viewer MM Models 5 5 Presen 01 Report_01 Abcd pdt h h Bcde pdf Butterfly wmv FghlJ pat Photo 01 bmp b h GIF PPT i Photo_02 glf Photo 03 pg Photo 04 png Presen xx ppt Others Folder 11 17 2010 20 28 42 sELECT CD uPFOLDER MOVE gt MOVE h m I Report 01 Abcd pdf a L s Bcde pdf Butterfly wmv Fghl pdt Photo 01 bmp b h GIF PPT 9 Photo 03 pg Photo 04 png Presen xx ppt Photo 02 glf 6 12 11 17 2010 15 49 06 401KB sELECT GD UPFOLDER MOVE MOVE J 9 Using the Viewer MINI Models e Movie file The movie file will start playing After finishing the playback the screen will turn t
160. by following the instructions in Connecting to a Wired LAN page 169 and Controlling the Projector by Using an HTTP Browser page 44 Step 3 Start Image Express Utility Lite for Mac OS 1 Open your Applications folder in Mac OS 2 Double click the Image Express Utility Lite folder 3 Double click the Image Express Utility Lite icon When Image Express Utility Lite for Mac OS starts the select window for destination will be displayed eoo Connect to Network Ports AirPort Easy Connection H4 Connect to Name IP Address Status Resolution Mi m Series 10 0 78 137 Available 1024x768 IP Address Update Quit Connect At the first time of startup END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT screen will be displayed before the select window for destination is displayed Read END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT and select l accept the terms in the license agreement and click 4 Select a projector to be connected and then click Connect Your desktop screen will be displayed on the projector HF Viewing the Help of Image Express Utility Lite for Mac 05 e From the menu bar click Help Image Express Utility Lite Help while Image Express Utility is run ning The Help screen will be displayed 202 8 User Supportware Projecting an Image from an Angle Geometric Correction Tool in Image Express Utility Lite MM Models The Geometric Cor
161. cannot be mounted in the opposite direction but trying to push it in by force could damage the wireless LAN unit port To prevent damage due to static electricity touch a nearby metal object a door knob aluminum sash etc before touching the Wireless LAN unit to eliminate the static electricity from your body Disconnect the power cord when mounting and removing the wireless LAN unit Mounting and removing the wireless LAN unit while the projector s power is on could damage the wireless LAN unit or result in malfunction on the projector If the projector should malfunction turn off the projector s power unplug the power cord then plug the power cord back in Do not attach USB devices other the wireless LAN unit to the USB LAN port inside the main body Do not attach the wireless LAN unit to the USB A port at the terminal unit as well 170 6 Installation and Connections 1 Press the button to set the projector to the standby mode then disconnect the power cord Wait for the projector to fully cool off 2 Press down on the buttons on the left and right and then pull the filter cover towards you to open it The cover will open about 90 degrees before it stops 3 Remove the filter unit by pulling out the tab 4 Slowly insert the wireless LAN unit into the USB LAN port e Remove the wireless LAN units cap set the unit with the front the side with the indicator facing upwards hold the back edge and insert the unit
162. cel 97 2007 format files may not be displayed Some restrictions on PDF files Fonts not embedded at the time of PDF creation may not be displayed Some functions included in font are not supported Example There are some restrictions on annotations selection form or color space It may take longer time to feed pages compared with a computer In some cases Adobe Acrobat format files may not be displayed 252 10 Appendix Q Throw distance and screen size Six separate bayonet style lenses can be used on this projector Refer to the information on this page and use a lens suited for the installation environment screen size and throw distance For instructions on mounting the lens see page 155 Lens types and throw distance WUXGA Type Screen size Lens model name 07 09 C 10 13 12 25 j 9 6 19 1 19 0 30 5 30 1 45 8 10 2 13 2 12 8 25 5 25 4 40 7 40 1 61 1 8 7 11 3 12 7 16 5 16 0 31 9 31 8 50 9 50 2 76 4 3 8 4 15 22 5 1 6 6 6 4 12 7 126 203 20 0 30 5 6 1 7 9 7 6 15 3 15 2 24 4 24 0 36 6 4 8 9 5 9 4 15 2 14 9 22 8 Calculation of the throw distance from the screen size NP1 1FL lens throw distance m H x 0 8 0 7 m min to 2 6 m max NP30ZL lens throw distance m H x 0 8 to H x 1 0 1 0 m min to 11 3 m max NP12ZL lens throw distance m H x 1 2 to H x 1 5 0 7 m min to 16 5 m max NP13ZL lens throw distance m
163. ches its end of usable life the projector will not turn on If this happens replace the lamp If the STATUS indicator lights orange with the power button pressed it means that the CONTROL PANEL LOCK is turned Cancel the lock by turning it off page 119 If the lamp fails to light and if the LAMP indicator flashes on and off in a cycle of six times wait a full minute and then turn on the power While the POWER indicator is blinking blue in short cycles the power cannot be turned off by using the power button Immediately after turning on the projector screen flicker may occur This is normal Wait 3 to 5 minutes until the lamp lighting is stabilized When the projector is turned on it may take some time before the lamp light becomes bright If you turn on the projector immediately after the lamp is turned off or when the temperature is high the fans run without display ing an image for some time and then the projector will display the image 17 2 Projecting an Image Basic Operation Selecting a Source Selecting the computer or video source NOTE on the computer or video source equipment connected to the projector Detecting the Signal Automatically Press the INPUT button for 1 second or longer The projector will search for the available input source and display it The input source will change as follows STANDBY 19 9 ON FREEZE BLANK MUTE AV MUTE TEST EdgeBlend Multi Geometric INPUT
164. creases as the distortion adjustment volume gets larger e Please note that the image will go out of focus due to the difference in the distance between the upper and lower or left and right sides and the center of the screen for projections cutting across corners Lenses with short focal points are also not recommended for projections cutting across corners as the image will go out of focus Reverse angle correction is also possible VERTICAL CORNER gt Reverse angle correction is also possible 103 5 Using On Screen Menu Adjustment method 1 Align the cursor with the HORIZONTAL CORNER or VERTICAL CORNER of the GEOMETRIC CORREC TION menu and then press the ENTER button e he adjustment screen will be displayed 2 Press the VA 4 buttons to align the cursor yellow box with the target adjustment point and then press the ENTER button e The cursor will change into an adjustment point yellow in color 3 Press the VA 4 buttons to adjust the corners or sides of the screen and then press the ENTER button e The adjustment point will go back to being a cursor yellow box Explanation of screen transition e The adjustment points of the four corners a c f and h in the drawing will move independently e The following adjustment points differ at the HORIZONTAL CORNER and VERTICAL CORNER HORIZONTAL CORNER When Point b in the drawing is moved and the upper side and Point g are moved the lower side will
165. creen SCREEN TYPE Screen type Sets the aspect ratio of the projection screen FHEE The ratio of the liquid crystal panel is selected Select this when projecting multi screen and 17 9 screen 2K For a screen with a 4 3 aspect ratio For a screen with a 16 9 aspect ratio 16 10 screen For a screen with a 16 10 aspect ratio NOTE e After changing the screen type check the setting of ASPECT RATIO in the menu page 95 Using the Wall Color Correction WALL COLOR e WHITEBOARD B BLACKBOARD E BLACKBOARD GRAY LIGHT YELLOW LIGHT GREEN LIGHT BLUE SKY BLUE LIGHT ROSE O PINK C This function allows for quick adaptive color correction in applications where the screen material is not white NOTE Selecting WHITEBOARD reduces lamp brightness Selecting Fan Mode FAN MODE Fan Mode is used to set the speed of the internal cooling fan MOD E Select three modes for fan speed AUTO HIGH and HIGH ALTITUDE AUTO The built in fans automatically run at a variable speed according to the internal temperature HIGH The built in fans run at high speed HIGH ALTITUDE The built in fans run at a high speed Select this option when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet 1700 meters or higher NOTE e Make sure the speed is set to HIGH when you are using this device continuously for several days Set FAN MODE to HIGH ALTITUDE when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet 1700
166. ct the projector to a wireless LAN Part Names of the Projector Front Top 1 Introduction The lens is sold separately The description below is for when the NP13ZL lens is mounted Lens Shift Dial vertical horizontal page 21 Zoom Lever Zoom Ring page 25 Remote Sensor page 13 Exhaust vent Heated air is exhausted from here Lamp Cover page 178 Controls page 9 Security Bar Attach an anti theft device The security bar accepts security wires or chains up to 0 18 inch 4 6 mm in diameter Adjustable Tilt Foot page 25 Monaural Speaker 10 W Mounting the strap Securing lever cover page 166 Indicator Section page 9 Hemote Sensor located on the front and the rear page 13 Adjustable Tilt Foot page 25 Lens Cap The optional lens is shipped with the lens cap Lens Focus Ring page 22 Lens Helease Button page 156 1 Mount the strap to the filter cover and lamp cover as shown on the diagram below 2 Insert the knot in the strap into the hole on the bottom of the projector and pull in the direction of the arrow to fasten How to paste the input selection character sticker of the remote control e Peel off the cover of the sticker and align the sticker holes with Buttons 1 to 6 before pasting e Please take care not to let the sticker contact the buttons when pasting e he explanations and illustrations in this manual are p
167. cting 3D videos This projector can be used to watch videos in 3D using commercially available active shutter type 3D eyewear In order to synchronize the 3D video and eyewear a commercially available 3D emitter needs to be connected to the projector on the projector side The 3D eyewear receives information from the 3D emitter and performs opening and closing on the left and right CAUTION Health precautions Before use please make sure to read any health precautions that may be stated in the operating manuals enclosed with the 3D eyewear and 3D video software Blu ray player games computer animation files etc Please take note of the following in order to avoid adverse health effects e Please do not use the 3D eyewear for purposes other than to watch videos Please keep a distance of at least 2 m away from the screen when watching videos Watching a video too close to the screen will increase eye fatigue Please do not watch videos continuously for a long period of time Please take a 15 minutes break after every hour of watching Please consult a doctor before watching if you or any of your family members have a history of suffering from seizures caused by light sensitivity Please stop watching immediately and take a rest when you feel physically unwell while watching vomiting gid diness nausea headaches sore eyes blurred vision cramps and dumbness in the limbs etc Please consult a doctor if the symptoms per
168. cting Images from the Projector over a LAN Image Express Utility 2 0 MM Jules s EEEE EENEN E 205 What you can do with Image Express Utility 2 0 205 Connecting the projector to a LAN 206 Basic Operation of Image Express Utility 2 0 207 Q Using the Projector to Operate Your Computer over a LAN Desktop Control Utility LO EE eres RTT 216 What you can do with Desktop Control Utility 1 0 216 Connecting the projector to LATI auos ceu sito 216 Using the projector to operate your computer s desktop screen 217 9 Using the Viewer MM Models 225 Q What you can do with the Viewer a aa 225 Preparing presentation materials a aa aaa 228 Projecting images stored in a USB memory 229 Starting the Viewer ence Sous teense ese 229 EEG TNS VIC WOR eR 234 Names and functions of Viewer screen 235 MIBWEFODBODSOIU S PULO
169. ctor is used to mean both A and B Example Placing two projectors side by side Edge Blending area Projected area Projector B T1 4 Multi Screen Projection Preparation e Turn on the projector and display a signal e When performing settings or adjustments using the remote control enable the CONTROL ID so as not to activate the other projectors page 120 Setting the overlap of projection screens 7 Enable EDGE BLENDING 1 Press the Edge Blend button The EDGE BLENDING screen will be displayed Align the cursor with MODE and then press the ENTER button The mode screen will be displayed INPUT ADJUST SETUP INFO MODE OFF ENTER EXIT lt HDMI1 ADVANCED 2 Select MODE ON and press the ENTER button OFF e ENTER This enables the Edge Blending function The following menu items are available TOP BOTTOM LEFT RIGHT and BLACK LEVEL 3 Select RIGHT for Projector A and LEFT for Projector B Press the ENTER button INPUT ADJUST SETUP INFO MODE ON BLACK LEVEL ENTER lt HDMI1 ADVANCED The following items are available CONTROL MARKER RANGE and POSITION 4 Multi Screen Projection 4 Select CONTROL ON and press the ENTER button ON MARKER ON RANGE f 128 POSITION gt
170. cure transmission This option will increase privacy and security when compared to use of 64 bit datalength encryption WPA PSK TKIP WPA PSK AES These options parovide stronger security WPA2 PSK TKIP WPA2 PSK AES than WEP WPA EAP TKIP EAP TLS WPA EAP AES EAP TLS WPA EAP TKIP 5 v2 WPA EAP AES PEAP MSCHAP v2 WPA2 EAP TKIP EAP TLS WPA2 EAP AES EAP TLS WPA2 EAP TKIP PEAP MSCHAP v2 WPA2 EAP AES PEAP MSCHAP v2 NOTE e he WEP settings must be the same as communication devices such as PC or access point in your wireless network e When you use WEP your image transmission speed will slow down e Other encryption keys than WEP 64bit and WEP 128bit are not available when AD HOC is selected from NETWORK TYPE e o install a digital certificate use the projector s menu page 145 INDEX Select encryption key when selecting WEP 64 bit or WEP 128 bit in SECURITY TYPE KEY When selecting WEP 64 bit or WEP 128 bit SECURITY TYPE Enter WEP key Characters ASCII Hexadecimal digit HEX WEP 64 bit Up to 5 characters Up to 10 characters WEP 128 bit Up to 13 characters Up to 26 characters When selecting WPA PSK TKIP WPA PSK AES WPA2 PSK TKIP or WPA2 PSK AES Enter encryption key Key length must be 8 or greater and 63 or less USERNAME Set a user name for WPA EAP WPA2 EAP PASSWORD Set a password for WPA EAP TKIP PEAP MSCHAP v2 WPA EAP AES PEAP MSCHAP v2 WPA2 EAP TKIP
171. cyan RED GREEN Direction Cyandirection BLUE Direction Magentadirection MAGENTA CYAN Direction SATURATION Direction i Direction YELLOW Red direction Direction Direction Direction i CONTRAST Adjusts the intensity of the image according to the incoming signal BRIGHTNESS Adjusts the brightness level or the back raster intensity SHARPNESS Controls the detail of the image 91 5 Using On Screen Menu COLOR Increases or decreases the color saturation level HUE Varies the color level from green to blue The red level is used as reference Input signal CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR RGB system of COMPUTER Display Port HDMI HDBaseT COMPONENT system of COMPUTER DisplayPort HDMI HDBaseT Composite Video S Video Pus Dp au GA USB A ETHERNET L Yes Adjustable No Not adjustable 1 Signals from transmission devices supporting HDBaseT can be input for HDBaseT models only 2 Signals from the USB A port can be input for MM models only NOTE e When TEST PATTERN is displayed CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR and HUE cannot be adjusted RESET The settings and adjustments for PICTURE will be returned to the factory settings with the exception of the following Preset numbers and REFERENCE within the PRESET screen The settings and ad
172. d by whether there are any slits notches Install the filter under the flange around the filter unit as follows 1 Attach the 2 filters with transparent frames fitted to the grips to the side of the filter unit where the knob is lo cated e Turn over the side of the filter with the transparent box and then install it 2 Attach the 2 filters with the black lines to the side of the filter unit where there is no knob Turn over the side of the filter with the black line and then insert the slits into the protrusions on the filter unit to install it 6 Mount the filter unit back onto the projector cabinet Insert the filter unit onto the projector with the sides on which the left and right hooks are located on the outside 7 Close the filter cover After closing push the filter cover near the buttons until a click sound is heard The filter cover will be secured in position This completes the filter replacement Go on to the clearing lamp and filter hour meters To clear the lamp usage hours and the filter usage hours 1 Place the projector where you use it 2 Plug the power cord into the wall outlet and then turn on the projector 3 Clear the lamp usage hours and the filter usage hours 1 From the menu select RESET CLEAR LAMP HOURS and reset the lamp usage hours 2 Select CLEAR FILTER HOURS and reset the filter usage hours page 132 182 8 User Supportware Operating Environment for Software
173. d to the projector Menu operation e Use the V or A button to move the cursor up or down Select the menu item and press the ENTER button to display the submenu Operation for Drive list screen 1 Press the button to move the cursor to the drive list Use the lt or button to switch between the menu and the drive list Press the Y or A button to select a type of drive press the lt or button to select the drive connected to the projector 2 Select the drive and press the ENTER button to switch to the thumbnail screen of the selected drive 235 9 Using the Viewer MINI Models Functions 02 REFRESH Displays additional media servers in the drive list screen Opens the OPTIONS menu SLIDE SETTING Sets up slides page 240 ER MOVIE SETTING Sets up movie files 241 E AUTO PLAY SETTING Sets up auto play page 241 SHAREED FOLDER Sets up a shared folder page 243 MEDIA SERVER Sets up a media server page 247 ES RETURN Closes the OPTIONS menu SYSTEM SETTING Switches to the system setting menu See wired LAN wireless LAN WPS network information and keyboard in 9 Application Menu page 138 USB Displays the icon for a USB memory inserted into the USB port of the projector SHARED FOLDER Displays up to four drives of a computer connected to a LAN set for con necting a shared folder See page 243 for setting up for connecting a shared foler of
174. dapter built into Mac e Wireless LAN adapter built into Mac Apple USB Ethernet adapter e Apple Thunderbolt Ethernet adapter Easy Connection supports only wireless LAN Supported Resolution SVGA 800 x 600 or higher required XGA 1024 x 768 recommended 1024 x 768 1280 x 800 recommended for WXGA type Supported Screen Colors 16 70 million colors required 185 8 User Supportware Installing Software Program Installation for Windows software The software programs except PC Control Utility Pro 5 support Windows 8 Windows 7 Windows Vista and Windows XP NOTE e To install or uninstall each software program the Windows user account must have Administrator privilege Windows Win dows 7 Windows Vista or Computer Administrator privilege Windows XP e Exit all running programs before installation If another program is running the installation may not be completed Virtual Remote Tool or PC Control Utility Pro 4 on Windows 8 Windows XP Home Edition and Windows XP Professional Microsoft NET Framework Version 2 0 is required The Microsoft NET Framework Version 2 0 3 0 or 3 5 is available from Microsoft s web page Download and install it on your computer 1 Insert the accompanying NEC Projector CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The menu window will be displayed NEC Projector User s Manual amp User Supportware NEC Display Solutions Ltd 2014 JIP If the
175. dress to the projector from your DHCP server Clear this check box to register the IP address or subnet mask number obtained from your network administrator IP ADDRESS Set your IP address of the network connected to the projector Up to 12 numeric when DHCP is turned off characters SUBNET MASK Set your subnet mask number of the network connected to the Up to 12 numeric projector when DHCP is turned off characters GATEWAY Set the default gateway of the network connected to the projector Up to 12 numeric when DHCP is turned off characters WNS CONFIGURA Set the IP address of your WINS server of the network connected Up to 12 numeric TION to the projector when DHCP is turned off characters AUTO DNS Place a check mark to automatically assign the IP address of your DNS server connected to the projector from your DHCP server Clear this check box to set the IP address of your DNS server connected to the projector DNS CONFIGURA Set the IP address of your DNS server on the network connected Up to 12 numeric TION to the projector when AUTO DNS is cleared characters ADVANCED This menu allows you to set various items for your wireless LAN connection network type security RECONNECT Retry to connect the projector to a network Try this if you have changed PROFILES The ADVANCED setting screen is available for WIRELESS LAN only NOTE Ifyou select EASY CONNECTION from PROFILES you cannot make settings
176. e Turns on or off AV MUTE Picture mute and turns on or off FREEZE Freeze a picture 4 EQ Sound Turns on or off AV MUTE Sound mute play the sound and turns up or down the volume 5 EJ Others Uses Update HTTP Server Settings and Information 6 Exit Exit Image Express Utility Lite You can also turn off the projector at the same time 7 B Help Displays the help of Image Express Utility Lite 199 8 User Supportware Viewing the Help file of Image Express Utility Lite e Displaying the Help file of Image Express Utility Lite while it is running Click the help icon on the control window The Help screen will be displayed e Displaying the Help file of GCT while it is running Click Help Help on the edit window The Help screen will be displayed e Displaying the help file using the Start Menu Click Start All programs or Programs NEC Projector User Supportware gt Image Express Utility Lite Image Express Utility Lite Help The Help screen will be displayed 200 8 User Supportware Starting Image Express Utility Lite from a USB Memory or SD Card Image Express Utility Lite can be started from commercially available removable media such USB memory or SD cards if it is copied beforehand This will eliminate the trouble of installing Image Express Utility Lite to your computer 1 C
177. e Side By Side 99 94 60 Top and Bottom 16 9 CO CO O O gt 4 5 4 O o gt OJO 60 Reduced Blanking O cO 10 0 Reduced Blankino 3 98 24 25 29 97 30 4 O cO cO 4 25 30 50 60 0 60 O O O C1 IN IN O gt N 50 25 50 1920 x 1080i 59 94 60 50 Side By Side 59 94 60 Top and Bottom Side By Side Frame Packing 1 Native resolution on XGA Type 2 Native resolution on WXGA Type 3 Native resolution on WUXGA Type Side By Side Top and Bottom 4 Approximate Value Frame Packino Side By Side Top and Bottom 10 Appendix 5 The projector may fail to display these signals correctly when AUTO is selected for ASPECT RATIO in the on screen menu The factory default is AUTO for ASPECT RATIO To display these signals select 16 9 for ASPECT RATIO 6 The projector may fail to display these signals correctly when AUTO is selected for ASPECT RATIO in the on screen menu The factory default is AUTO for ASPECT RATIO To display these signals select 4 3 for ASPECT RATIO e Signals exceeding the projector s resolution are handled with Advanced AccuBlend e With Advanced AccuBlend the size of characters and ruled lines may be uneven and colors may be blurred Upon shipment the projector is set for signals with standard display resolutions and frequencies but adjus
178. e button on the projector s front panel fully in turn the lens counterclockwise The lens comes off NOTE e Check the following areas if the lens unit cannot be removed even when the lens release button is pressed 1 Check whether the theft prevention screws of the lens unit have been installed 2 The lens release button may be locked sometimes In that case turn the lens fully to the right The lens release button lock will be released Slowly pull the lens off the projector e After removing the lens mount the lens caps front and back included with the lens before storing the lens Ifno lens is going to be mounted on the projector mount the dust cap included with the projector 156 6 Installation and Connections N 6 Installation and Connections Making Connections A computer cable BNC cable 5 core type HDMI cable or a DisplayPort cable can be used to connect to a com puter The connection cable is not enclosed with the projector Please get ready a suitable cable for the connection Analog RGB signal connection e Connect the computer cable to the display output terminal mini D sub 15 pin on the computer and the computer video input terminal on the projector Please use a computer cable attached with a ferrite core e When connecting the display output terminal mini D sub 15 pin on the computer to the BNC video input terminal use a conversion cable to convert the BNC cable 5 core to a
179. e filter unit NOTE e Replace all four filters at the same time e Before replacing the filters wipe off dust and dirt from the projector cabinet e he projector is precision equipment Keep out dust and dirt during filter replacement e Do not wash the filters with soap and water Soap and water will damage the filter membrane Put filters into place Incorrect attachment of a filter may cause dust and dirt to get into the inside of the projector Before replacing the filters replace the lamp page 179 1 Press down on the buttons on the left and right and then pull the filter cover towards you to open it The cover will open about 90 degrees before it stops When mounting the projector to a ceiling The filter cover will open about 90 degrees before it comes to a stop at the stopper position Remove your hands as the stopper will be detached if it is opened further The filter cover will stop at a position of about 90 degrees However the filter cover may close if the projector vibrates Filter cover 2 Remove the filter unit by pulling out the tab 181 7 Maintenance 3 Remove the four filters Hold onto the filters fitted to both sides of the filter unit to remove the filter unit 4 Remove dust from the filter unit and the filter cover Clean both outside and inside 5 Attach 4 new filters to both sides of the filter unit The installation locations of the filters are differentiate
180. e following point when using the three software Image Express Utility Lite for Windows and Mac OS Image Express Utility 2 0 Desktop Control Utility 1 0 in the NETWORK STANDBY mode When the projector is in the NETWORK STANDBY mode communications will not be possible for about 20 seconds after the power supply of the projector is turned on 183 8 User Supportware Download service For the update information about these software programs visit our website URL http www nec display com dl en index html Operating Environment The following is the operating environment for Image Express Utility Lite For the operating environment of other soft ware program refer to the help function of each software program Windows Supported OS Windows 8 Core Edition Windows 8 Pro Windows 8 Enterprise Windows 7 Home Basic Windows 7 Home Premium Windows 7 Professional Windows 7 Ultimate Windows 7 Enterprise Windows Vista Home Basic Windows Vista Home Premium Windows Vista Business Windows Vista Ultimate Windows Vista Enterprise Windows XP Home Edition 32 bit version Service Pack 3 or later Windows XP Professional 32 bit version Service Pack 3 or later Windows power saving function is not supported To use the audio transfer capability Windows 8 Windows 7 Windows Vista Service Pack 1 or later is required Processor Windows 8 Windows 7 Windows Vista Pentium M 1 2 GHz equivalent or higher required Dual core 1 5 GHz or hi
181. e projector off and then disconnect the power cord Allow at least one hour for the lamp to cool before handling When removing the lamp from a ceiling mounted projector make sure that no one is under the projector Glass fragments could fall if the lamp has been burned out About High Altitude mode Set FAN MODE to HIGH ALTITUDE when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet 1700 meters or higher Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet 1700 meters or higher without setting to HIGH ALTITUDE can cause the projector to overheat and the protector could shut down If this happens wait a couple minutes and turn on the projector Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet 1700 meters and setting to HIGH ALTITUDE can cause the lamp to overcool causing the image to flicker Switch FAN MODE to AUTO Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet 1700 meters or higher can shorten the life of optical com ponents such as the lamp About Copyright of original projected pictures Please note that using this projector for the purpose of commercial gain or the attraction of public attention in a venue such as a coffee shop or hotel and employing compression or expansion of the screen image with the following func tions may raise concern about the infringement of copyrights which are protected by copyright law ASPECT RATIO KEYSTONE Magnifying feature and other
182. e saved and return to OFF when the projector is turned off e To display or hide the marker while the projector is running turn on or off MARKER from the menu N 4 4 Multi Screen Projection Black Level Adjustment This adjusts the black level of the overlapping area and the non overlapping area of the multi screen EDGE BLEND ING Adjust the brightness level if you feel the difference is too large NOTE This function is enabled only when MODE is turned on Adjustable area varies depending on what combination of TOP BOTTOM LEFT and RIGHT are turned on Example Adjusting the Black Level when placing two projectors side by side Width of overlap Adjust CENTER x lt mm Adjust CENTER Projector A s Projector B s image image Adjust CENTER RIGHT Adjust CENTER LEFT 1 Turn on MODE 2 Select DBLACK LEVEL and press the ENTER button The screen will switch to the black level adjustment screen INPUT ADJUST SETUP INFO MODE O BOTTOM CERT RIGHT ENTER C HDMI1 ADVANCED 3 Use the Y or A button to select an item and use the 4 or to adjust the black level Do this for the other projector if necessary BLACK LEVEL a Q TOP CENTER gt TOP RIGHT gt QUID CENTER LEFT gt CENTER gt gP CENTER RIGHT r gt BOTTOM LEFT gt gt BOTTOM CENTER r gt BOTTOM RIGHT gt gt ENTER EXIT 5 4
183. e screen is projected when power is turned on Picture in Picture function A small sub display is displayed inside the main display The sub display can be set up and adjusted as follows page 100 Select whether to display the sub display at the top right top left bottom right Main Display or bottom left of the screen the size of the sub display can be selected and the position can be fine tuned Display e Switch the main display with the sub display Picture by picture function Display the main display and sub display side by side The main display and sub display can be set up and adjusted as follows page 101 e Selecting the display boundary ratio of the main display and sub display e Switch the main display and sub display Main Display Input terminals that can be used for the main screen and sub screen The main screen and sub screen can provide the following input terminals The main NAE and sub display support computer signals to WUXGA 60HzRB Sub Display or additional displa Howe DisplayPort _ Port No Yes Man Pegg 5 iip COMPUTER Yes Ye Ye N Ye N Ys Mob e Some signals may not appear depending on the resolution 67 4 Multi Screen Projection Projecting two screens 1 Press the MENU button to display the on screen menu and select DISPLAY PIP PICTURE BY PIC TURE INPUT ADJUST SETUP INFO MODE
184. e screen will turn bright The luminance of the lamp can be set using the lamp adjustment ON The lamp luminance brightness will become approximately 8096 and the lamp replacement time estimated will be extended The replacement time is not guaranteed LAMP ADJUST When the ECO MODE is set to OFF LAMP ADJUST is enabled Adjust the lamp to match the brightness of each projector when projecting a multi screen display using multiple projectors REF WHITE BALANCE This feature allows you to adjust the white balance for all signals The white and black levels of the signal are adjusted for optimum color reproduction Uniformity is also adjusted when the redness R and blueness B of the white color in the screen s horizontal left right direction are uneven CONTRAST R CONTRAST G CONTRAST B These adjust the picture s white color BRIGHTNESS R BRIGHTNESS G BRIGHTNESS B These adjust the picture s black color UNIFORMITY R The further this is set to the side the stronger the redness on the left side of the picture increasing towards the left edge and the weaker the redness on the right side of the picture decreasing towards the right edge This is reversed when set to the side UNIFORMITY B The further this is set to the side the stronger the blueness on the left side of the picture increasing towards the left edge and the weaker the blueness on the right side of the picture decr
185. e thumbnail screen is displayed e Executing RESET ALL DATA from the menu will return the settings for the Viewer toolbar to the factory default 227 9 Using the Viewer MINI Models Preparing presentation materials 1 Create your presentation materials and save them in a supported file format to your computer e See page 225 for supported file formats e Make sure that PowerPoint file is displayed on the Viewer before giving your real presentation e When creating a PDF file embed your fonts in your PDF file Embedding fonts requires Adobe Acrobat This cannot be done in Adobe Header HP Using Print Command Example for font embedding using Print Command See the help of Adobe Acrobat for more information 1 2 3 4 2 Select Print from the File menu Select Adobe PDF from Printer name and click the Properties but ton Click the Edit button in the Adobe PDF Settings tab Click the font tab in the Edit window to select the font embed window Place a check mark for Embed all fonts Click OK to return to the Print window and click OK to start creating a PDF file Save a file to your drive To save a file to your USB memory Use the Windows Explore to copy the file to your USB memory To place a file in a shared folder you create in your computer see page 243 To use Media Sharing in Windows Media Player 11 see page 247 228 Print Printe
186. easing towards the right edge This is reversed when set to the side STATIC CONVERGENCE This features allows you to adjust for color deviation in the picture This can be adjusted in units of 1 pixel in the horizontal direction for HORIZONTAL R G and B in the vertical direc tion for VERTICAL R G and B 113 5 Using On Screen Menu CONTROL INPUT ADJUST DISPLAY TOOLS CONTROL PANEL LOCK OFF SECURITY OFF COMMUNICATION SPEED 38400bps CONTROL ID REMOTE SENSOR FRONT BACK BEEP ON ENTER EXIT lt HDMI1 ADVANCED TOOLS TOOLS PROGRAM TIMER DATE AND TIME SETTINGS MOUSE ENTER EXIT ADMINISTRATOR MODE This allows you to select MENU MODE save settings and set a password for the administrator mode ADMINISTRATOR MODE ADVANCED NOT SAVE SETTING VALUES NEW PASSWORD CONFIRM PASSWORD MENU MODE Select either BASIC or ADVANCED menu gt page 114 NOT SAVE SETTING Placing a check mark will not save your projector settings VALUES Clear this check box to save your projector settings NEW PASSWORD Assign a password for the administrator mode Up to 10 alphanumeric CONFIRM PASS characters WORD 114 PROGRAM TIMER SETTINGS 5 Using On Screen Menu This option turns on standby the projector and changes video signals and selects ECO mode automatically at a specified time NOTE e Before using PROGRAM TIMER make sure that the DATE AND TIME feature is set p
187. ec for If the PROJECTOR NETWORK SETTINGS screen does not appear in the web browser press the Ctrl F5 keys to refresh your web browser or clear the cache This projector uses JavaScript and Cookies and the browser should be set to accept these functions The setting method will vary depending on the version of browser Please refer to the help files and the other information provided in your software Preparation before Use Connect the projector to a commercially available LAN cable before engaging in browser operations page 169 Operation with a browser that uses a proxy server may not be possible depending on the type of proxy server and the setting method Although the type of proxy server will be a factor it is possible that items that have actually been set will not be displayed depending on the effectiveness of the cache and the contents set from the browser may not be reflected in operation It is recommended that a proxy server not be used unless it is unavoidable 45 3 Convenient Features Handling of the Address for Operation via a Browser Regarding the actual address that is entered for the address or entered to the URL column when operation of the pro jector is via a browser the host name can be used as it is when the host name corresponding to the IP address of the projector has been registered to the domain name server by a network administrator or the host name corresponding to the IP address of the projector h
188. ect the appropriate baud rate for your equipment to be connected depending on the equipment a lower baud rate may be recommended for long cable runs NOTE e Select 38400bps or less when using the supplied software programs e Your selected communication speed will not be affected even when RESET is done from the menu 119 5 Using On Screen Menu Setting ID to the Projector CONTROL ID You can operate multiple projectors separately and independently with the single remote control that has the CONTROL ID function If you assign the same ID to all the projectors you can conveniently operate all the projectors together using the single remote control To do so you have to assign an ID number to each projector CONTROL ID NUMBER Select a number from 1 to 254 you wish to assign to your projector CONTROL ID select OFF to turn off the CONTROL ID setting and select ON to turn on the CONTROL ID set ting NOTE e When ON is selected for CONTROL ID the projector cannot be operated by using the remote control that does not support the CONTROL ID function In this case the buttons on the projector cabinet can be used Your setting will not be affected even when RESET is done from the menu e Pressing and holding the ENTER button on the projector cabinet for 10 seconds will display the menu for canceling the Control ID Assigning or Changing the Control ID 1 Turn on the projector 2
189. ect the left right set tings of the 3D eyewear using the stereo viewer SINGLE Use a single projector to project 3D videos DUAL LEFT Use a dedicated projector for displaying videos on the left DUAL Use a dedicated projector for displaying videos on the right STEREO FILTER Stack up a single or multiple projectors and carry out the settings for projecting 3D videos Image setting for 3D glasses made by Infitec SINGLE Use a single projector to project 3D videos DUAL LEFT Use a dedicated projector for displaying videos on the left DUAL Use a dedicated projector for displaying videos on the right FORMAT Select the 3D video format recording transmission format Select to match the 3D broadcast and 3D media Nor mally AUTO is selected Please select the 3D input signal format when the 3D detection signal of the format cannot be distinguished L R INVERT Invert the display order of the left and right videos Select ON if you feel uncomfortable with the 3D display when OFF is selected 99 Menu Descriptions amp Functions DISPLAY PIP PICTURE BY PICTURE INPUT ADJUST SETUP INFO SUB INPUT MODE PIP PICTURE SWAP OFF PIP SETTING Cu SELECT CUP EXIT v MOVE gt MOVE lt gt HDMI ADVANCED SUB INPUT Select the input signal to be displayed in the sub display 5 Using On Screen Menu Please refe
190. ectors will disable the HDMI repeater function In the case of the HDMI output terminal of the projector the theoretical number of units that can be connected in a series is seven The maximum number of units that can be connected may be reduced by the external environment and quality of the signal and cable etc The number of units that can be connected may differ depending on the HDCP version restriction on the number of HDCP repeaters in the source device and the quality of the cable The overall system needs to be checked in advance when build ing a system When audio equipment is connected the projector speaker is disabled To output audio from the audio output terminal when the input terminal is neither COMPUTER IN nor BNC IN select BNC under AUDIO SELECT of the on screen menu When the STANDBY MODE is set to NORMAL video and audio will not be output when the projector is set to the standby mode Set the standby mode to NETWORK STANDBY for MM models For HDBaseT models set the standby mode to HDBaseT STANDBY turn on the power supply to the transmission device and keep the unit in a connected state For HDBaseT models HDMI signals will not be output when the STANDBY MODE of the projector is set to NORMAL To output a HDMI signal set the STANDBY MODE to HDBaseT STANDBY turn on the power supply of the transmission device and keep the unit in a connected state Both the composite video signal from each input connecto
191. een Alphanumeric characters and hexadecimal To enter from KEY1 to KEY4 do the following 1 Select one of KEY 1 KEY 2 3 and KEY 4 and press the ENTER button The character entry screen software keyboard will be displayed 2 3 4 8 7 8 oJ GJ 1 uJ PJ SJ TJ US 2 JJ MopE _5 jJ J lt lt gt w 2 Use the Y A lt or gt button to select a character and press the ENTER button e To entera WEP key or passphrase use alphanumeric characters ASCII or hexadecimal HEX To enter a PSK key use alphanumeric characters ASCII e Press the HEX button to change to ASCII to set the key in ASCII digit You can toggle this button between ASCII and HEX e Enter Ox numeral and alphabet respectively right in front of your key code e Hexadecimal uses 0 to 9 and A to F 3 After entering your WEP key or passphrase use the Y A 4 or button to select OK and press the ENTER button The character entry screen software keyboard will be closed 151 5 Using On Screen Menu WPS MM When the wireless LAN access point connected to the projector supports WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup you can use PIN method or push button method to set up the wireless LAN for the projector AUTO CZD sELECT c PIN TYPE Set a 4 digit or 8 digit PIN code of WPS for your access point to complete setting
192. enable the Security function 1 Press the MENU button The menu will be displayed 2 Press the button twice to select SETUP and press the Y button or the ENTER button to select MENU 3 Press the button to select CONTROL 4 Press the Y button three times to select SECURITY and press the ENTER button INPUT ADJUST DISPLAY lt MENU INSTALLATION TOOLS CONTROL PANEL LOCK OFF OFF COMMUNICATION SPEED 38400bps CONTROL ID REMOTE SENSOR FRONT BACK BEEP ON up EXIT MOVE lt HDMI1 ADVANCED The OFF ON menu will be displayed 5 Press the Y button to select ON and press the ENTER button OFF oN 19 The SECURITY KEYWORD screen will be displayed 6 Type a combination of the four lt gt buttons and press the ENTER button NOTE keyword must be 4 to 10 digits in length SECURITY KEYWORD INPUT gt INPUT The CONFIRM KEYWORD screen will be displayed NOTE Make a note of your password and store it in a safe place 38 3 Convenient Features 7 in the same combination of lt gt buttons and press the ENTER button CONFIRM KEYWORD ENTER EXIT The confirmation screen will be displayed 8 Select YES and press the ENTER button SECURITY FUNCTION WILL BE ENABLED ARE YOU SURE The SECURITY function has been enabled To turn on the projector when SECURITY is enabled
193. ens shift function for easily adjusting the position of the projected image The position of the projected image is moved by turning the two dials on the projector s front one for the vertical direction one for the horizontal direction e 360 installation angle tilt free The projector can be installed at any angle 360 Note however that the fan mode setting must be changed according to the angle of installation Also the projector cannot be installed tilted to the left or right e Portrait projection is possible This projector can perform portrait projection with the projection screen turned 90 However the lamp replacement time is 2000 hours for portrait projection Replacement time not guaranteed Videos e Wide range of input output connectors HDMI DisplayPort BNC etc and built in monaural speaker The projector is equipped with a variety of input output connectors HDMI input x 2 output x 1 DisplayPort BNC 5 core computer analog etc The projectors HDMI input output connectors and DisplayPort input connector support HDCP The projector is also equipped with a built in 10W monaural speaker 2 1 Introduction Equipped with HDBaseT input terminal HDBaseT Models This projector is equipped with a HDBaseT input terminal which can be connected to a HDBaseT transmission device sold commercially HDBaseT is a connection standard for home appliances that is established by the HDBaseT Alliance Simulta
194. ent function In order to keep power consumption low the following power management functions 1 and 2 have been set when shipped from the factory Please display the on screen menu and change the settings 1 and 2 according to the aim of using the projector 1 STANDBY MODE Factory preset NORMAL e When NORMAL is selected for STANDBY MODE the following connectors and functions will not work HDMI OUT connector AUDIO OUT connector Ethernet HDBase T USB A Port LAN functions Mail Alert function page 129 MM models serve as Ethernet ports 2 AUTO POWER OFF Factory preset 60 minutes e When 1 00 is selected for AUTO POWER OFF you can enable the projector to automatically turn off in 1 hour if there is no signal received by any input or if no operation is performed page 130 vi Important Information Clearance for Installing the Projector Allow ample clearance between the projector and its surroundings as shown below The high temperature exhaust coming out of the device may be sucked into the device again Avoid installing the projector in a place where air movement from the HVAC is directed at the projector Heated air from the HVAC can be taken in by the projector s intake vent If this happens the temperature inside the projector will rise too high causing the over temperature protector to automatically turn off the projectors power Example 1 If there are walls on both sides o
195. eo mini jack x 2 Audio output Stereo mini jack x 1 common for all signals HDMI Video input HDMI Connector type A x 2 Deep Color color depth 8 10 12 bit compatible Colorimetry RGB YcbCr444 and YcbCr422 compatible LipSync compatible HDCP compatible 5 Supports 4K and 3D Video output Repeater HDMI Sampling frequency 32 44 1 48 kHz Sampling bits 16 20 24 bits 264 10 Appendix PA621U PA521U PA671W PA571W PA721X PA621X DisplayPort Video input DisplayPort x 1 Data rate 2 7Gbps 1 62Gbps No lanes 1 lane 2 lanes 4 lanes Color depth 6 bit 8 bit 10 bit Colorimetry RGB YcbCr444 and YcbCr422 compatible HDCP compatible 9 la ing frequency 32 44 1 48 kHz Sampling bits 16 20 24 bits BNC Y C shared with the BNC BNC CV BNC Y C audio input terminals PC control connector D Sub 9 pin x 1 USB type A x 1 3D SYNC output terminal Usage environment Operating temperature 41 to 104 F 5 to 40 C 9 i 20 to 80 with no condensation 1700 to 3650 m 5500 to 12000 feet Set FAN MODE to HIGH ALUTITUDE Power con mode off PA721X PA671W PA621U 483 W 100 130 V 460W 200 240 V sumption PA621X PA571W PA521U 463 W 100 130 V 440W 200 240 V Eco mode on PA721X PA671W PA621U PA621X PA571W PA521U 377 W 100 130 V 362 W 200 240 V STANDBY NETWORK 4 7 W 100 130 V 4 9 W 200 240 V STANDBY PA621X PA571W PA521U 5 1 A 2 2 A External dimensions 19 7 width x 5 68 height x 14 1 d
196. epth 499 width x 142 height x 359 depth mm not including protruding parts 19 7 width x 6 38 height x 14 5 depth 499 width x 162 height x 368 depth mm including protruding parts 18 5 Ibs 8 4 kg not including lens 1 Effective pixels are more than 99 99 2 This is the light output value lumens when the PRESET mode is set to HIGH BRIGHT The light output values will drop to 80 when ON is selected for ECO MODE If any other mode is selected as the PRESET mode the light output value may drop slightly 8 Compliance with ISO21 118 2005 4 Full color approx 16 77 million colors or greater when the Ethernet input connector is selected 5 HDMI Deep Color Lip Sync with HDCP What is HDCP HDCP technology HDCP is an acronym for High bandwidth Digital Content Protection High bandwidth Digital Content Protection HDCP is a system for preventing illegal copying of video data sent over a High Definition Multimedia Interface HDMI If you are unable to view material via the HDMI input this does not necessarily mean the projector is not functioning properly With the implementation of HDCP there may be cases in which certain content is protected with HDCP and might not be displayed due to the decision intention of the HDCP community Digital Content Protection LLC Video Deep Color 8 10 12 bit LipSync Audio LPCM up to 2 ch sample rate 32 44 1 48 KHz sample bit 16 20 24 bit 6 95 to 104 F 35 to 40
197. er NOTE o install or uninstall the program the Windows user account must have Administrator privilege Windows 8 Windows 7 Windows Vista and Windows XP e Exit all running programs before installation If another program is running the installation may not be completed 1 Insert the accompanying NEC Projector CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The menu window will be displayed 192 8 User Supportware TIP If the menu window will not be displayed try the following procedure For Windows 7 1 Click start on Windows 2 Click All Programs gt Accessories Run 3 Type your CD ROM drive name example 0 1 and LAUNCHER EXE in Name example Q LAUNCHER EXE 4 Click OK the menu window will be displayed 2 Click PC Control Utility Pro 4 on the menu window The installation will start Dro 4 InstallShield Wiza 4 Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Control Utility Pro 4 The InstallShield R Wizard will install PC Control Utility Pro 4 on your computer To continue click Next WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties When the installation is complete the Welcome window will be displayed 3 Click Next END USER LICENSE AGHEEMENT screen will be displayed 2C Control Utility License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully END USER LI
198. er turning it on and displaying an image Do not unplug the power cord from the projector or from the power outlet while an image is being projected Doing so could deteriorate the projector s AC IN terminal or the power plug s contact To turn off the AC power while an image is being projected use the power strip s switch the breaker etc Do not disconnect the AC power supply to the projector within 10 seconds of making adjustment or setting changes and closing the menu Doing so can cause loss of adjustments and settings 27 2 Projecting an Image Basic Operation Use Preparation Make sure that the projector is turned off 1 Unplug the power cord 2 Disconnect any other cables 3 Mount the lens cap on the lens 4 Before moving the projector screw in the tilt feet if they have been lengthened 28 3 Convenient Features Turning off the Image and Sound The projected video and the output sound from the internal speaker and sound output terminal will disappear momentarily Press the BLANK button The projected video will be cut off Press the MUTE button The projected audio will be cut off Press the AV MUTE button The projected video and audio will be cut off e Press the buttons one more time for the cancelled video and audio to appear again When AV MUTE and BLANK are continued for some time the energy saving function will activate to lower the lamp power NOTE e When the AV
199. ersonal comput Windows only ers to the projector via wired wireless LAN Meeting mode Projected images can be transferred and saved to personal computers When Meeting Mode is used projected images can be sent and saved to the personal computers Images can be sent from a personal computer to not only one projector but also to two or more projectors at the same time page 205 Desktop Control Utility 1 0 This is a software program used to operate the desktop screen of a personal Windows only computer at a remote location by using a projector via wired wireless LAN page 216 PC Control Utility Pro 4 This is a software program used to operate the projector from the computer when PC Control Utility Pro 5 for Mac the computer and the projector are connected with LAN page 192 OS e PC Control Utility Pro 4 can be used with a serial connection NOTE e Transmission using a wireless LAN is not possible for HDBaseT models e connect the projector to the network by using the Virtual Remote Tool PC Control Utility Pro 4 PC Control Utility Pro 5 please configure the settings of SETUP NETWORK SETTINGS in the on screen menu page 122 MM models does not support the connection to the wired LAN wireless LAN configured in NETWORK SETTINGS MM page 136 e Image Express Utility Lite does not support Meeting Mode in Image Express Utility 2 0 included with our other models For MM models take note of th
200. et a host name and domain name of the projector DOMAIN necpj 000 00 DOMAIN NAME HOST Set a host name the projector Up to 15 alphanumeric characters DOMAIN NAME Set a domain name of the projector Up to 60 alphanumeric characters 124 5 Using On Screen Menu ALERT MAIL ALERT MAIL HOST NAME necp Ka DOMAIN NAME SENDER S ADDRESS SMTP SERVER NAME RECIPIENT S ADDRESS 1 RECIPIENT S ADDRESS2 B RECIPIENT S ADDRESS 3 TEST MAIL 1 MOVE ALERT MAIL This option will notify your computer of lamp replace time or error messages via e mail when using wireless or wired LAN Placing a checkmark will turn on the Alert Mail feature Clearing a checkmark will turn off the Alert Mail feature Sample of a message to be sent from the projector The lamp and filters are at the end of its usable life Please replace the lamp and filters Projector Name NEC Projector Lamp Hours Used 100 H HOST NAME Type in a host name Up to 15 alphanumeric characters DOMAIN NAME Type in a domain name of the network connected to the projec Up to 60 alphanumeric tor characters SENDER S AD Specify the sender s address Up to 60 alphanu DRESS meric characters and symbols SMTP SERVER Type in the SMTP server name to be connected to the projec Up to 60 alphanumeric NAME tor characters RECIPIENT S AD Type in your recipient s address Up to 60 a
201. etection from AMX Device Discovery when connecting to the network supported by AMX s NetLinx control system HP When using a device that supports AMX Device Discovery all AMX NetLinx control system will rec ognize the device and download the appropriate Device Discovery Module from an AMX server Placing a checkmark will enable detecting the projector from AMX Device Discovery Clearing a checkmark will disable detecting the projector from AMX Device Discovery NOTE If you forget your password contact your dealer What is PJLink PJLink is a standardization of protocol used for controlling projectors of different manufacturers This standard proto col is established by Japan Business Machine and Information System Industries Association JBMIA in 2005 The projector supports all the commands of PJLink Class 1 Setting of PJLink will not be affected even when RESET is done from the menu CRESTRON ROOMVIEW for managing from the computer DISABLE Disables ROOMVIEW ENABLE Enables ROOMVIEW CRESTRON CONTROL for managing from the controller DISABLE Disables CRESTRON CONTROL ENABLE Enables CRESTRON CONTROL IP ADDRESS Set your IP address of CRESTRON SERVER PID Setyour IP ID of CRESTRON SERVER TIP The CRESTRON settings are required only for use with CRESTRON ROOMVIEW For more information visit http www crestron com e INFORMATION WIRED LAN Display a list of settings of wired LAN connection UPDATE Reflect
202. example when using two projectors The following installation is recommended when combining the installation of two projectors for multi screen projec tion Please leave a space of at least 10 cm between the the intake exhaust vent and the wall Installation example Front Right side Back Air dis Air intake Intake vent Exhaust vent charge Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Please request the retail store for special installation services such as when mounting the projector to the ceiling Never carry out the installation by yourself The projector may fall down and result in injury Please use a sturdy cabinet that can withstand the weight of the projector for the installation Please do not pile up the projectors directly on top of one another NOTE e For the range of the projection distance please refer to the Appendix Throw distance and screen size page 253 66 4 Multi Screen Projection Displaying Two Pictures at the Same Time The projector has a feature that allows you to view two different signals simultaneously You have two modes PIP mode and PICTURE BY PICTURE mode The projection video in the first screen display is known as the main display while the projection video that is called out subsequently is known as the sub display Select the projection function under DISPLAY PIP PICTURE BY PICTURE MODE in the on screen menu the default factory setting when shipped is PIP page 100 singl
203. f the highlight is moved to this icon and the ENTER button is pressed again 3 Ctrl icon When the highlight is moved to this icon and the ENTER button is pressed control lock status is set The control lock is canceled if the highlight is moved to this icon and the ENTER button is pressed again 4 BC ESC icon The same operation as when the ESC key of the computer is pressed is performed This icon is used for example to stop a slideshow of PowerPoint e Operating the projector disconnecting communications 1 Press the EXIT button while the desktop screen is displayed An auxiliary operation bar will be displayed at the lower left of the screen JR Shit ee 2 Move the highlight to cut off icon and press the ENTER button Communication will be disconnected and you are returned to the DESKTOP CONTROL UTILITY menu screen To resume communication click COMPUTER SEARCH After that follow step 10 on the preceding page REFERENCE Communication can also be disconnected by clicking the projector icon on the taskbar and then clicking Disconnect while the desktop screen is displayed 223 8 User Supportware Operating the projector exiting Desktop Control Utility 1 0 1 Click the projector icon on the taskbar while the desktop screen is displayed Disconnect Screen Keyboard Startup Password Change Options Ta LE W 11 21 2 Click Exit Desktop Control Utili
204. f the projector 20 7 9 or greater 13 cm 5 1 or greater Filter cover Intake vent Lamp cover NOTE he drawing shows the proper clearance required for the front back and top of the projector Example 2 If there is a wall behind the projector 10 cm 3 9 or greater Exhaust vent NOTE The drawing shows the proper clearance required for the back sides and top of the projector Example 3 In the case of portrait projection 13 cm 5 1 or greater Filter cover 9 Intake vent NOTE e he drawing shows the proper clearance required for the front back and top of the projector e See page 166 for an installation example on portrait projection vii Table of Contents Important Information 7 sse 1 Introduction 1 Whats im the BOX uuu LLULLU u Sihuas Pearce DUM pri 1 Introduction to the 2 Congratulations on Your Purchase of the Projector 2 INSU usur 2 lj D 2 Ne 3 ECO S AW IAG shea k ISDEM UNUM M PU E 4 o NR
205. for connecting wireless LAN By using Easy Connection function the complicated setting of wireless LAN can be simplified This function be used when Windows XP is used as the OS and when you have a Computer Adminis trator privilege If the OS is Windows 7 Windows Vista input of logon password as Administrator may be prompted 205 8 User Supportware Projected images can be transferred and saved to computers When Meeting Mode is used projected images can be sent to the computers of all the participants attendants of a Meeting The received images can be saved to your computer with a memo text data attached 1 click switching of presenter When switching to another presenter during the conference the participants attendants can simply click a button to switch over to the new presenter e Central management of the projecting computer Using the Training Mode allows you to use a single computer Manager to manage which computer Attendant projects Possible operation includes switching projecting computers to project from as well as temporarily termi nating communication with the projector NOTE The Training Mode is not installed via the Typical installation option when Image Express Utility 2 0 is installed To use Training Mode select Extension installation option on the install selection screen that is displayed while Image Express Utility 2 0 instal
206. for the SSID security MOVE PUSH BUTTON TYPE Press the dedicated button of the access point and the projector s wireless LAN unit to complete setting for the SSID security NETWORK INFORMATION The following information will be displayed when the projector is connected to a network wired LAN or wireless LAN PROJECTOR NAME PA621U Series HOST NAME MM necpj2 NETWORK INFORMATION WIRED LAN MM WIRELESS LAN MM CONNECTION STATUS CONNECTION WAITING FOR CONNECTION IP ADDRESS 192 168 0 1 192 168 100 10 SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 GATEWAY 192 163 0 1 192 168 100 1 WINS DNS MAC ADDRESS m s s SSID NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE WEP WPA CHANNEL 10 SIGNAL LEVEL 0 AUTHENTICATION PERIOD DISPLAY THE INFORMATION IN APPLICATION MENU SELECT MOVE lt MOVE 1 PROJECTOR HOST NETWORK INFOR CONNECTION STATUS IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK GATEWAY WINS DNS MAC MATION WIRED ADDRESS SSID NETWORK TYPE WEP WPA CHANNEL SIGNAL LEVEL AU LAN WIRELESS LAN THENTICATION AUTHENTICATION PERIOD DISPLAY THE INFOR Turn on or off the display of the network information MATION IN APPLICA TION MENU The meanings of these status statements are described below Statement Authentication status Authenticated Authentication is done correctly Failure Authentication failed Authenticating Authentication is in process Expired The
207. from memory After selecting PROFILE 1 or PROFILE 2 from the PRO FILES list Select OK and press the ENTER button e Select DISABLE when not connecting to a wired LAN DHCP Place a check mark to automatically assign an IP address to the projector from your DHCP server Clear this check box to register the IP address or subnet mask number obtained from your network administrator IP ADDRESS Set your IP address of the network connected to the projector Up to 12 numeric when DHCP is turned off characters SUBNET MASK Set your subnet mask number of the network connected to the Up to 12 numeric projector when DHCP is turned off characters GATEWAY Set the default gateway of the network connected to the projector Up to 12 numeric when DHCP is turned off characters AUTO DNS Place a check mark to automatically assign the IP address of your Up to 12 numeric DNS server connected to the projector from your DHCP server characters Clear this check box to set the IP address of your DNS server connected to the projector DNS CONFIGURA Set the IP address of your DNS server on the network connected Up to 12 numeric TION to the projector when AUTO DNS is cleared characters HECONNECT Hetry to connect the projector to a network Try this if you have changed PROFILES 123 5 Using On Screen Menu PROJECTOR NAME PROJECTOR NAME Seta unique projector name Up to 16 alphanu meric characters and symbols DOMAIN S
208. ge from a participant to a presenter File Edit View Help Sales report 0 1stQtr 2nd Qtr 3rdQtr 4th Qtr chat A presenter Presenter Administrator Attendant 1 E Fie Transfer Memo Click e Leaving conference Leave the conference and exit Image Express Utility 2 0 e Click File in the attendant window and click Exit You can also leave the conference by clicking x at the upper right of the attendant window 215 8 User Supportware Using the Projector to Operate Your Computer over a LAN Desktop Control Utility 1 0 MM Models Using Desktop Control Utility 1 0 allows you to remotely operate your computer placed at a distance from the projector over a network wired LAN or wireless LAN What you can do with Desktop Control Utility 1 0 A commercially available USB mouse is connected to the projector to operate the computer Suppose for example a PowerPoint file to be presented in a conference is saved to a computer in your office If this computer is connected to the projector in the conference room with LAN when the conference is held the desktop screen of the computer in your office Windows 8 Windows 7 Windows Vista Windows XP can be projected and the Power Point file can be presented by operating the projector In other words the computer does not need to be brought into the conference room
209. gher recommended Windows XP Pentium M 1 0 GHz equivalent or higher required Dual core 1 0 GHz or higher recommended Memory Windows 8 Windows 7 Windows Vista 512 MB or more required 1 GB or more recommended Windows XP 256 MB or more required 512 MB or more recommended More memory may be required to run additional applications simultane ously Graphic processor Windows 8 Windows 7 Windows Vista The Graphics score 3 0 or more of Windows Experience Index recom mended Ts compatible wired LAN or wireless LAN Use a wireless LAN unit complying with the Wi Fi standard Audio transfer capability requires 3 Mbps or more throughput Resolution Windows 8 Windows 7 Windows Vista SVGA 800 x 600 or higher required XGA 1024 x 768 recommended Windows XP VGA 640 x 480 or higher required XGA 1024 x 768 recommended 1024 x 768 1280 x 800 recommended for WXGA type 184 Network environment 8 User Supportware Screen Colors High Color 15 bits 16 bits True Color 24 bits 32 bits recommended e 256 or fewer colors are not supported Mac Supported OS Mac OS X v10 6 v10 7 v10 8 Processor CPU Intel Core Duo processor 1 5 GHz or higher required Intel Core 2 Duo processor 1 6 GHz or higher recommended PowerPC is not supported Network environment Wired or wireless LAN required that supports TCP IP The following LAN adapters are verified to work with Image Express Utility Lite e Wired LAN a
210. h you press and hold the EXIT button for a minimum of 10 seconds 10 Appendix In the space below please describe your problem in detail Information on application and environment where your projector is used Projector Installation environment Screen size inch Screen type LI White matte L Beads L Polarization C Wide angle High contrast Throw distance feet inch m Orientation Ceiling mount Desktop Power outlet connection C Connected directly to wall outlet Connected to power cord extender or other the number of connected equipment Connected to a power cord reel or other the number of connected equipment Model number Serial No Date of purchase Lamp operating time hours Eco Mode JOFF LJ ON Information on input signal Horizontal synch frequency kHz Vertical synch frequency Hz Synch polarity LI VEI CHA synch type LI Separate Composite Sync on Green STATUS Indicator Steady light L Orange L Green Flashing light cycles Remote control model number Computer Manufacturer Model number Notebook PC Desktop L Native resolution Refresh rate Video adapter Other Video equipment Blu ray player Projector VCR Blu ray player Video camera Video game or other Signal cable Manufacturer NEC standard or other manufacturer s cable Model number Model number Length inch m Distribution amplifier
211. he PowerPoint file and start your presentation 208 8 User Supportware e Stopping or resuming the transmission of images The transmission of the screen of the computer to the projector can be temporarily stopped and then resumed 1 Click the projector icon 8 the Windows taskbar A pop up menu will be displayed Reconnect Stop Sending Send To PC And Projector Send To Projector Only Save A File For Reopening Options Presenter Changeover Settings Create Setup Disk Projector Control About Help Exit 2 Click Stop Sending The projector icon on the taskbar will change B gt NOTE Even if the screen of the computer is changed in this status the image projected from the projector does not change To manipulate the screen that should not be disclosed projected from the projector stop transmission 3 Click the projector icon B on the Windows taskbar A pop up menu will be displayed 4 Click Start Sending The projector icon on the taskbar will change E gt E The transmission of the screen for the computer will be resumed and the current screen of the computer will be projected from the projector End the transmission of images Exit Image Express Utility 2 0 1 Click the projector icon a on the Windows taskbar A pop up menu will be displayed 2 Click Exit 209 8 User Supportware Holding Conferences e Holding conferences 1 Follow steps 1 through 4 in Connecting
212. he digital source from the HDMI 1 IN connector every time the projector is turned on HDMI2 Displays the digital source from the HDMI 2 IN connector every time the projector is turned on DisplayPort Displays the digital source from the DisplayPort every time the projector is turned on p PEN RU A Project the input signal from the BNC video input terminal BNC CV Project the input signal from the BNC CV video input terminal Project the input signal from the BNC Y C video input terminal COMPUTER Displays the computer signal from the COMPUTER IN connector every time the projector is turned on HDBaseT 1 Project the signal ETHERNET snoren Project the data sent from the computer via the wireless LAN unit sold separately that is fitted to the main body or the Ethernet port RJ 45 USB A 2 Project the data viewer display of the USB memory set up in the projector 1 Only HDBaseT models will be displayed 2 Only MM models will be displayed SEAMLESS SWITCHING When the input connector is switched the image displayed before switching is held to switch to the new image without a break due to absence of a signal Setting Closed Caption CLOSED CAPTION This option sets several closed caption modes that allow text to be superimposed on the projected image of Video or S Video The subtitles and text
213. he internal battery of the 3D eyewear is flat Please charge or replace the battery The viewer is located too far away from the screen Please get closer to the screen until the video can be seen in 3D Please turn the L R INVERT in the on screen menu to OFF Due to multiple 3D projectors working at the same time in the vi Please maintain sufficient distance between the projectors cinity the projectors may interfere with one another Alternatively there may be a bright light source near the screen Please keep the light source away from the screen Please turn the L R INVERT in the on screen menu to OFF There is an obstacle between the optical receiver of the 3D eyewear Please remove the obstacle and the 3D emitter The 3D format of the 3D video contents is not supported Please check with the company selling the 3D video contents 43 3 Convenient Features Q Controlling the Projector by Using an HTTP Browser Overview Using the web browser on the computer the HTTP server screen of the projector can be displayed to operate the projector Forthe HTTP server screen of the projector there is the basic HTTP server screen common to both HDBaseT models and MM models and the dedicated HTTP server screen for MM models Possible operations on the HTTP server screen 1 Possible operations on the basic HTTP server screen common to both HDBaseT models and MM models e When using the following functions configure the settings
214. ideo and audio power on standby on screen display selection etc Max display resolution horizontal x Analog 1920 x 1200 handled with Advanced AccuBlend vertical Digital 4096 x 2160 handled with Advanced AccuBlend HGB 0 7Vp p 75Q Component Y 1 0Vp p 75Q with Sync Cb Cr Pb Pr 0 7Vp p 75Q DTV 480i 480p 720p 10801 1080p 60Hz 576i 576p 720p 1080i 50Hz DVD Progressive signal 50 60Hz Audio gt 0 5 22 0 or greater Input output connectors Computer Com Video input X Mini D Sub 15 pin x 1 BNC connector x 5 ponent Stereo mini jack x 2 Audio output Stereo mini jack x 1 common for all signals H HDMI Video input DMI9 Connector type A x 2 Deep Color color depth 8 10 12 bit compatible Colorimetry RGB YcbCr444 and YcbCr422 compatible LipSync compatible HDCP compatible 2 Supports 4K and 3D HDMI Sampling frequency 32 44 1 48 kHz Sampling bits 16 20 24 bits Y 1 0Vp p 75Q with Negative Polarity Sync Composite Sync 4 0Vp p T TL Y 1 0Vp p 75Q with Sync O Cb Cr Pb Pr 0 7Vp p 7g5Q S O 262 10 Appendix PA622U PA522U PA672W PA572W PA722X PA622X HDBaseT Video input Deep Color color depth Support 8 10 12 bits Colorimetry Support RGB YCbCr444 and YCbCr422 Support LipSync HDCP 4K 3D Sampling frequency 32 44 1 48 kHz Sampling bit 16 20 24 bit DisplayPort Video input DisplayPort x 1 Data rate 2 7Gbps 1 62Gbps No lanes 1 la
215. ill be displayed for MM models 10 Only HDBaseT models will be displayed 11 Only MM models will be displayed 12 ETHERNET will be displayed for MM models 13 NETWORK STANDBY will be displayed for MM models 14 HDBaseT will be displayed for HDBaseT models only 83 5 Using On Screen Menu Item Default AMP LIFE REMAINING USAGE TIME AMP HOURS USED NPUT TERMINAL ESOLUTION ORIZONTAL FREQUENCY ERTICAL FREQUENCY SOURCE YNC TYPE YNC POLARITY CAN TYPE OURCE NAME NTRY NO ILTER HOURS USED CARBON SAVINGS IGNAL TYPE IDEO TYPE IND SOURCE 2 IDEO LEVEL INK RATE INK LANE D FORMAT 1 2 TERMINAL ESOLUTION ORIZONTAL FREQUENCY YNC TYPE OURCE NAME NTRY NO 4 IDEO LEVEL INK RATE INK LANE D FORMAT P ADDRESS UBNET MASK WIRED LAN ATEWAY IRMWARE ATA UB CPU IRMWARE MM ATE TIME ROJECTOR NAME OTHERS MODEL NO ERIAL NUMBER ONTROL ID t6 NTAKE TEMPERATURE XHAUST TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS NSTALLATION POSITION AXIS AXIS AXIS IGNAL QUALITY PERATION MODE HDBasel FINK STATUS HDMI STATUS am gt gt C C m N N VERSION 1 Ec C CO r IO C pe EEE j MEM j pq pM T j C pau pp o ___ EE HEN C pe pM ps IGNAL TYPE j INFO IDEO TYPE
216. ill be displayed in the POWER OFF ARE YOU SURE message at the time of power off POWER OFF ARE YOU SURE CARBON SAVINGS SESSION 0 000 2 02 e The formula as shown below is used to calculate the amount of CO emission reduction Amount of CO emission reduction Power consumption in OFF for MODE Power consumption in ON for ECO MODE x CO conversion factor When the image is turned off with the AV MUTE button the amount of CO emmission reduction will also increase Calculation for amount of CO emission reduction is based on an OECD publication CO Emissions from Fuel Combustion 2008 Edition e The TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS is calculated based on savings recorded in 15 minutes intervals e This formula will not apply to the power consumption which is not affected by whether MODE is turned on or off 32 3 Convenient Features Using the Optional Remote Mouse Receiver NPO1MR The optional remote mouse receiver enables you to operate your computer s mouse functions from the remote control It is a great convenience for clicking through your computer generated presentations Connecting the remote mouse receiver to your computer If you wish to use the remote mouse function connect the mouse receiver and computer The mouse receiver can be connected directly to the computer s USB port type A NOTE Depending on the type of connection or OS installed on your computer you may have to restart you
217. ill display its thumbnail screen Functions SYSTEM SET Opens the system setting menu TING Scroll bar Thumbnail screen will display 12 files with 4 by 3 If the thumbnail screen has twelve or more files or folders the scroll bar will be displayed at the right side Using the C TL V or CTL A button will scroll the whole screen down or up Path information Displays the location of a folder or file Thumbnail information Example 005 jpg 5 200 11 03 2010 13 25 12 502KB Selected folder Numbers and order of Create Change date Displays file name or file files in a folder only M D Y H M B capacity name when folder selected Displays the description of a selected menu Operation button guide Displays information about operation buttons TIP e fan unsupported image is selected the icon will be displayed e he maximum displayable number of images is 300 in the thumbnail screen including the number of folders Ifa name or path of a folder is longer than specified it will be displayed with center characters or path skipped Example 123456789 jpg will be displayed in 123 89 jpg 237 9 Using the Viewer MINI Models e Slide screen still image movie Plays a file selected from a list of thumbnails or icons Foroperating a Microsoft PowerPoint file and Adobe PDF file see page 231 232 Control bar operation The control bar will be displayed only when a still image or index file and a
218. ing the order of programs 1 On the PROGRAM LIST screen select a program whose order you want to change and press the but ton 2 Press the Y button to select A or Y 3 Press the ENTER button a few times to select a row to which you wish to move the program The order of the programs will be changed Deleting the programs 1 On the PROGRAM LIST screen select a program number you want to delete and press the button 2 Press the Y button to select DELETE 3 Press the ENTER button The confirmation screen will be displayed 4 Select YES and press the ENTER button The program will be deleted This will complete deleting the program 117 5 Using On Screen DATE AND TIME SETTINGS DATE AND TIME SETTINGS SUMMER TIME SETTINGS 1 MOVE You can set the current time month date and year NOTE The projector has a built in clock The clock will keep working for about 2 weeks after the main power is turned off If the main power is off for 2 weeks or more the built in clock will cease If the built in clock ceases set the date and time again The built in clock will not cease while in the standby mode TIME ZONE SETTINGS Select your time zone DATE AND TIME SETTINGS Set your current date MM DD YYYY and time HH MM INTERNET TIME SERVER If you place a check mark the projector s built in clock will be synchronized with an Internet time
219. isplaying the Help using the Dock 1 Open Application Folder in Mac OS 2 Click the PC Control Utility Pro 5 folder 3 Click the PC Control Utility Pro 5 Help icon The Help screen will be displayed 195 8 User Supportware Q Projecting Your Computer s Screen Image or Video from the Projector over a LAN Image Express Utility Lite MM Models Using Image Express Utility Lite contained on the supplied NEC Projector CD ROM allows you to send the computer s screen image to the projector over a wired or wireless LAN Image Express Utility Lite is a program compatible with Windows Image Express Utility Lite for Mac OS is a program compatible with Mac OS page 202 This section will show you an outline about how to connect the projector to a LAN and to use Image Express Utility Lite For the operation of Image Express Utility Lite see the help of Image Express Utility Lite Step 1 install Image Express Utility Lite on the computer Step 2 Connect the projector to a LAN Step 3 Start Image Express Utility Lite TIP e mage Express Utility Lite for Windows can be started from most commercially available removable media such as USB memory devices or SD cards without the need to install on your computer page 201 What You can Do with Image Express Utility Lite Image transmission for Windows and Mac OS e The screen of your computer can be sent to the projector via a wired or wireless network without a computer c
220. it The installation locations of the filters are differentiated by whether there are any slits notches Install the filter under the flange around the filter unit as follows 1 Attach the 2 filters with transparent frames fitted to the grips to the side of the filter unit where the knob is located e Turn over the side of the filter with the transparent box and then install it 2 Attach the 2 filters with the black lines to the side of the filter unit where there is no knob e Turn over the side of the filter with the black line and then insert the slits into the protrusions on the filter unit to install it 7 Mount the filter unit back onto the projector cabinet Insert the filter unit onto the projector with the sides on which the left and right hooks are located on the outside 8 Close the filter cover After closing push the filter cover near the buttons until a click sound is heard The filter cover will be secured in position 0 i 4 Button 9 Clear the filter usage hours Plug the power cord into the wall outlet and then turn on the projector From the menu select RESET CLEAR FILTER HOURS page 132 The interval time to clean the filters is set to OFF at time of shipment When using the projector as it is you do not clear the filter usage 176 7 Maintenance Cleaning the Lens e Turn off the projector before cleaning e The projector has a plas
221. ital certificate e Once a digital certificate has been installed its information cannot be deleted even if you stop setting WPA EAP or WPA2 EAP 17 On the FILES screen select a digital certificate DER format file saved in your USB memory device and press the ENTER button FILES ALFA DER BRAVO PFX SELECT GD EXIT MOVE gt MOVE e Select your root CA certificate here The selected digital certificate will be installed on the projector 150 5 Using On Screen Menu 18 After completing required settings select OK and press the ENTER button The WIRELESS page will be returned 19 Select RECONNECT and press the ENTER button 20 Select OK and press the ENTER button This will complete setting PEAP MSCHAPv2 for EAP TYPE in WPA EAP or WPA2 EAP HP Clearing the digital certificate that is installed on the projector To clear the digital certificate installed on the projector follow the steps below By doing the following procedure all the digital certificates for the currently displayed profile will be cleared 1 Select CLEAR CERTIFICATES in the bottom left of the AD use THE AUTHENTICATION VANCED setting screen and press the ENTER button A message for confirmation will be displayed ZEN s Cu SELECT EXIT MOVE MOVE 2 Select YES and press the ENTER button The digital certificates will be cleared Entering WEP keys Switching betw
222. ition can be adjusted vertically using POSITION when the 16 9 15 9 or 16 10 aspect ratios are selected e The term letterbox refers to a more landscape oriented image when compared to a 4 3 image which is the standard aspect ratio for a vide Source The letterbox signal has aspect ratios with the vista size 1 85 1 or cinema scope size 2 35 1 for movie film e he term squeeze refers to the compressed image of which aspect ratio is converted from 16 9 to 4 3 INPUT RESOLUTION The resolution is assigned automatically when the resolution of the input signal from the computer video input terminal or BNC video input terminal analog RGB cannot be distinguished 96 5 Using On Screen Menu VIDEO INPUT DISPLAY SETUP INFO PICTURE IMAGE OPTIONS SETTINGS NOISE REDUCTION DEINTERLACE NORMAL Cw CONTRAST ENHANCEMENT SIGNAL TYPE AUTO 4 VIDEO LEVEL AUTO lt XUX EXIT v MOVE MOVE HDMI1 ADVANCED Using Noise Reduction NOISE REDUCTION When projecting a video image you can use the NOISE REDUCTION function to reduce the screen noise roughness and distortion This device is equipped with three types of noise reduction functions Select the function according to the type of noise Depending on the noise level the noise reduction effect can be set to OFF LOW MEDIUM or HIGH NOISE REDUCTION can be selected for SDTV HDTV signal and component sign
223. jector is designed to operate on a power supply of 100 240V AC 50 60 Hz Ensure that your power supply fits this requirement before attempting to use your projector Do not look into the lens while the projector is on Serious damage to your eyes could result 4 Keep any items magnifying glass etc out the light path of the projector The light path being projected from the lens is extensive therefore any kind of abnormal objects that can redirect light coming out of the lens can cause an unpredictable outcome such as a fire or injury to the eyes Do not place any objects which are easily affected by heat in front of a projector exhaust vent Doing so could lead to the object melting or getting your hands burned from the heat that is emitted from the exhaust vent Important Information Handle the power cord carefully A damaged or frayed power cord can cause electric shock or fire Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with the projector Do not bend or tug the power cord excessively Do not place the power cord under the projector or any heavy object Do not cover the power cord with other soft materials such as rugs Do not heat the power cord Do not handle the power plug with wet hands Turn off the projector unplug the power cord and have the projector serviced by a qualified service personnel under the following conditions When the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed If liq
224. justments under DETAIL SETTINGS within the PRESET screen that are not currently selected will not be reset 92 IMAGE OPTIONS DISPLAY SETUP INFO PICTURE e VIDEO 3D SETTINGS HORIZONTAL 4 u IT VERTICAL emi GEI BLANKING OVERSCAN AUTO CT ASPECT RATIO AUTO C gt _ X SELECT EXIT vMOVE MOVE HDMI1 ADVANCED Adjusting Clock and Phase CLOCK PHASE This allows you to manually adjust CLOCK and PHASE 5 Using On Screen Menu ENS ae ee Use this item to fine tune the computer image or to remove any vertical banding that might appear This function adjusts the clock frequencies that eliminate the horizontal banding in the image This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the first time vial 2 0 p PHASE TT Use this item to adjust the clock phase or to reduce video noise dot interference or cross talk This is evident when part of your image appears to be shimmering Use PHASE only after the CLOCK is complete NOTE The CLOCK and PHASE items are available for RGB signals only 93 5 Using On Screen Menu Adjusting Horizontal Vertical Position HORIZONTAL VERTICAL Adjusts the image location horizontally and vertically Ni gt e image can be distorted during the adjustment of
225. l display the Projector List window Select your projector you wish to connect This will display the Virtual Remote screen OFF ON Q amara NOTE e When NORMAL is selected for STANDBY MODE from the menu the projector cannot be turned on via network connection e The Virtual Remote Tool screen or Toolbar can be displayed without displaying Easy Setup window To do so click to place a check mark for Do not use Easy Setup next time on the screen 190 8 User Supportware Exiting Virtual Remote Tool 1 Click the Virtual Remote Tool icon on the Taskbar The pop up menu will be displayed Hide Remote Control Reconnect Starting Easy Setup Option Settings Help Cancel Exit 2 Click Exit The Virtual Remote Tool will be closed Viewing the help file of Virtual Remote Tool Displaying the help file using the taskbar 1 Click the Virtual Remote Tool icon the taskbar when Virtual Remote Tool is running The pop up menu will be displayed Show Remote Control Reconnect Starting Easy Setup Option Settings Help Hep About Virtual Remote Tool Cancel Exit 2 Click Help The Help screen will be displayed 2 Virtual Remote Tool Help gt Hide Back Forward Print Contents Index Search About Virtual Remote Tool Operating Environment Virtual Remote Tool is an applic
226. lation is in progress and select Training Mode Attendant or Training Mode Manager Connecting the projector to a LAN Connect the projector to the LAN by following the instructions in Connecting to a Wired LAN 169 Con necting to a Wireless LAN 170 and 9 Application Menus page 138 206 8 User Supportware Basic Operation of Image Express Utility 2 0 This section explains the following three cases as examples of operating Image Express Utility 2 0 1 Transferring images to the projector 2 Holding a conference 3 Participating in a conference Sending Images to Projector e Connecting projector 1 Turn on the power to the projector for which LAN has been set 2 Click Windows Start Programs NEC Projector User Supportware Image Express Utility 2 0 Image Express Utility 2 0 in that order The Selection Of Network Connections window will be displayed A list of the network equipment connected to your computer will be displayed IMPORTANT A screen like the one below is displayed when the software is started on a PC installed with Windows XP Service Pack 2 SP2 or later Click Unblock if this is displayed Windows Security Alert x To help protect your computer Windows Firewall has blocked Vy some features of this program Do you want to keep blocking this program lt IEU20 2 Publisher NEC Display Solution
227. ll new batteries page 12 not work e Make sure there are no obstacles between you and the projector e Stand within 40 m 1575 inch of the projector page 13 To perform E mouse operations using the projector s remote control connect the optional mouse receiver to the computer page 33 See the POWER STATUS LAMP Indicator gt page 270 blinking Cross color in RGB Press the AUTO ADJ button on the projector cabinet or the remote control page 26 mode e Adjust the computer image manually with CLOCK PHASE in IMAGE OPTIONS in menu page 93 For more information contact your dealer 273 10 Appendix If there is no picture or the picture is not displayed correctly e Power on process for the projector and the PC Be sure to connect the projector and notebook PC while the projector is in standby mode and before turning on the power to the notebook PC In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before being powered up NOTE You can check the horizontal frequency of the current signal in the projector s menu under Information If it reads OkHz this means there is no signal being output from the computer page 134 or go to next step e Enabling the computers external display Displaying an image on the notebook PC s screen does not necessarily mean it outputs a signal to the projector When using a PC compatible laptop
228. low these steps 1 Use the A Y 4 or gt button to select one of the 29 2 Press the ENTER button to execute the selection languages from the menu LANGUAGE E PLEASE SELECT MENU LANGUAGE O ENGLISH DANSK SUOMI 7 DEUTSCH gt PORTUGUES NORSK gt FRANCAIS 2 E TINA T RKCE PICTURE C ASPECT C ITALIANO MAGYAR ROM N Cj C3 C2 ESPANOL POLSKI HRVATSKI Cj C2 7 SVENSKA gt NEDERLANDS INDONESIA gt EAAHNIKA wie gt feat O gt Twy 3325 O fue Elo ES O Ser SELECT e SELECT After this has been done you can proceed to the menu es operation If you want you can select the menu language later CTL ECO INFO HELP LANGUAGE on page 81 and 109 NOTE During projection after shutting down the power supply direct power off wait for about 1 minute or longer before turning on the power again Keep the lens cap off the lens while the projector s power is on If the lens cap is on it could be warped due to high temperature If one of the following things happens the projector will not turn on ff the internal temperature of the projector is too high the projector detects abnormal high temperature In this condition the projector will not turn on to protect the internal system If this happens wait for the projector s internal components to cool down When the lamp rea
229. lowing restrictions Only via serial or LAN connection File size Within 256 kilobytes mage size Within the resolution of the projector File format PNG Full color e Logo data image sent using the Virtual Remote Tool will be displayed in the center with the surrounding area in black o put the default NEC logo back in the background logo you need to register it as the background logo by using the image file PA622U NP PA522U PA621 U PA521U Logo necpj_bbwux png PA6 2W PA5 2W PA671W PA571W M ogoWecpj bbwx png PA 22X NP PA622X PA721X PA621X Logo necpj_bb_x png included on the supplied NEC Projector CD ROM 189 8 User Supportware Connect the projector to a LAN Connect the projector to the LAN by following the instructions in Connecting to a Wired LAN page 169 and 9 Controlling the Projector by Using an HTTP Browser page 44 Start Virtual Remote Tool Start using the shortcut icon Double click the shortcut icon on the Windows Desktop Start from the Start menu e Click Start All Programs or Programs NEC Projector User Supportware Virtual Remote Tool Virtual Remote Tool When Virtual Remote Tool starts for the first time Easy Setup window will be displayed Virtual Remote Tool B Easy Setup The Easy Setup feature is not available on this model Click Close Easy Setup Closing the Easy Setup window wil
230. lphanu DRESS 1 2 3 meric characters and symbols TEST MAIL Send a test mail to check if your settings are correct NOTE f you entered an incorrect address in a test you may not receive an Alert mail Should this happen check if the Recipient s Address is correctly set e Unless any one of the SENDER S ADDRESS SMTP SERVER S NAME or RECIPIENT S ADDRESS 1 3 is selected TEST MAIL is not available e Be sure to highlight OK and press the ENTER button before executing TEST MAIL 125 5 Using On Screen Menu NETWORK SERVICE PJLink AMX BEACON OFF CRESTRON XEXIT MOVE HTTP SERVER Set a password for your HTTP server Up to 10 alphanumeric characters PJLink This option allows you to set a password when you use the Up to 32 alphanumeric PJLink feature characters NOTE Do not forget your password However if you forget your password consult with your dealer What is PJLink PJLink is a standardization of protocol used for controlling projectors of different manufacturers This standard protocol is established by Japan Business Machine and Information System Industries Associa tion JBMIA in 2005 The projector supports all the commands of PJLink Class 1 Setting of PJLink will not be affected even when RESET is done from the menu AMX BEACON Turn on or off for detection from AMX Device Discovery when connecting to the network supported by AMX s NetLinx control System
231. lue Donnection specific DNS Description wart uu SERIES HS Law Physical Address Enabled IPv4 IP Address rile IPv4 Subnet Mask IP v4 De fault Gateway IPv4 DNS Server 1 4 WINS Server NetBIOS over Tcpip Enabl oes Ly Link local IPv6 Address IPv6 De fault Gateway IPv6 DNS Servers R s z bam ptm sw a az mm s 6 Click Close 7 Click X at the upper right of the window The system goes back to the desktop Starting the Remote Desktop 1 Press the 8 Ethernet button on the remote control with the power supply to the projector turned on The application menu screen will be displayed APPLICATION MENU il Ss amp o DESKTOP CONTROL NETWORK REMOTE DESKTOP UTILITY PROJECTOR CONNECTION NETWORK SETTINGS ENTER 60 3 Convenient Features e When operating with the main body press briefly the INPUT button to display the INPUT TERMINAL screen of the on screen menu Press the Y button to select 8 ETHERNET and then press the ENTER button to display the application menu screen ADJUST DISPLAY SETUP INFO m 1 HDMI1 ENTRY LIST m 2 HDMI2 TEST PATTERN m 3 DisplayPort x5 4 BNC 5 BNC CY 6 BNC Y C 7 COMPUTER fax 8 m 9 USB A ENTER EXIT A HDMI1 ADVANCED The REMOTE DESKTOP C
232. ly Removing 1 Turn the cable cover screw counterclockwise until it turns loosely e Hold the cable cover while doing this to prevent it from fall ing e screw does not come completely off 2 Remove the cable cover e Turn the cable cover a little then lift it off 267 10 Appendix Pin assignments and signal names of main connectors COMPUTER IN Component Input Connector Mini D Sub 15 Pin Connection and signal level of each pin PinNo RGB Signal Analoc YCbCr Signal Cro Signal Level Video signal 0 7Vp p Analog Sync signal TTL level DisplayPort IN Connector 1 S Blue 3 4 Ground J 4 5 Grun J J J 4 O 6 JJj RedGromd jCrGronmd J INoConnection ee 10 _ Sync Signal Ground No Connection x O O Bi directional DATA SDA 13 Horizontal Sync or Composite Vertical Sync 14 Vertical Sync Data Clock PinNo Signa PinNo Signa MDS Data 1 Shield MDS Data 2 Shield PERENNEM i 7 MDS Data 0 Shield MDS Data 0 MDS Clock i 10 6 NNE NEN 8 L 9 pg PinNo Signa PinNo Grounding O Main link lane 0 Configuration 1 Supplementary channel Grounding 4 Supplementary channel Hot plug detection Heturn 43 3 V power suppl 10 X jMainlinklaneO 2 i 11 ing
233. m the menu e The power consumption in the standby mode will not be included in calculating CO emission reduction Enabling Direct Power On DIRECT POWER ON Turns the projector on automatically when the power cord is inserted into an active power outlet This eliminates the need to always use the POWER button on the remote control or projector cabinet 129 5 Using On Screen Turning On the Projector by Detecting Input Signal AUTO POWER ON SELECT Under the condition of NETWORK STANDBY otherwise under the condition of HDBaseT STANDBY if you use HD BaseT model the projector automatically detects and projects synchronizing signal input from the selected terminals among Computer HDMI1 2 DisplayPort and HDBaseT by this function DEI AUTO POWER ON SELECT function becomes inactive HDMI2 DisplayPort COMPUTER HDBaseT meom When the projector detects the computer signal input from the selected terminal automatically it will be turned ON and will project the computer screen This is not indicated on MM models NOTE e Ifyou want to activate this AUTO POWER ON SELECT function after powering OFF the projector interrupt signal from input terminals or pull out the computer cable from the projector and wait for over 3 seconds and then input signal from the selected terminal In case computer signal is continuously input to the projector however the projector is turned OFF and is in the tra
234. made on the projector Important lf you use the projector with the USB Wireless LAN Unit in the area where the use of wireless LAN equipment is prohibited remove the USB Wireless LAN Unit from the projector e Buy the appropriate USB Wireless LAN Unit for your country or area NOTE e The green LED on the USB Wireless LAN Unit flashes to show that the USB Wireless LAN Unit is working e Your computer s wireless LAN adapter or unit must be complied with Wi Fi IEEE802 11b g n standard Flow of Setting Wireless LAN Step 1 Attach the USB Wireless LAN Unit to the projector if required Step 2 Display NETWORK SETTINGS MM from APPLICATION MENU page 140 Step 3 Select NETWORK SETTINGS MM WIRELESS LAN gt PROFILES and set EASY CONNEC TION PROFILE 1 or PROFILE 2 page 141 TIP Access the HTTP server function to set NETWORK SETTINGS SETTINGS WIRELESS EASY CONNECTION PRO FILE1 PROFILE2 Mounting a wireless LAN unit A CAUTION The wireless LAN unit is mounted inside the projector Before mounting it turn off the power unplug the power cord and let the projector cool down completely Removing the filter unit while the projector is running could result in burns or electric shocks from touching internal parts NOTE e he wireless LAN unit has a front and a back and must be mounted in the wireless LAN port in a specific direction The port is designed so that the unit
235. meters or higher e Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet 1700 meters or higher without setting to HIGH ALTITUDE can cause the projector to overheat and the protector could shut down If this happens wait a couple minutes and turn on the projector Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 1 1 700 meters and setting to HIGH ALTITUDE can cause the lamp to overcool causing the image to flicker Switch FAN MODE to AUTO Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 1 700 meters or higher can shorten the life of optical components such as the lamp Your setting will not be affected even when RESET is done from the menu TIP e When HIGH ALTITUDE is selected for FAN MODE a symbol icon P will be displayed at the bottom of the menu 112 5 Using On Screen LAMP MODE When eco mode is set to ON the CO emissions calculated from the reduction in power consumption of the projec tor can be reduced The eco mode reduces power consumption by mainly lowering the brightness of the lamp As a result the lamp replacement time as a guide is extended page 31 133 Replacement time not guaranteed LAMP ADJUST This can be set when the eco mode is set to OFF Adjust the lamp to match the brightness of each projector when projecting a multi screen display using multiple projectors ECO MODE OFF The lamp luminance brightness will become 100 and th
236. mini D sub 15 pin cable RGB to BNC cable not supplied Stereo mini plug audio cable not supplied Computer cable sold commercially NOTE Please check the operating manual of the computer as the name position and direc tion of the terminal may differ depending on the computer e Select the source name for its appropriate input connector after turning on the projector Input connector Button on the remote control COMPUTER IN 7 COMPUTER 7 COMPUTER BNC IN 4 BNC 4 BNC 157 6 Installation and Connections Digital RGB signal connection e Connect a commercially available HDMI cable between the computer s HDMI output connector and the projectors or HDMI2 input connector e Connect a commercially available DisplayPort cable between the computer s DisplayPort output connector and the projector s DisplayPort input connector HDMI cable not supplied e Select the source name for its appropriate input connector after turning on the projector Input connector Dual Button on the remote control HDMI 1 IN 1 HDMI 1 1 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 IN 2 HDMI 2 2 HDMI 2 DisplayPort IN 3 DisplayPort 3 DisplayPort 158 6 Installation and Connections Cautions when connecting an HDMI cable e Use certified High Speed HDMI Cable or High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet Cautions when connecting a DisplayPort cable e Use
237. move in a parallel manner VERTICAL CORNER When Point d in the drawing is moved and the left side and Point e are moved the right side will move in a parallel manner Adjustment points of the HORIZONTAL CORNER screen and movement points of the projection screen Point b will be displaced in a parallel manner at the same time as Points a b c Point g will be displaced in a parallel manner at the same time as Points f g h Adjustment points of the VERTICAL CORNER screen and movement points of the projection screen Point d will be displaced in a parallel manner at the same time as Points a d f Point e will be displaced in a parallel manner at the same time as Points f g h 4 Start from Step 2 onwards to adjust the other points 5 When the adjustment is completed press the WA b buttons to align the cursor with the EXIT in the adjustment screen and then press theENTER button e Switch to the GEOMETRIC CORRECTION menu screen 104 5 Using On Screen Menu PINCUSHION Adjust the curve distortion of the projection screen TOP Adjust the curve distortion of the upper edge of the projection BOTTOM Adjust the curve distortion of the lower edge of the projection Screen RIGHT Adjust the distortion of the left edge of the projection screen Adjust the distortion of the right edge of the projection
238. n the projector is powered on Doing so can cause damage to the AC IN terminal of the projector and or the prong plug of the power cable To turn off the AC power supply when the projector is powered on use a power strip equipped with a switch and a breaker Do not turn off the AC power for 60 seconds after the lamp is turned on and while the POWER indicator is blink ing blue Doing so could cause premature lamp failure The power plug may be unplugged from the socket after turning off the power supply of the projector Immediately after turning off the AC power supply during video projection or after turning off the power supply of the projector the projector cabinet may become very hot momentarily Please handle with care Caution on Handling the Optional Lens When shipping the projector with the lens remove the lens before shipping the projector Always attach the dust cap to the lens whenever it is not mounted on the projector The lens and the lens shift mechanism may encounter damage caused by improper handling during transportation Do not hold the lens part when carrying the projector Doing so could cause the focus ring to rotate resulting in accidental dropping of the projector Remote Control Precautions Handle the remote control carefully If the remote control gets wet wipe it dry immediately Avoid excessive heat and humidity Do not short heat or take apart batteries Do not throw batteries into fire If you
239. nals output from the 3D emitter As a result the 3D image quality may be affected by conditions such as the brightness of the surroundings screen size viewing distance etc When playing a 3D video software on a computer the SD image quality may be affected if the computer CPU and graphics chip performance are low Please check the required operating environment of the computer that is stated in the operating manual attached to the 3D video software Depending on the signal FORMAT and L R INVERT may not be able to be selected Please change the signal in that case 42 3 Convenient Features When videos cannot be viewed in 3D Please check the following points when videos cannot be viewed in 3D Please also read the operating manual attached to the 3D eyewear Possible reasons Solutions The selected signal does not support 3D output Please change the video signal input to one that supports 3D The format for the selected signal is turned to OFF 2D Please change the format in the on screen menu to AUTO or a format that supports 3D A eyewear that is not supported by the projector is being used Please purchase a commercially available 3D eyewear or 3D emitter recommended page 41 Please check the following points when a video cannot be viewed in 3D using a 3D eyewear that is supported by the projector The power supply of the 3D eyewear is turned off Please turn on the power supply of the 3D eyewear T
240. ne 2 lanes 4 lanes Color depth 6 bit 8 bit 10 bit Colorimetry RGB YcbCr444 and YcbCr422 compatible HDCP compatible la ing frequency 32 44 1 48 kHz Sampling bits 16 20 24 bits BNC shared with the BNC BNC CV BNC Y C audio input terminals Usage environment Operating temperature 41 to 104 F 5 to 40 C 9 1700 to 3650 m 5500 to 12000 feet Set FAN MODE to HIGH ALUTITUDE Power con PA722X PA672W PA622U 483 W 100 130 V 460W 200 240 V sumption PA622X PA572W PA522U 463 W 100 130 V 440W 200 240 V Eco mode on PA722X PA672W PA622U PA622X PA572W PA522U 377 W 100 130 V 362 W 200 240 V STANDBY NORAML 0 11 W 100 130 V 0 16 W 200 240 V 7 4 W 100 130 V 7 9 W 200 240 V STANDBY PA622X PA572W PA522U 5 1 A 2 2 A External dimensions 19 7 width x 5 68 height x 14 1 depth 499 width x 142 height x 359 depth mm not including protruding parts 19 7 width x 6 38 height x 14 5 depth 499 width x 162 height x 368 depth mm including protruding parts 18 5 Ibs 8 4 kg not including lens 1 Effective pixels are more than 99 99 2 This is the light output value lumens when the PRESET mode is set to HIGH BRIGHT The light output values will drop to 80 when ON is selected for ECO MODE If any other mode is selected as the PRESET mode the light output value may drop slightly 3 Compliance with 1S021118 2005 4 HDMI Deep Color Lip Sync with HDCP What is HDC
241. neous display of 2 images PIP PICTURE BY PICTURE Two images can be projected simultaneously with a single projector There are two types of layouts for the two images picture in picture in which a sub picture is displayed on the main picture and picture by picture in which the main and sub pictures are displayed next to each other Multi screen projection using multiple projectors This projector is equipped with multiple HDMI input amp output terminals that can connect multiple projectors in a daisy chain A high quality picture is achieved by dividing and projecting high resolution videos among the various projectors Furthermore the boundaries of the screens are smoothed using an edge blending function Both the composite video signal from each input connector as the computer BNC and BNC CV and the S video signal from the BNC Y C Input connector are not output from HDMI OUT Connector of this projector Seamless switch function for smoother screen changes when switching the signal When the input connector is switched the image displayed before switching is held so that that the new image can be switched to without a break due to absence of a signal Supports HDMI 3D format This projector can be used to watch videos in 3D using commercially available active shutter type 3D eyewear and 3D emitters that support Xpand 3D Network Supported by wired LAN wireless LAN MM Models wireless LAN unit sold separately HD
242. ng normal projector operation Use caution when picking up the projector 15 2 Projecting an Image Basic Operation Turning on the Projector 1 Remove the lens cap 2 Press the POWER button on the projector cabinet or the POWER ON button on the remote control d The POWER indicator will light up in blue from red and C3 C3 CX then start blinking After that the image will be projected DD onto the screen BNC BNC CV C TIP e When the message PROJECTOR IS LOCKED ENTER YOUR PASSWORD is displayed it means that the SECURITY feature is turned on page 38 When the ECO message is displayed it means that ON is Standby selected for ECO MESSAGE page 110 e Pressing buttons such as power button and MENU button will make sound To turn off the beep sound select OFF for BEEP from the menu page 121 Blinking Power On Steady red light Blinking blue Steady blue After you turn on your projector ensure that the computer light light or video source is turned on page 270 NOTE A blue screen blue background is displayed when no signal is being input by factory default menu settings 16 2 Projecting an Image Basic Operation Note on Startup screen Menu Language Select screen When you first turn on the projector you will get the Startup menu This menu gives you the opportunity to select one of the 29 menu languages To select a menu language fol
243. nits in the horizontal direc tion 2 In the screen for setting the number of vertical units select 2 UNITS number of units in the vertical direc tion 3 In the screen for setting the horizontal order select 1st UNIT or 2nd UNIT look at the screens the one on the left is the 1st UNIT while the one on the right is the 2nd UNIT 4 In the screen for setting the vertical order select the 1st UNIT or the 2nd UNIT look at the screens the one at the top is the 1st UNIT while the one at the bottom is the 2nd UNIT IT E 3 Adjust the lens shift of each projector to fine tune the boundaries of the screen For further fine tuning adjust using DISPLAY EDGE BLENDING in the on screen menu for each projector For details please refer to 4 3 Displaying a Picture Using EDGE BLENDING page 71 1 E L m E d HA 65 4 Multi Screen Projection Things to note when installing projectors Leave sufficient space on the left and right of the projector so that the intake and exhaust vents of the projector are not obstructed When the intake and exhaust vents are obstructed the temperature inside the projector will rise and this may result in a malfunction Please do not pile up the projectors directly on top of one another when installing them When the projectors are piled up on top of one another they may fall down resulting in damage and failure e Installation
244. nnecting Your Blu ray Player or Other AV Equipment 162 Connecting Component 163 Connecting HDMI Input 164 Connecting to a HDBaseT transmission device sold commercially HDBase T MOON unan 165 Portrait projection vertical orientation 166 Connecting to a Wired LAN 169 Connecting to a Wireless LAN sold separately MM Models 170 Mounting a wireless LAN unit 170 To remove the wireless LAN unilt 172 Example of wireless LAN connection 173 7 Nliaintenances I a 174 Table of Contents ihe FINES u uuu k T uuu uu UU mU MEETS 174 Cleaning the Lens TT 177 Cleaning the Cabinet uL uu uu 177 Replacing the Lamp and the Filters a a 178 8 User Supportware essere 183 Operating Environment for Software Included on CD ROM
245. nsition to NETWORK STANDBY mode it will keep NETWORK STANDBY mode and will not be turned ON automatically In addition if signal from HDMIT 2 DisplayPort or HDBaseT is continuously input to the projector the projector may be turned ON again automatically based on the setting of external devices even if the projector is turned OFF and in the condition of NETWORK STANDBY mode This function is not activated either by component signal input from the computer screen input terminal or computer signal as Sync on Green and Composite Sync Enabling Power Management AUTO POWER OFF When this option is selected you can enable the projector to automatically turn off at the selected time 0 05 0 10 0 15 0 20 0 30 1 00 if there is no signal received by any input or if no operation is performed NOTE e AUTO POWER OFF will not work when projecting signals from the Ethernet HDBaseT port in HDBaseT models AUTO POWER OFF works even when the viewer or network is being projected in MM models e When the STANDBY MODE is set to HDBaseT STANDBY NETWORK STANDBY for MM models AUTO POWER OFF will turn grey in color and 0 15 will be selected compulsorily Using Off Timer OFF TIMER 1 Select your desired time between 30 minutes and 16 hours OFF 0 30 1 00 2 00 4 00 8 00 12 00 16 00 2 Press the ENTER button on the remote control 3 The remaining time starts counting down 4 The projector will turn off after the countdown is comple
246. nstallation position will be automati cally extracted and projected If the tiling conditions are not satisfied adjust the video screen of the projector at each installation position using the zoom function e Assign a unique control ID to each projector e Set the Color setting and DeepColor setting on your Blu ray player or computer to Auto Refer to the owner s manual accompanied with your Blu ray player or computer for more information Connect an HDMI output of your Blu ray player or computer to the first projector and then connect to the HDMI1 or HDMI2 input connector of the second and subsequent projectors Tiling setting example Number of horizontal units 2 Number of vertical units 2 Horizontal order Second unit Vertical order First unit 108 5 Using On Screen Menu Menu Descriptions amp Functions SETUP MENU INPUT ADJUST DISPLAY LANGUAGE Xi ENGLISH COLOR SELECT COLOR INPUT DISPLAY ON MESSAGE DISPLAY ON ID DISPLAY ON ECO MESSAGE OFF 3D CAUTION MESSAGE ON DISPLAY TIME MANUAL FILTER MESSAGE OFF SELECT P EXIT v MOVE MOVE lt HDMI1 ADVANCED Selecting Menu Language LANGUAGE i You can choose one of 29 languages for on screen instructions NOTE Your setting will not be affected even when RESET is done from the menu Selecting Menu Color COLOR SELECT You can choose between two options for menu color COLOR and MONOCHROME Turning On Off Source Display INPUT
247. nt Control function to protect the computer The user account confirmation window may be displayed Since Desktop Control Utility 1 0 cannot transfer the user account confirmation window this window makes the operation un available Before using Desktop Control Utility 1 0 it is necessary to disable the user account control of Windows 8 Windows Windows Vista After logging on with the administrator account follow the procedure below to change the setting Change Procedure lt For Windows 8 Windows 7 gt 1 Q Click Control Panel Click User Accounts and Family Safety Windows 8 only Click User Accounts Click Change User Account Control settings Change Choose when to be notified about changes to your computer to Never notify and click OK If restarting is requested click Restart now For Windows Vista 1 2 3 4 5 Click Control Panel from the Start Menu Click User Accounts and Family Safety Click User Account Click Enable Disable User Account Control Remove the checkmark for Use User Account Control UAC to Help Computer Protection and click OK If rebooting is requested click Reboot Now Upon completion of Desktop Control Utility it is recommended to enable the user account control 217 Operation on computer 8 User Supportware 1 Click Windows Start All Programs NEC Projector User Supportware Desktop Control Utility 1 0
248. o black Press the EXIT button to return to the thumbnail screen e Pressing the ENTER button will display the movie s control bar with which you can pause or fastforward and some other operations e Microsoft PowerPoint Excel file PowerPoint The slide on the first page will be displayed Press to select the next slide press to select the previ ous slide Domestic Shipments of Product e You also use the Y or A button to select a page To TRE return to the thumbnail screen press the EXIT button Series 1 Series 2 Series 3 iw pat e Pi P2 Excel The first sheet will be displayed Pressing the A Y lt or button to scroll the sheet up down left and right The CTL Y or CTL A button will move to the next sheet or the previous sheet Pressing the ENTER button will change the display ratio in the sheet To return to the thumbnail screen press the EXIT button NOTE e Files with slideshow or animation effects may not be correctly displayed on the Viewer See Supported PowerPoint files Supported Excel files on page 220 231 9 Using the Viewer MINI Models e Adobe file The first page will be displayed Part Nemes of the Protester The PDF file will fill the width of the screen cee bn er ete Pressing the Y or button will scroll the screen down or cal up
249. of being progress is also projected from the projec tor To manipulate a screen that should not be shown not projected temporarily stop the transmission page 209 e Ending conference 1 Click File in the presenter window and click Exit You can also end the conference by clicking x at the upper right of the presenter window Participating in Conference e Participating in conferences 1 Click Windows Start All Programs NEC Projector User Supportware Image Express Utility 2 0 Image Express Utility 2 0 in that order The Selection Of Network Connections window will be displayed A list of the network equipment connected to your computer will be displayed IMPORTANT A screen like the one below is displayed when the software is started on a PC installed with Windows XP Service Pack 2 SP2 or later Click Unblock if this is displayed Windows Security Alert 23 p To help protect your computer Windows Firewall has blocked some features of this program Do you want to keep blocking this program lt IEU20 2 Publisher NEC Display Solutions Ltd Keep Blocking Unblock Ask Me Later Windows Firewall has blocked this program from accepting connections from the Internet or a network If you recognize the program or trust the publisher you can unblock it When should unblock 4 program 2 Select the network equipment that is to be used and click OK
250. of up to four folders can be saved Restarting the projector will display setting saved shared folders in grey folder icon on the drive list screen Selecting the grey icon folder will skip entry for a folder path Failing to connect with a shared folder will display the folder icon with x mark If this happen check your folder setting 246 Projecting data from media server Media server Preparation For projector Connect the projector to the network 9 Using the Viewer MINI Models Projector For computer Prepare image files or movie files to be projected and set up Media Sharing in Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12 NOTE e Both the projector and the media server must be on the same subnet Connecting to the media server beyond the subnet is not possible Types of images and movies which be shared may vary depending on Windows version Setting up Media Sharing in Windows Media Player 11 1 Start Windows Media Player 11 2 Select Media Sharing from Library Create Playlist Ctrl N Create Auto Playlist Music Pictures Video Recorded TV Other Add to Library Media Sharing N Apply Media Information Changes Add Favorites to List When Dragging More Options Help with Using the Library The Media Sharing dialog box will be displayed Media Sharing K Find and share music pictures and video on yo
251. ojector recommended In the Available projectors box PA621U Series is displayed 6 Click PA621U Series The message Enter the password for the projector that you selected is displayed at the bottom of the window 56 3 Convenient Features 7 Input the password to the password input box displayed by the operation at step 3 on page 55 x Select a network projector Available projectors 29 WENNS Series Number of projectors found 1 Enter the password for the projector that you selected mm 8 Click Connect The network projector function works and the screen of Windows 7 is projected from the projector f the resolution of your computer s screen is different from the projector s screen resolution the NETWORK PROJECTOR function may not work If this happens change the resolution of the computer s screen to lower resolution than the one displayed at Step 3 on page 55 NOTE When the network projector function works the background color of the desktop changes to solid color When the network projector function is stopped the original background color is restored Reference If the projector cannot be found at Step 5 click Enter the projector address Then input the Network address Input example http 10 382 97 61 lan and Projectorpassword Input example 82291627 displayed in the screen projected from the projector 57 3 Convenient Features Using the
252. ojector before connecting Lower the computers volume setting before connecting an audio cable to the headphones connector When using with a computer connected to the projector adjust the volume of both the projector and computer to set the appropriate volume level If the computer has a mini jack type audio output connector we recommend connecting the audio cable to that connector When a video deck is connected via a scan converter etc the display may not be correct during fast forwarding and rewind ing Use a DVI to HDMI cable compliant with DDWG Digital Display Working Group DVI Digital Visual Interface revision 1 0 stan dard The cable should be within 197 5 m long Turn off the projector and the PC before connecting the DVI to HDMI cable To project a DVI digital signal Connect the cables turn the projector on then select the HDMI input Finally turn on your PC Failure to do so may not activate the digital output of the graphics card resulting in no picture being displayed Should this happen restart your PC Some graphics cards have both analog RGB 15 pin D Sub and DVI or DEP outputs Use of the 15 pin D Sub connector may result in no picture being displayed from the digital output of the graphics card Do not disconnect the DVI to HDMI cable while the projector is running If the signal cable has been disconnected and then reconnected an image may not be correctly displayed Should this happen restart your PC The COMPUT
253. onnection using the computer cable VGA Windows 8 Pro Windows 8 Enterprise Windows 7 Professional Windows 7 Ultimate Windows 7 Enterprise Windows Vista Home Premium Windows Vista Business Windows Vista Ultimate Windows Vista Enterprise The specifications recommended by Microsoft as the operation environment for Windows 8 Windows 7 Windows Vista should be satisfied Wired LAN or wireless LAN environment that supports TCP IP is required High Color 16 bits True Color 24 bits and 32 bits Setting with 256 colors or less is not available Setting the Projector to Network Projector Input Mode 1 Press the 8 Ethernet button on the remote control with the power supply to the projector turned on The application menu screen will be displayed APPLICATION MENU NETWORK SETTINGS MM CD ENTER os DESKTOP CONTROL NETWORK REMOTE DESKTOP UTILITY PROJECTOR CONNECTION MOVE hid MOVE d 54 3 Convenient Features e When operating with the main body press briefly the INPUT button to display the INPUT TERMINAL screen of the on screen menu Press the Y button to select 8 ETHERNET and then press the ENTER button to display the application menu screen ADJUST DISPLAY SETUP INFO 1 1 ENTRY LIST m 2 HDMI2 TEST PATTERN m 3 DisplayPort x5 4 BNC 5 BNC CY 6 BNC Y C O 7 COMPUTER Ax 8 ETHERNET lr 9 USB A ENTER EXIT C
254. opy Image Express Utility Lite to removable media Copy all the folders and files total size approx 6MB from the IEU Lite removable media folder in the supplied NEC Projector CD ROM to the root directory of your removable media Insert your removable media into your computer The AutoPlay screen will be displayed on your computer TIP e f the AutoPlay screen is not displayed open the folder from Computer My Computer for Windows XP Click Open folder to view files The IEU Lite exe other folder and files will be displayed Double click the IEU Lite exe icon Image Express Utility Lite will start NOTE e The EASY CONNECTION function is not supported when Image Express Utility Lite is started from removable media 201 8 User Supportware Using on Mac OS Step 1 Install Image Express Utility Lite for Mac OS on the computer 1 Insert the accompanying NEC Projector CD ROM in your Mac CD ROM drive The CD ROM icon will be displayed on the desktop 2 Double click the CD ROM icon The CD ROM window will be displayed 3 Double click the OS X folder 4 Double click Image Express Utility Lite dmg in the Image Express Utility Lite folder The Image Express Utility Lite window will be displayed 5 Drag and drop the Image Express Utility Lite folder to your Applications folder in Mac OS Step 2 Connect the projector to a LAN Connect the projector to the LAN
255. or Wireless Remote Control 40 m 1575 inch 20 m 787 inch Remote sensor on projector cabinet SSA 20 m 787 inch 20 m 787 inch 15 m 591 inch Hemote control 15 m 591 inch 15 m 591 inch 15 m 591 inch 40 m 1575 inch 40 m 1575 inch e The infrared signal operates by line of sight up to a distance of above meters and within a 60 degree angle of the remote sensor on the projector cabinet The projector will not respond if there are objects between the remote control and the sensor or if strong light falls on the sensor Weak batteries will also prevent the remote control from properly operating the projector 13 2 Projecting an Image Basic Operation This section describes how to turn on the projector and to project a picture onto the screen Flow of Projecting an Image Step 1 e Connecting your computer Connecting the power cord page 15 V Step 2 e Turning on the projector page 16 V Step 3 e Selecting a source page 18 V Step 4 e Adjusting the picture size and position page 20 e Correcting keystone distortion CORNERSTONE page 35 102 V Step 5 e Adjusting a picture and sound Optimizing a computer signal automatically page 26 Turning up or down volume page 26 V Step 6 e Making a presentation V Step 7 Turning off the projector page 27 V Step 8 e After use page 28 14 2 Projecting an Image Basic
256. or lamp replacement NOTE This message will be displayed under the following conditions e for one minute after the projector has been powered e when the POWER button on the projector cabinet or the STANDBY button on the remote control is pressed To turn off the message press any button on the projector cabinet or the remote control Optional lamp and tools needed for replacement e Phillips screwdriver plus head e Replacement lamp NP26LP Flow of Replacing the Lamp and the Filters Step 1 Replace the lamp Step 2 Replace the filters page 181 Step 3 Clear the lamp usage hours and the filter usage hours page 131 132 178 7 Maintenance To replace the lamp 1 Remove the lamp cover 1 Loosen the lamp cover screw e lamp cover screw is not removable 2 Pull the bottom of the lamp cover towards you and remove it 2 Remove the lamp housing 1 Loosen the two screws securing the lamp housing until the phillips screwariver goes into a freewheeling condi tion e The two screws are not removable e There is an interlock on this case to prevent the risk of electrical shock Do not attempt to circumvent this interlock 2 Remove the lamp housing by holding it A CAUTION Make sure that the lamp housing is cool enough to before removing it Guide hole Interlock u mi 179 7 Maintenance 3 Install a new lamp housing 1 lnsert a new lamp housing until
257. ordance with EN ISO 7779 CAUTION Avoid displaying stationary images for a prolonged period of time Doing so can result in these images being temporarily sustained on the surface of the LCD panel If this should happen continue to use your projector The static background from previous images will disappear Disposing of your used product ucts carrying the mark left must be disposed of separately from normal household waste This includes projectors and their electrical accessories or lamps When you dispose of such products please follow the guidance of your local authority and or ask the shop where you purchased the product After collecting the used products they are reused and recycled in a proper way This effort will help us reduce the wastes as well as the negative impact such as mercury contained in a lamp to the human health and the environment at the minimum level The mark on the electrical and electronic products only applies to the current European Union Member States x EU wide legislation as implemented in each Member State requires that used electrical and electronic prod a Important Information WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS Handling the cables supplied with this product will expose you to lead a chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING RF Interference for USA only WARNING The Federal Communications Commission does n
258. ot allow any modifications or changes to the unit EXCEPT those specified by NEC Display Solutions of America Inc in this manual Failure to comply with this government regu lation could void your right to operate this equipment This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help For UK only In UK a BS approved power cord with moulded plug has a Black five Amps fuse installed for use with this equipment If a power cord is not supplied wi
259. ot available on this series of projectors 36 LENS SHIFT Button not available on this series of projectors 37 PICTURE Button page 89 38 DISPLAY Button page 100 39 ASPECT Button page 95 40 COLOR Button page 91 41 3D Set Button page 99 42 SETUP Button page 109 43 CTL Button page 34 44 ECO Button page 31 45 INFO Button page 134 46 HELP Button page 134 The AV 4 L CLICK and R CLICK buttons work only when a USB cable is connected with your computer 11 1 Introduction Battery Installation 1 Press the catch andremove 2 Install new ones AA En 3 Slip the cover back over the batteries until the battery cover sure that you have the bat it snaps into place teries polarity aligned NOTE Do not mix different types of batteries or new correctly and old batteries Remote Control Precautions Handle the remote control carefully If the remote control gets wet wipe it dry immediately Avoid excessive heat and humidity Do not short heat or take apart batteries Do not throw batteries into fire If you will not be using the remote control for a long time remove the batteries Ensure that you have the batteries polarity aligned correctly Do not use new and old batteries together or use different types of batteries together Dispose of used batteries according to your local regulations 12 1 Introduction Operating Range f
260. p any one of the corners and align the corner of the image with a corner of the screen 4 Press the Geometric button INPUT ADJUST SETUP INFO e EDGE BLENDING KEYSTONE CORNERST ONE HORIZONTAL CORNER VERTICAL CORNER PINCUSHION PC TOOL OFF RESET u sELECT us EXIT MOVE MOVE lt HDMI1 ADVANCED Display the GEOMETRIC CORRECTION screen of the on screen menu 35 3 Convenient Features 5 Press the Y button to align with the CORNERSTONE and then press the ENTER button gt The drawing shows the upper left icon is selected gt v lt n 19 The screen will switch to the CORNERSTONE screen NOTE e When a GEOMETRIC CORRECTION function other than CORNERS TONE has been set up the CORNERSTONE screen will not be displayed When the screen is not displayed either press the Geometric button for 2 or more seconds or run RESET in GEOMETRIC CORRECTION to clear the adjustment value of GEOMETRIC CORRECTION 6 Use the AY lt gt button to select one icon A which points in the direction you wish to move the projected image frame 7 Press the ENTER button 8 Use the button to move the projected image frame as shown on the example 9 Press the ENTER button 10 Use AV lt gt button to select another icon which points in the direction On the CORNERSTONE screen select EXIT or press the EXIT button on the remote control EXIT ADJUST
261. p time reaches 0 hours the projector will not turn on e The message to the effect that the lamp or the filters should be replaced will be displayed for one minute when the projector is turned on and when the POWER button on the projector or the remote control is pressed To dismiss this message press any button on the projector or the remote control Lamp life H ECOMODE _ put ECO During portrait Replacement lamp OFF ON installation 3000 4000 2000 NP26LP e TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS This displays the estimated carbon saving information in kg The carbon footprint factor in the carbon saving cal culation is based on the OECD 2008 Edition page 32 133 5 Using On Screen Menu SOURCE 1 INPUT ADJUST DISPLAY SETUP INPUT TERMINAL HDMI1 RESOLUTION 1024x768 HORIZONT AL FREQUENCY 48 58 kHz VERTICAL FREQUENCY 62 13 Hz SYNC TYPE SEPARATE SYNC SYNC POLARITY H V SCAN TYPE NON INTERLACE SOURCE NAME 1024x768 ENTRY 1 ADVANCED INPUT TERMINAL RESOLUTION HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY VERTICAL FREQUENCY SYNC TYPE SYNC POLARITY SCAN TYPE SOURCE NAME ENTRY NO SOURCE 2 INPUT ADJUST DISPLAY SETUP SIGNAL TYPE RGB VIDEO TYPE NTSC BIT DEPTH 6 hits VIDEO LEVEL FULL LINK RATE 2 7 Gbps LINK LANE 1 30 FORMAT FRAME PACKING HDMI ADVANCED SIGNAL TYPE VIDEO TYPE BIT DEPTH VIDEO LEVEL LINK RATE LINK LANE 3D FORMAT SOURCE 3 INPUT ADJUST D
262. piece of cloth etc to prevent the lens from getting scratched When leaving the lens off the projector for long periods of time mount the dust cap on the projector to prevent dust or dirt from getting inside If you have multiple projectors be careful of the following When mounting a lens designed exclusively for this projector onto another projector in the NP series be sure to remove the lens attachment before mounting the lens on the projector The lens cannot be mounted if its attachment is on For the types of lenses that can be mounted and instructions on removing them see the lense s operating instructions Other types of lenses cannot be mounted on this projector Mounting the lens 1 Remove the dust cap from the projector 2 Remove the lens cap on the back of the lens 3 Insert the lens onto the projector with the yellow marked EM lt SQ protrusion on the lens facing upwards There is a positioning slit on the projector s lens insertion slot Insert the lens slowly all the way in keeping the positioning slit at the same angle B 155 4 Turn the lens clockwise Turn until a click is heard The lens is now fastened onto the projector Mounting the lens theft prevention screw Fasten the lens theft prevention screw included with the projector to the bottom of the projector so that the lens cannot be removed easily Removing the lens 1 While pressing the lens releas
263. protector is activated If the projector s internal temperature rises abnormally the lamp turns off and the temperature indicator flashes re peatedly in cycles of 2 It may happen that the projectors temperature protector is simultaneously activated and the projector s power turns off If this happens do the following Unplug the power cord from the power outlet If using in a place where the surrounding temperature is high move the projector to a different cool place 1 there is dust in the ventilation holes clean pages 174 and 177 Wait as such about 1 hour for the projector s internal temperature to lower 271 10 Appendix Common Problems amp Solutions Power Status Lamp Indicator on page 270 Does notturn on e Check that the power cord is plugged in and that the power button on the projector cabinet or the remote control or shut down is on pages 15 16 e Ensure that the lamp cover is installed correctly page 180 e Check to see if the projector has overheated If there is insufficient ventilation around the projector or if the room where you are presenting is particularly warm move the projector to a cooler location e Check to see if you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours after the lamp has reached the end of its life If so replace the lamp After replacing the lamp reset the lamp hours used page 131 e The lamp may fail to light Wait a full minute and then turn on
264. quare to e Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen page 20 the screen e Perform GEOMETRIC CORRECTION when the trapezoid is distorted page 102 Picture is blurred Adjust the focus page 22 Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen page 20 Ensure that the distance between the projector and screen is within the adjustment range of the lens page 253 Has the lens been shifted by an amount exceeding the guaranteed range 257 Condensation may form on the lens if the projector is cold brought into a warm place and is then turned on Should this happen let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens Flicker appears on Set FAN MODE to other than HIGH ALTITUDE mode when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 screen feet 1700 meters or lower Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet 1700 meters and setting to HIGH ALTITUDE can cause the lamp to overcool causing the image to flicker Switch FAN MODE to AUTO page 112 Image is scrolling Check the computer s resolution and frequency Make sure that the resolution you are trying to display is supported vertically horizontally by the projector page 259 or both Adjust the computer image manually with the Horizontal Vertical in the IMAGE OPTIONS page 94 272 10 Appendix Problem Check These Items Remote control does e nsta
265. r Name Adobe PDF Z Properties Status Ready Comments and Forms Type Adobe PDF Converter Document and Markups X Print Range Preview Composite All c coo 83 3 Current view Current page Adobe PDF Document Properties P Layout a Adobe PDF Settings Adobe PDF n Settings eate Adobe PDF do ee Use thes and 9 zn inti depre Dess doc Eme ente Created PDF doc ned with Acr robs and Adobe Pasir 6 0 and lat Default Settings Standard x Edit Adobe PDF Security None x Adobe PDF Output Folder Prompt for Adobe PDF filename Browse Adobe PDF Page Size A4 Add View Adobe PDF results Standard Adobe PDF Settings f Standard 7 Embed all fonts C General E Images mbed C pe fo euim 7 Su bset dde d for nts Sci n per of characters used is less 100 4 Color than J Advanced 9 On ly fonts with appropriate permission bits will be embedded ee When embedding Warn and continue x Embedding Font Source Always Embed C Windows Fonts T Aharoni Bold T Andalus T AngsanaNew T AngsanaNew Bold T AngsanaNew Boldltalic AnesanaNew lItalic Never Embed T AngsanaUPC Arial Black T AngsanaUPC Bold Arial Blackltalic T AngsanaUPC Bolditalic T Arial BolditalicMT T AngsanaUPC lItalic T Arial BoldMT T Aparajita T Arial ItalicMT Aparajita Bold T ArialMT Show All Settines fei Namen
266. r as the computer BNC and BNC CV and the S video signal from the BNC Y C Input connector are not output from HDMI OUT Connector of this projector 161 6 Installation and Connections Connecting Your Blu ray Player or Other AV Equipment Component video signal S video signal connection BNC cable not supplied u u u u Audio cable not supplied Audio equipment 0 0 0 0 gt C J O 19 8 gt gt Audio cable not supplied W amm mwwmwmmummumm mummuumumumumuumumm Select the source name for its appropriate input connector after turning on the projector Input connector Ed Button on the remote control BNC CV IN eee 5 BNC CV BNC Y C IN eee 6 BNC Y C 6 BNC Y C NOTE e The BNC analog RGB component BNC CV and BNC Y C audio input terminals are shared 162 6 Installation and Connections Connecting Component Input COMPUTER IN AUDIO IN TA AUDIO IN 15 pin to RCA female x 3 cable adapter ADP CV1E BNC male to RCA male conversion cable x 3 sold commercially Stereo mini plug to RCA audio cable not nm supplied Component video RCA x 3 cable not supplied Cb Cr L R Component OUT AUDIO O
267. r computer or change your computer settings Computer Hemote mouse receiver When operating a computer via the remote mouse receiver 7 m 22 feet Remote sensor on the remote mouse receiver When connecting using the USB terminal For PC the mouse receiver can only be used with a Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 or Mac OS X 10 0 0 or later operating system NOTE In SP1 or older version of Windows XP if the mouse cursor will not move correctly do the following Clear the Enhance pointer precision check box underneath the mouse speed slider in the Mouse Properties dialog box Pointer Options tab NOTE When using PowerPoint for Mac OS the CTL button and the page W amp buttons page up and down on the remote control Will be disabled NOTE Wait at least 5 seconds after disconnecting the mouse receiver before reconnecting it and vice versa The computer may not identify the mouse receiver if it is repeatedly connected and disconnected in rapid intervals 33 3 Convenient Features Operating your computer s mouse from the remote control You can operate your computer s mouse from the remote control CTL Button PAGE W A Button aa scrolls the viewing area of the window or to move to the previous or next slide in PowerPoint on your computer AV b Buttons moves the mouse cursor on your computer L CLICK Button works as the mouse left button R CLICK Button works as the mouse righ
268. r to 4 2 Displaying Two Pictures at the Same Time page 67 for details on the operation MODE Select either PIP or PICTURE BY PICTURE when switching to 2 screen display PICTURE SWAP The videos in the main display and sub display will be switched Please refer to 4 2 Displaying Two Pictures at the Same Time page 69 for details PIP SETTING Select the display position position adjustment and size of the sub display in the PIP screen START POSITION Selection of the display position of the sub display when switching to the PIP screen HORIZONTAL POSITION Adjust the display position of the sub display in the horizontal direction The respective corners will serve as reference points VERTICAL POSITION Adjust the display position of the sub display in the vertical direction The respective corners will serve as reference points SZ Eos snis Select the display size of the sub display 100 5 Using On Screen Menu TP The horizontal position and vertical position are the amount of movement from the reference points For example when TOP LEFT is adjusted the position is displayed with the same amount of movement even if displayed with other starting positions The maximum amount of movement is half the resolution of the projector Heference point Adjust using the horizon Heference point position Adjust using the vertical position TOP LEFT TOP RIGHT BOTTOM
269. rection Tool GCT function allows you to correct distortion of images projected even from an angle What you can do with GCT The GCT feature includes the following three functions 4 point Correction You can fit a projected image within the border of the screen easily by align the four corners of an image to the ones of the screen Multi point Correction You can correct a distorted image on the corner of a wall or irregular shaped screen by using many separated screens to correct the image as well as 4 point Correction Parameters Correction You can correct a distorted image by using a combination of transformational rules prepared in advance This section will show an example for use with 4 point Correction For information about Multi point Correction and Parameters Correction see the help file of Image Express Utility Lite page 200 Your correction data can be stored in the projector or your computer which can be restored when necessary The GCT function is available with a wired or wireless LAN connection and video cable Projecting an Image from an Angle GCT For a video cable or LAN connection install and start Image Express Utility Lite in your computer beforehand page 198 Preparation Adjust the projector position or the zoom so that the projected image can cover the whole screen area 1 Click the E Picture icon and then the button 192 168 101 Picture
270. required for using WPA EAP or WPA2 EAP Preparation before setting Select a wireless LAN compliant WPA EAP or WPA2 EAP authentication and install a digital certificate on the projec tor 1 Set DATE AND TIME on the projector page 118 2 Use a computer to save digital certificates files for WPA EAP or WPA2 EAP setting to your USB memory device After completing saving the file remove the USB memory device from the computer NOTE e Save a digital certificate file to the root folder of the USB memory The file formats of digital certificate that are supported by the projector are DER and PKCS 12 only e he projector cannot handle any digital certificate whose file size exceeds 8 KB e CRL Certificate Relocation List is not supported Client certificate chain is not supported 3 Plug the USB memory device into the USB port of the projector Setting Procedures 1 Select NETWORK SETTINGS MM gt WIRELESSS LAN WIRELESS LAN MM Lu IL i v DHCP 192 168 100 10 2 Pa m m m C ME LLL ee Gar 2 Set items such as PROFILES DHCP IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK and others as required e Select PROFILE 1 or PROFILE 2 for PROFILES If EASY CONNECTION is selected WPA PSK WPA2 PSK or WPA2 EAP is not available 3 Select ADVANCED and press the ENTER button The ADVANCED setting screen will be displayed 145 5 Using On Screen Menu 4
271. ress of Projector index html The basic HTTP server screen will be displayed 2 HTTP server screen for MM models only 1 Connect the projector to the computer with a LAN cable sold commercially page 169 Alternatively install a wireless LAN unit sold separately page 170 2 Select INPUT TERMINAL ETHERNET in the on screen menu The application menu will be displayed 3 Select NETWORK SETTINGS MM and configure the network settings page 138 TIP f you want to set the IP address here set a different IP address in the same segment as the IP address that has been set in the basic HTTP server screen 44 3 Convenient Features 4 Start up the web browser on your computer and enter the address or URL in the input field Specify the address or URL as http lt IP Address of Projector MM index htmfl The HTTP server screen for MM models only will be displayed TIP The factory setting IP address is DHCP ON NOTE o use the projector in a network consult with your network administrator about network settings e The displays or buttons response can be slowed down or operation may not be accepted depending the settings of your net work Should this happen consult your network administrator The projector may not respond if its buttons are repeatedly pressed in rapid intervals Should this happen wait a moment and repeat If you still can t get any response turn off and back on the proj
272. rocedures stated as in Uninstalling a software program page 188 197 8 User Supportware Step 2 Connect the projector to a LAN Connect the projector to the LAN by following the instructions in Connecting to a Wired LAN page 169 and 9 Controlling the Projector by Using an HTTP Browser page 44 Step 3 Start Image Express Utility Lite 1 On Windows click Start gt All programs NEC Projector UserSupportware Image Express Utility Lite Image Express Utility Lite Image Express Utility Lite will start The select window for network connection will be displayed Select Network and click OK The select window for destination will show a list of connectable projectors e When connecting the computer directly to the projector by one to one Easy Connection is recommended Sdec Network Por Please select the network port Type Name Realtek RTL8168C P 8111C P Family PCI E Gigabit Ethernet NIC NDIS 6 20 Easy Connection Atheros AR9281 Wireless Network Adapter Atheros AR9281 Wireless Network Adapter Use the same network port in the future this can be changed in the options Cm J H e When one or more networks for EASY CONNECTION are found the Easy Connection Selection Screen window will be displayed e To verify the network used by the projector to be connected display the INPUT TERMINAL ETHERNET gt N
273. rovided with the sticker pasted 1 Introduction Rear Remote Sensor located on the front and the rear page 13 Terminals page 10 USB LAN Port MM Models This is located inside the projector A wireless LAN unit sold separately can be attached page 170 Exhaust vent Heated air is exhausted from here Intake vent Filter Cover page 174 181 AC IN Terminal Connect the supplied power cord s three pin plug here and plug the other end into an active wall outlet Cable cover connection gt page 15 right and left Screw holes and grooves for the optional cable cover page 267 Built in Security Slot This security slot supports the MicroSaver 9 Security System 1 Introduction ll Jd AS gt POWER STATUS LAMP TEMP 6 j 9NPUT qu N T Q evu A x EXIT 4 9 1 5 POWER Button page 16 27 2 POWER Indicator page 15 16 27 270 3 STATUS Indicator page 270 4 LAMP Indicator page 178 271 5 TEMP Indicator page 271 6 INPUT Button page 18 7 AUTO ADJ Button page 26 8 Geometric Button page 35 9 MENU Button page 77 10 AV lt gt Volume Buttons lt gt page 26 77 11 ENTER Button page 77 12 EXIT Button page 77 Terminals Connection Terminal of Connection Termi 10 10 Ethernet USB id HDBaseT Ethernet E
274. rs and JPEG files will appear e Up to four index folders in your USB and shared folder are displayed The four folders will be displayed in reverse chronological order e When you insert the USB memory device storing index with the Viewer in operation the content of the index files will be displayed NOTE e The play mode MANUAL AUTO for slides of index file works in the following Way In case of MANUAL for PLAY MODE When you select OPTIONS SLIDE SETTING PLAY MODE MANUAL index files will be set for manual playback in regard less of whether INTERVAL is set In case of AUTO selected for PLAY MODE When you select OPTIONS SLIDE SETTING PLAY MODE AUTO index files will be set for auto playback at intervals specified by using INTERVAL When however 1 is selected for INTERVAL the play mode will be set for auto playback according to the setting for OPTIONS SLIDE SETTING INTERVAL 7 Remove the USB memory from the projector Return to the drive list screen Make sure that the LED on the USB memory is not flashing before removing the USB memor y NOTE If you remove the USB memory from the projector with a slide displayed the projector may not operate correctly If this happens turn off the projector and unplug the power cord Wait 3 minutes then connect the power cord and turn on the projector 233 9 Using the Viewer MM Models New model ws
275. s Ltd Keep Blocking Unblock Ask Me Later Windows Firewall has blocked this program from accepting connections from the Internet or a network If you recognize the program or trust the publisher you can unblock it When should unblock a program 3 Select the network equipment that is to be used and click OK 2 Selection Of Network Connections EX Select the network connection to be used Network Connection 2 DLE He Easy Connection EO Seu JF bib Select the network device displaying Easy Connection if the product LAN setting is for Easy Connection This Will call up the Projector List window 207 8 User Supportware 4 Check the projector to connect and click Connect If the name of the projector to connect is not on the list or if it is hidden click Update Connect to List Help Connect to Oe Sid had eee cnm to IP Address Status Resolution Click 97 bursa DCUM Available 1024 x 768 Detail Update The screen of your computer will be projected from the projector At this time the input signal of the projector will automatically change to ETHERNET e Transferring images When your computer is connected to the projector the screen of the computer is projected from the projector as is To make your presentation by using a PowerPoint file open t
276. s Adjustment range unit pe NP11FL NP30ZL NOTE e When power is supplied to the device the adjustment value of the KEYSTONE used previously is retained even if the gradient of the device is changed e When clearing the adjustment value of KEYSTONE press the Geometric button for 2 or more seconds e When setting other GEOMETRIC CORRECTION functions the KEYSTONE menu cannot be selected When performing trapezoidal correction press the Geometric button for 2 or more seconds to clear the adjustment value of GEOMETRIC CORRECTION e As electrical correction is carried out by KEYSTONE the brightness may be reduced or the screen quality may deteriorate sometimes 102 5 Using On Screen Menu CORNERSTONE Display the 4 point correction screen and adjust the trapezoidal distortion of the projection screen Please refer to Correcting Horizontal and Vertical Keystone Distortion CORNERSTONE page 35 for details on the operation HORIZONTAL CORNER VERTICAL CORNER Distortion correction for corner projection such as wall surfaces HORIZONTAL CORNER Performs correction for projection onto a wall lying at an angle to the horizontal direction amp Performs correction for projection onto a wall lying at an angle to the vertical direction M When the maximum adjustment range is exceeded distortion adjustment is disabled Set up the projector at an optimal angle as the deterioration in the image quality in
277. s LAN using EASY CONNECTION SIMPLE ACCES POINT Set the projector for simple access point Use WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup to set up the wireless LAN for the projector NOTE Use the projectors menus to make WPS connections and change the WPS profile settings CHANNEL Select a channel Available channels vary depending on the country and region When you select INFRASTRUCTURE make sure that the projector and your access point are on the same channel when you select AD HOC make sure that the projector and your computer are on the same channel Enter an identifier SSID for wireless LAN Communication can be done only with equipment whose SSID matches SSID for your wireless LAN 51 3 Convenient Features SITE SURVEY Displays a list of available SSIDs for wireless LAN on site Select an SSID which you can access NETWORK TYPE Select communication method when using wireless LAN INFRASTRUCTURE Select this option when communicating with one or more equip ment connected to the wireless LAN network via a wireless access point AD HOC Select this option when using the wireless LAN to directly communicate with a computer in peer to peer mode SECURITY TYPE Turn on or off the encryption mode for secure transmission When turn on the encryp tion mode set WEP key or encrypted key DISABLE Will not turn on the encryption feature Your communications may be monitored by someone WEP 128 bit Uses 128 bit datalength for se
278. s Utility Lite for Windows Mac OS Image Express Utility 2 0 for Windows Desktop Control Utility 1 0 for Windows may be used Image Express Utility Lite 3 1 Introduction for Windows may be started up and used from a USB memory or SD card available commercially even without installing on a computer Image Express Utility Lite for Windows Mac OS Image Express Utility 2 0 for Windows and Desktop Control Utility 1 0 for Windows Energy saving Energy saving design with a standby power consumption of 0 11 watts 100 130 V 0 16 watts 200 240 V When the on screen menu s standby mode is set to NORMAL the power consumption in the standby mode is 0 11 watts 100 130 V 0 16 watts 200 240 V Eco mode for low power consumption and Carbon Meter display The projector is equipped with an eco mode for reducing power consumption during use Furthermore the power saving effect when the eco mode is set is converted into the amount of reductions of CO emissions and this is indicated on the confirmation message displayed when the power is turned off and at Information on the on screen menu CARBON METER Maintenance Maximum lamp replacement time of 4000 hours and no need to clean the filters When used in the eco mode the lamp replacement time is extended to a maximum of 4000 hours This time is not guaranteed Furthermore this projector uses large 2 layer filters When these filters are replaced with ne
279. s a movie file for about 7 seconds Goes to the beginning of next movie file D TIME Displays an elapsed time for playback or pause SIZE mg BEST FIT Displays the image with its aspect ratio in the projectors displayable maximum resolution BH ACTUAL Displays the image in its actual size SIZE x CLOSE Closes the control bar e You can also press the EXIT button to close the control bar amp END Stops playing a movie and closes the control bar to return to the thumbnail screen 239 9 Using the Viewer MINI Models Viewer option settings e SLIDE SETTING Sets still images or slides SLIDE SETTING SCREEN SIZE ACTUAL SIZE PLAY MODE MANUAL D REPEAT SELECT EXIT MOVE SCHREEN SIZE BEST FIT Displays the image with its aspect ratio in the projector s display able maximum resolution ACTUAL SIZE Displays the image in its actual size PLAY MODE MANUAL Selects manual play AUTO Selects auto play INTERVAL 5 300 seconds Specifies interval time when AUTO is selected for PLAY MODE REPEAT Check mark Turns on or off the repeat function TIP To play one or more slides place those files into a folder 240 9 Using the Viewer MINI Models e MOVIE SETTING Sets the functions for a movie file MOVIE SETTING SCREEN SIZE BEST FIT REPEAT OFF D Gi SELECT GD EXIT MOVE SCREEN SIZE BEST FIT Displays the image with its aspect ratio in the projector s display able m
280. s connector for wired remote control of the projector using the NEC remote control for PX750U PH1000U PH1400U series Connect the projector and optional remote control using a commercially available wired remote control cable NOTE e When a remote control cable is connected to the REMOTE connector infrared remote control operations cannot be performed e Both the composite video signal from each input connector as the computer BNC and BNC CV and the S video signal from the BNC Y C Input connector are not output from HDMI OUT Connector of this projector HDBaseT Models e When HDBaseT is selected in the REMOTE SENSOR and the projector is connected to a commercially available transmission device that supports HDBaseT remote control operations in infra red cannot be carried out if transmission of remote control signals has been set up in the transmission device However remote control using infrared rays can be carried out when the power supply of the transmission device is switched off 10 Part Names of the Remote Control The HDBaseT model is described in the illustrations of the remote control STANDBY 13 9 ON DO Gl FREEZE BLANK MUTE z MUTE mm 4 7 PBPIPOP AUTOADI 12 39 15 13 14 16 gt 1 i dE 19 2 22 198 H 24 25 oar e 27 x 29 30 sa 31 33 34 B s 35
281. s shift dials clockwise or counterclockwise Vertical dial Turn this clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the projection position in the vertical direction Approximate turning range About 6 turns counterclockwise about 2 turns clockwise when the lens is at the center position Horizontal dial Turn this clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the projection position in the horizontal direction Approximate turning range About 1 turn counterclockwise about 1 turn clockwise when the lens is at the center position NOTE e he dials can be turned more than one full turn but the projection position cannot be moved more than the range indicated on the following page e f the lens is shifted to the maximum in the diagonal direction the edges of the screen will be dark or shaded e he vertical shift adjustment must be finished with an image shifted upward If you finish the vertical shift adjustment with an image shifted down the zoom focus adjustments or strong shaking may cause a projected image to slightly shift down e he lens shift function cannot be used when using the separately sold NP11FL lens 21 2 Projecting an Image Basic Operation JIP e The diagram below shows the lens shift adjustment range projection format desk front of the WUXGA type excluding the lens unit NP30ZL Use the tilt foot if you wish to raise the projection position beyond this page 25 e hefer to Page 25 for the lens shift adjustment
282. screen menu and select PIP or PICTURE BY PICTURE For details please refer to 4 2 Displaying Two Pictures at the Same Time page 67 63 4 Multi Screen Projection Case 2 Using four projectors liquid crystal panel XGA to project videos with a resolution of 1920 x 1080 pixels TILING Connection example and projection image On screen menu operations 1 Four similar videos are displayed when four projectors are projected Please request the retail store to adjust the projection position of each projector NOTE e When setting up the projector assign a unique control ID to each projector Set the Color setting and DeepColor setting on your Blu ray player or computer to Auto Refer to the owner s manual ac companied with your Blu ray player or computer for more information e Connect an HDMI output of your Blu ray player or computer to the first projector and then connect to the HDMI1 or HDMI2 input connector of the second and subsequent projectors e Selecting another input source on the second and subsequent projectors will disable the HDMI repeater function 64 4 Multi Screen Projection 2 Operate the on screen menu using the four respective projectors to divide the image into four portions Display DISPLAY MULTI SCREEN gt PICTURE SETTING Screen in the on screen menu and select TIL ING 1 In the screen for setting the number of horizontal units select 2 UNITS number of u
283. sist Please watch a video directly in front of the screen If you watch a video obliquely from the sides this may result in physical and eye fatigue 3D eyewear and 3D emitter preparations Please use an active shutter type 3D eyewear that conforms with the VESA standard A commercially available RF type made by Xpand is recommended 30 Xpand X105 RF 3D emitter Xpand AD025 RF X1 Procedure to watch 3D videos using this projector 1 Connect the video device to the projector 2 Switch on the power supply to the projector 3 Run the 3D video software and project the video using the projector This has been automatically set up when shipped from the factory When a 3D video cannot be projected it may be because the 3D detection signals are not included or because they are not detectable by the projector Please manually select the format 4 Select the 3D video format 1 Press the 3D Set button on the remote control INPUT DISPLAY SETUP INFO PICTURE IMAGE OPTIONS VIDEO e STEREO VIEWER SINGLE gt FILTER SINGLE gt AUTO L R INVERT OFF ar uL SELECT P EXIT MOVE lt HDMIT ADVANCED 41 3 Convenient Features The 3D SETTINGS screen will be displayed 2 Press the W button to align the cursor with the FORMAT and press the ENTER button The format screen will be displayed 3 Select the input signal format using the Y bu
284. stall e When the User Account Control windows is displayed click Continue Follow the instructions on the screens to complete the uninstallation e For Windows XP 1 Click Start and then Control Panel The Control Panel window will be displayed Double click Add Remove Programs The Add Hemove Programs window will be displayed Click the software program from the list and then click Remove Follow the instructions on the screens to complete the uninstallation 187 Using on Mac OS Example Install PC Control Utility Pro 5 on the computer Insert the accompanying NEC Projector CD ROM in your Mac CD ROM drive The CD ROM icon will be displayed on the desktop Double click the CD ROM icon The CD ROM window will be displayed Double click the Mac OS X folder Double click PC Control Utility Pro 5 pkg The installer will start Click Next END USER LICENSE AGHEEMENT screen will be displayed Read END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT and click Next The confirmation window will be displayed Click I accept the terms in the license agreement Follow the instructions on the installer screens to complete the installation TIP e Uninstalling a software program 1 Put the Image Express Utility Lite or PC Control Utility Pro 5 folder to the Trash icon 2 Put the configuration file of Image Express Utility Lite or PC Control Utility Pro 5 to the Trash icon 8 User Supportw
285. stream is recommended only on secure networks The Allow All Media Devices windows will be displayed 3 Select Automatically allow all computers and media devices Stream v Create playlist Allow Internet access to home media Allow remote control of my Player v Automatically allow devices to play my media More streaming options Graphics and movie files in Library can be used from the projector 249 9 Using the Viewer MINI Models Connecting the projector to the media server Press the 9 USB A button on the remote control The VIEWER will start e When operating with the main body use the INPUT button to select 9 USB A This will start searching for a computer with media sharing enabled in the network and add it to the Media server of the thumbnail screen Another way to do this is to point the cursor to Media server and select REFRESH from the thumbnail menu and press the ENTER button NOTE e Up to four accessible media servers can be automatically searched and displayed The fifth device or later cannot be displayed page 229 250 9 Using the Viewer MINI Models Disconnecting the projector from the media server 1 Display the OPTIONS menu Press the Y button to select the OPTIONS icon and select the ENTER button 2 Display the MEDIA SERVER setting screen VIEWER Press the Y button to select the MEDIA SERVER icon and press the ENTER but
286. t button NOTE e When you operate the computer using the AW or button with the menu displayed both the menu and the mouse pointer Will be affected Close the menu and perform the mouse operation e When using PowerPoint for Mac OS the CTL button and the page W A buttons page up and down on the remote control will be disabled About Drag Mode By pressing the L CLICK or R CLICK button for 2 or 3 seconds then releasing the drag mode is set and the drag operation can be performed simply by pressing the lt P gt button To drop the item press the L CLICK or R CLICK button To cancel it press the R CLICK or L CLICK button TIP You can change the Pointer speed on the Mouse Properties dialog box on the Windows For more information see the user documentation or online help supplied with your computer 34 3 Convenient Features Correcting Horizontal and Vertical Keystone Distortion CORNERSTONE Use the CORNERSTONE feature to correct keystone trapezoidal distortion to make the top or bottom and the left or right side of the screen longer or shorter so that the projected image is rectangular 1 Press and hold the Geometric button for a minimum of 2 seconds to reset current adjustments Current adjustments for GEOMETRIC CORRECTION will be cleared 2 Project an image so that the screen is smaller than the area of the raster poe The drawing shows the upper right corner Projected image 3 Pick u
287. t networks STANDBY MODE in sleep mode Orange Button has been The projector s keys are locked The setting must be canceled pressed while projec to operate the projector Page 119 tor is in key lock mode Projectors ID number Check the control IDs Pages 120 and remote control s ID number do not match 2 Sleep mode refers to the state whereby the functional restrictions due to the standby mode setting are removed 270 10 Appendix Lamp Indicator m Ta Preparing to relight lamp Wait a while after lighting has failed Lamp replacement grace The lamp has reached the end of its service life and is period now in the replacement grace period 100 hours Re place the lamp as soon as possible page 178 Hed cycles Lamp does not light The lamp has not turned on Wait at least 1 minute then turn the power back on If the lamp still does not light contact an NEC projector customer support center Lamp usage time exceeded The lamp has exceeded its usage time The projector s power cannot be turned on until the lamp is replaced page 178 Hed cycles Temperature problem The temperature protector has been activated If the of 2 room temperature is high move the projector to a cool place If the problem still persists contact an NEC projector customer support center Lit Orange High surrounding tempera The surrounding temperature is high Lower the room ture temperature If the temperature
288. t ratio Files that can be played back on the media server are graphics and movie files In Windows Media Player 11 Windows XP Windows Vista mp4 files cannot be played back Supported PDF files pdf Adobe Acrobat PDF NOTE e Fonts not embedded in PDF may not be displayed e Functions added to PDF file after created will not work or display Functions added are bookmarks boxes in form tool and notes Will not be displayed Auto flip or Auto transition will not work e Some PDF files may not be displayed Supported PowerPoint files ppt pptx Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2007 NOTE e Playable fonts colors font ornament placement object insertion or animation are restricted e Some Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2007 files may not be displayed Supported Excel files Microsoft Excel 97 2007 NOTE e Playable fonts colors font ornament graphs or graphics are restricted e Some Microsoft Excel 97 2007 files may not be displayed Supported USB memory devices Be sure to use a USB memory device formatted with the FAT exFAT FAT32 or FAT16 file system The projector does not support NTFS formatted USB memory If the projector does not recognize your USB memory check if the format is supported To format your USB memory in your computer refer to the document or help file that comes with your Win dows We do not warrant that the USB port of the projector will support all USB memories in the market 226 9 Using
289. te NOTE e To cancel the preset time set OFF for the preset time or turn off the power e When the remaining time reaches 3 minutes before the projector is turned off the THE PROJECTOR WILL TURN OFF WITHIN 3 MINUTES message will be displayed on the bottom of the screen 130 5 Using On Screen Menu Returning to Factory Default RESET The RESET feature allows you to change adjustments and settings to the factory preset for a all source s except the following INPUT ADJUST DISPLAY POWER OPTIONS CURRENT SIGNAL ALL DATA ALL DATA INCLUDING ENTRY LIST CLEAR LAMP HOURS CLEAR FILTER HOURS UP EXIT v MOVE MOVE HDMI1 ADVANCED CURRENT SIGNAL Resets the adjustments for the current signal to the factory preset levels The items that can be reset are PRESET CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS COLOR HUE SHARPNESS AS PECT RATIO HORIZONTAL VERTICAL CLOCK PHASE and OVERSCAN ALL DATA Reset all the adjustments and settings for all the signals to the factory preset All items can be reset EXCEPT ENTRY LIST LANGUAGE BACKGROUND FILTER MESSAGE EDGE BLEND ING MULTI SCREEN SCREEN TYPE GEOMETRIC CORRECTION REF WHITE BALANCE STATIC CON VERGENCE ADMINISTRATOR MODE CONTROL PANEL LOCK SECURITY COMMUNICATION SPEED DATE AND TIME SETTINGS CONTROL ID STANDBY MODE FAN MODE LAMP LIFE REMAINING LAMP HOURS USED FILTER HO
290. th Qtr Chat BE Become A Presenter Presenter Administrator Attendant 1 File Transfer Memo Click 2 Select a file to download and click Download Downloading will begin The progress of the downloading is displayed at the lower left of the window 3 When downloading is complete click File in the File Transfer window and click Exit The File Transfer window will be closed REFERENCE f Open After Downloading is checked the file is opened by specified Windows application software after downloading is com plete n case of Windows a created file is saved to My DocumentsVmageExpressV under the default settings In case of Windows Windows Vista DocumentMmageExpressV is the default folder to save a created file folder is created below the default folder based on the time and date of the conference and the image is saved to a file in the created folder For example if a conference is held at 11 20 May 14 2014 the default folder name on Windows will be My Documents ImageExpress2014 05 14 11 20 Meeting Records 214 8 User Supportware e Changing presenter Three types of settings may be made to change the presenter Not Approved Approved and Changing Prohibited these can be selected only by the presenter In the following example Not Approved is selected e Click Become A Presenter the attendant window You will chan
291. th this equipment please contact your supplier Important Safeguards These safety instructions are to ensure the long life of your projector and to prevent fire and shock Please read them carefully and heed all warnings A Installation Do not place the projector in the following conditions on an unstable cart stand or table near water baths or damp rooms in direct sunlight near heaters or heat radiating appliances in a dusty smoky or steamy environment on a sheet of paper or cloth rugs or carpets e f you wish to have the projector installed on the ceiling Do not attempt to install the projector yourself The projector must be installed by qualified technicians in order to ensure proper operation and reduce the risk of bodily injury In addition the ceiling must be strong enough to support the projector and the installation must be in accordance with any local building codes Please consult your dealer for more information Important Information WARNING Do not cover the lens with the lens cap or equivalent while the projector is on Doing so can lead to melting of the cap due to the heat emitted from the light output Do not place any objects which are easily affected by heat in front of the projector lens Doing so could lead to the object melting from the heat that is emitted from the light output ALCL Do not use the projector with it leaning to the left and right This may result in a malf
292. that the USB port of the projector will support all USB devices in the market Prepare a commercially available wireless keyboard US layout version Connect the USB wireless receiver to the USB port Type A of the projector Make all necessary settings for your wireless keyboard and mouse 58 3 Convenient Features Setting the password to the user account of Windows 7 If a password has been set for an account the steps 1 to 9 can be skipped o 0 N O Q amp G N Click Start from the desktop of Windows 7 Click Control Panel Click Add or remove user accounts displayed under User Accounts When the User Account Control confirmation window appears click Continue Click Administrator Click Create a password Input the password to the New password box Input the same password as that at Step 7 to the Confirm new password box Click Create a password The Administrator is changed to Password Protection Setting the Remote Access 1 Click Control Panel Click System and Security Click Allow remote access displayed under System When the User Account Control confirmation window appears click Continue Oc KR OQ N Click Start from the desktop of Windows 7 The System Properties window appears Click Allow connections from computers running any version of Remote Desktop less secure in the Remote Desktop box and click
293. the PC Enabling your notebook PC s signal output to the projector e Acombination of function keys will enable disable the exter nal display Usually the combination of the Fn key along With one of the 12 function keys turns the external display No image blue or black background no display on or off Still no image even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button Still no image even though you carry out RESET in the projector s menu Signal cable s plug is fully inserted into the input connector A message appears on the screen The source connected to the projector is active and available Still no image even though you adjust the brightness and or the contrast Input source s resolution and frequency are supported by the projector Image is too dark Remains unchanged even though you adjust the brightness and or the contrast Image is distorted Image appears to be trapezoidal unchanged even though you carry out the KEYSTONE adjustment Other Remote control does not work No obstacles between the sensor of the projector and the remote control Projector is placed near a fluorescent light that can disturb the infrared remote controls Batteries are new and are not reversed in installation 276 Llother ____ Shut down during operation Power cord s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet Lamp cover is installed correctly AUTO POWER OFF is turned off only models with the AUTO
294. the lamp housing is plugged into the socket 2 Position so that the guide hole in the bottom right of the lamp house is over the protrusion on the projector then press all the way in 3 Secure it in place with the two screws e Be sure to tighten the screws lt 4 Reattach the lamp cover 1 Insert the top edge of the lamp cover into the groove in the projector and close the lamp cover 2 Tighten the screw to secure the lamp cover Be sure to tighten the screw This completes the lamp replacement Go on to the filter replacement NOTE e When you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours after the lamp has reached the end of its life the projector cannot turn on and the menu is not displayed If this happens press the HELP button on the remote control for 10 seconds to reset the lamp clock back to zero When the lamp time clock is reset to zero the LAMP indicator goes out e For portrait projection the power supply will be switched off when the lamp replacement time estimated is reached lamp replacement message will be displayed 100 hours before the lamp replacement time is reached he replacement time is not guaranteed 180 7 Maintenance To replace the filters Four filters are packaged with the replacement lamp Honeycomb filter coarse mesh Large and small sizes attached to the outside of the filter unit Accordion filter fine mesh Large and small sizes attached to the inside of th
295. the off time setting is expired under the condition in which the power off is not possible the off timer setting will not be executed until the power off becomes possible Programs not marked with a check mark in ACTIVE of the EDIT screen will not be executed even if the Program Timer is enabled When the projector is turned on by using the program timer and if you want to turn off the projector set the off time or do it manually so as not to leave the projector on for a long period of time 116 5 Using On Screen Menu Activating the program timer 1 Select ENABLE on the PROGRAM TIMER screen and press the ENTER button The selection screen will be displayed 2 Press the Y button to align the cursor with ON and then press the ENTER button Return to the PROGRAM TIMER screen NOTE When the effective settings of the PROGRAM TIMER have not been set to ON the program will not be executed even if the ACTIVE items in the program list have been ticked e Even when the effective settings of the PROGRAM TIMER are set to ON the PROGRAM TIMER will not work until the PRO GRAM TIMER screen is closed Changing the programmed settings 1 On the PROGRAM LIST screen select a program you want to edit and press the ENTER button 2 Change the settings on the EDIT screen 3 Select OK and press the ENTER button The programmed settings will be changed You will be returned to the PROGRAM LIST screen Chang
296. the projec tor MEDIA SERVER Displays up to four drives of a computer connected to a LAN set for con necting a media server See page 247 for setting up for connecting a media server of the projec tor PRESENTATION Displays the icon when a USB memory or shared foler stores index files Path information Displays the location of a folder or file Drive information Example USB1 314MB FREE 492MB use Displays the drive Displays free space and capcity of a drive USB only Displays the description of a selected menu Operation button guide Displays information about operation buttons It is displayed in three digit number rounding up NOTE When the OPTIONS menu is displayed the drive list screen or thumbnail screen is not displayed To display it select the RETURN icon and press the ENTER button 236 9 Using the Viewer MINI Models e Thumbnail screen Displays a list of folders thumbnails and icons in the drive selected on the drive list screen Menu operation e Use the V or A button to move the cursor up or down Select the menu item and press the ENTER button to display the menu or setting screen Operation for Thumbnail screen 1 Press the button to move the cursor to the thumbnail screen when the OPTIONS menu is not dis played 2 Press the Y A 4 button to select a file or folder 3 Press the ENTER button to start slideshow or playback of the selected file Selecting a folder w
297. the standby mode is higher but power can be supplied to the projector using a wired LAN In the standby mode the power indicator will light up in orange while the status indicator will be turned off Important e When HDBaseT STANDBY NETWORK STANDBY for MM models is selected AUTO POWER OFF turns grey in colour and becomes disabled while 0 15 is selected compulsorily e When it is set to HDBaseT STANDBY NETWORK STANDBY for MM models under the following conditions the STANDBY MODE setting is disabled and the unit will go into the sleep mode Sleep mode refers to the mode whereby the functional restrictions due to the STANDBY MODE setting are removed e When ENABLE is selected under NETWORK SERVICE AMX BEACON e When NETWORK SERVICE CRESTRON CRESTRON CONTROL gt ENABLE is selected e When CONTROL REMOTE SENSOR HDBaseT is selected only for HDBaseT models e Signal being received from the HDBaseT transmission device only for HDBaseT models e When NORMAL is selected the AUTO POWER ON SELECT display turns grey in color and is disabled and OFF is automati cally selected NOTE HDBaseT Models e When connecting to a HDBaseT transmission device sold commercially if the transmission device is set to transmit remote control signals the power consumption of the projector in the standby mode will increase e Your setting will not be affected even when RESET is done fro
298. the viewer or Ethernet audio selection is Ethernet is being displayed 26 2 Projecting an Image Basic Operation Q Turning off the Projector To turn off the projector 1 First press the POWER button on the projector cabinet or the STANDBY button on the remote con STANDBY ON BLANK MUTE AV MUTE trol d Multi Geometric The POWER OFF ARE YOU SURE CARBON SAV gt r emm INGS SESSION 0 000 g CO2 message will appear C9 GJ 5 POWER OFF ARE YOU SURE CARBON SAVINGS SESSION 0 000 g CO2 e D 2 Secondly press the ENTER button or press the 9 POWER the STANDBY button again The lamp will go off and the power supply will be cut At SET this point if there are no input signals the projector will go into the standby mode after about 10 seconds When in standby mode the POWER indicator will light red and the STATUS indicator will light off when NORMAL is selected for STANDBY MODE POWER Steady blue light E 3 POWER Steady red light Press twice CAUTION Parts of the projector may become temporarily heated if the projector is turned off with the POWER button or if the AC power supply is disconnected during normal projector operation Use caution when picking up the projector NOTE e While the POWER indicator is blinking blue in short cycles the power cannot be turned off e You cannot turn off the power for 60 seconds immediately aft
299. tic lens Use a commercially available plastic lens cleaner Do not scratch or mar the lens surface as a plastic lens is easily scratched e Never use alcohol or glass lens cleaner as doing so will cause damage to the plastic lens surface WARNING e Please do not use a spray containing flammable gas to remove dust attached to the lens etc Doing so may result in fires Q Cleaning the Cabinet Turn off the projector and unplug the projector before cleaning e Use soft cloth to wipe dust off the cabinet If heavily soiled use a mild detergent e Never use strong detergents or solvents such as alcohol or thinner When cleaning the ventilation slits or the speaker using a vacuum cleaner do not force the brush of the vacuum cleaner into the slits of the cabinet Vacuum the dust off the ventilation slits e Clogged ventilation slits may cause a rise in the internal temperature of the projector resulting in malfunction Do not scratch or hit the cabinet with your fingers or any hard objects e Contact your dealer for cleaning the inside of the projector NOTE Do not apply volatile agent such as insecticide on the cabinet the lens or the screen Do not leave a rubber or vinyl product in prolonged contact with it Otherwise the surface finish will be deteriorated or the coating may be stripped off 177 7 Maintenance Replacing the Lamp and the Filters When the lamp reaches the end of its life the LAMP
300. tion 63 Things that can be done using multi screen projection 63 Case 1 Using a single projector to project two types of videos PIP PICTURE BY PL IURE T 63 Case 2 Using four projectors liquid crystal panel XGA to project videos with a resolution of 1920 x 1080 pixels TILING 64 Things to note when installing projectors 66 Displaying Two Pictures at the Same Time 67 Projecting Maece dc NT TET 68 Switching the main display with the sub display and vice versa 69 FA i IO E MER inii aes ayasa I E eR IM 70 Displaying a Picture Using EDGE 71 Setting the overlap of projection screens 72 Black Level 75 5 Using On Screen T O Using the u u Uu u M IDEEN DII Euseb t oe HUN MIRI Aan eiss ont Menu Elements Pu eU 78 Lisi of UEM RE T TTE Tm 79 Menu Descriptions amp Functions
301. tments may be required depending on the type of computer 261 10 Appendix Specifications HDBaseT Models PA622U PA522U PA672W PA572W PA722X PA622X Method Three primary color liquid crystal shutter projection method Specifications of main Liquid crystal panel PA722X PA622X 786 432 1024 dots x 768 lines PA672W PA572W 1 024 000 1280 dots x 800 lines Projection lenses Manual zoom ranqe depends on lens Manual Manual PA722X PA672W PA622U 350 W AC lamp 264 W when Eco mode is on PA622X PA572W PA522U 330 W AC lamp 264 W when Eco mode is on Opticaldevce VW x jOptical isolation by dichroic mirror combining b i Light output 2 C9 ECO OFF PA722X 7200 Im PA622X 6200 Im PA672W 6700 Im PA572W 5700 Im PA622U 6200 Im PA522U 5200 Im PA622X PA572W PA522U 5000 1 Audio output Built in 10W monaural speaker Scanning frequency Horizontal Analog 15 kHz 24 to 100 kHz 24 kHz or greater for RGB inputs conforming to VESA standards Digital 15 kHz 24 to 153 kHz conforming to VESA standards ae 77 48 Hz 50 to 85 Hz 100 120 Hz conforming to VESA standards Digital 24 25 30 48 Hz 50 to 85 Hz 100 120 Hz conforming to VESA standards Main adjustment functions Manual zoom manual focus manual lens shift input signal switching HDMI1 HDMI2 DisplayPort BNC BNC CV BNC Y C COMPUTER HDBaseT auto image adjust ment picture enlarging picture position adjustment muting both v
302. to DHCP and its following items except CHAN NEL in ADVANCED ADVANCED Setting required for wireless LAN only ADVANCED menu only SSID PJ WLANAP3 NETWORK TYPE INFRASTRUCTURE UUs CHANNEL 5 SELECT CD EXIT MOVE 142 9 Using On Screen Menu SITE SURVEY Displays a list of available SSIDs for wireless LAN on site Select an SSID which you can access To select an SSID highlight SSID and use the SELECT to select OK and press the ENTER button Wireless access point 3 Ad Hoc PC WEP or WPA enabled SECURITY This will turn on or off the encryption mode for secure transmis sion To use encryption specify a WEP key or encryption key Select your security type appropriate for your computer and the wire less LAN unit DISABLE Will notturn on the encryption feature Your com munications may be monitored by someone WEP 64bit Uses 64 bit datalength for secure transmis sion WEP 1298bit Uses 128 bit datalength for secure transmission This option will increase privacy and security when compared to use of 64 bit datalength en cryption WPA PSK WPA2 PSK WPA EAP WPA2 EAP These options provide stronger security than WEP The security type WEP key and encryption key settings must be the same as communication devices such as PC or access point in your Wireless network e When you use SECURITY your image transmission speed will slow down e WPA PSK WPA EAP WPA2 PSK and WPA2 EAP are not avail
303. ton 3 Disable the connection Press the ENTER button to clear the checkmark to disable the connection Press the Y button to select OK and press the ENTER button to close the MEDIA SERVER setting screen 251 9 Using the Viewer MINI Models Restrictions on displaying files The Viewer allows you to give a simplified display of a PowerPoint file or PDF file Due to simplified display however actual display may be different from the one on your computer application pro gram Some restrictions on PowerPoint files Fonts will be automatically converted to the fonts installed in the projector Fonts can vary in size or width causing layout corruption Some characters or fonts may not be displayed Some functions included in font are not supported Example There are some restrictions on animation selection or hyperlink It may take longer time to feed pages compared with a computer In some cases Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2007 format files may not be displayed Some restrictions on Excel files Fonts will be automatically converted to the fonts installed in the projector Fonts can vary in size or width causing layout corruption Some characters or fonts may not be displayed Some functions included in font are not supported There are some restrictions on graphs graphics or images A focus cursor in cell A1 cannot be moved It may take longer time to feed pages compared with a computer In some cases Microsoft Ex
304. trol Utility Pro 4 NOTE e For the Schedule function of the PC Control utility Pro 4 to work you must have your computer running and not in standby sleep mode Select Power Options from the Control Panel in Windows and disable its standby sleep mode before running the scheduler Example For Windows 7 Select Control Panel gt System and Security Power Options gt Change when the computer sleeps Put the computer to sleep Never NOTE e When NORMAL is selected for STANDBY MODE from the menu the projector cannot be turned on via the network wired LAN connection Viewing the Help of PC Control Utility Pro 4 e Displaying the Help file of PC Control Utility Pro 4 while it is running Click Help H Help H of window of PC Control Utility Pro 4 in this order The pop up menu will be displayed e Displaying the help file using the Start Menu Click Start gt All programs or Programs gt NEC Projector User Supportware PC Control Utility Pro 4 gt PC Control Utility Pro 4 Help The Help screen will be displayed 194 8 User Supportware Using on Mac OS Step 1 Install PC Control Utility Pro 5 on the computer 1 Insert the accompanying NEC Projector CD ROM in your Mac CD ROM drive The CD ROM icon will be displayed on the desktop 2 Double click the CD ROM icon The CD ROM window will be displayed 3 Double click the OS
305. tton and then press the ENTER button FORMAT AUTO OFF 2D FRAME PACKING SIDE BY SIDE HALF SIDE BY SIDE FULL TOP AND BOTTOM FRAME ALTERNATIVE LINE ALTERNATIVE EXIT The SD settings screen will disappear and the SD video will be projected Press the MENU button and the on screen menu will disappear The SD caution message screen will be displayed when switching to a SD video default factory setting when shipped Please read the Health Precautions on the previous page to watch videos in the correct manner The screen will disappear after 60 seconds or when the ENTER button is pressed page 110 5 Turn on the power supply of the 3D eyewear and wear the eyewear to watch the video A normal video will be shown when a 2D video is input To watch a 3D video in 2D select OFF 2D in the FORMAT screen mentioned above in 3 NOTE Upon switching to 3D image the following functions will be cancelled and disabled BLANKING PIP PICTURE BY PICTURE GEOMETRIC CORRECTION EDGE BLENDING GEOMETRIC CORRECTION and EDGE BLENDING adjustment values will be maintained The output may not automatically switch to a 3D video depending on the 3D input signal Check the operating conditions described in the user manual of the Blu ray player Please connect the DIN terminal of the 3D emitter to the 3D SYNC of the main projector The 3D eyewear allows videos to be viewed in 3D by receiving synchronized optical sig
306. ty 1 0 will be terminated 3 Press the EXIT button on the projector unit or on the remote control The network menu screen will be displayed 4 Press the MENU button on the projector unit or on the remote control The on screen menu will be displayed Select INPUT TERMINAL in the sub menu 5 Select an input source other than 8 ETHERNET 224 9 Using the Viewer MM Models What you can do with the Viewer The Viewer feature allows you to view slides or movie files stored on a USB memory on the projector or a shared folder in a computer connected to the network The Viewer has the following features e When a commercially available USB memory that stores image files is inserted into the USB port Type A of the projector the Viewer allows you to view the image files on the USB memory Even if no computer is available presentations can be conducted simply with the projector e Movie file with audio can be played back A Microsoft PowerPoint Excel file or Adobe PDF file can be simply projected on the screen without connecting computer e Image and movie files stored in a shared folder in a computer connected to a network can be projected The computer with Media Sharing of Windows Media Player 11 turned on can be used as a media server Supported graphic formats JPEG Jpg jpeg CMYK is not supported bmp bit field not supported png Interlaced PNG and o channel PNG are not supported gif Interl
307. u to project precise images up to 500 inches across measured diagonally from your PC or Mac computer desktop or notebook VCR Blu ray player or document camera You can use the projector on a tabletop or cart you can use the projector to project images from behind the screen and the projector can be permanently mounted on a ceiling The remote control can be used wirelessly Do not attempt to mount the projector on a ceiling yourself The projector must be installed by qualified technicians in order to ensure proper operation and reduce the risk of bodily injury In addition the ceiling must be strong enough to support the projector and the installation must be in accordance with any local building codes Please consult your dealer for more information Installation Liquid crystal type high brightness high resolution projector Model Brightness Resolton Aspect Ratio PA572W PA571W 5700 Im WXGA 1280 x 800 16 10 PA722X PA721X 7200 Im XGA 1024 x 768 22 21 6200 Im 1024 768 e Wide range of optional lenses selectable according to the place of installation This projector supports 6 types of optional lenses providing a selection of lenses adapted to a variety of places of installation and projection methods In addition the lenses can be mounted and removed in one touch Note that no lens is mounted upon shipment from the factory Please purchase optional lenses separately e L
308. uid has been spilled into the projector or if it has been exposed to rain or water f the projector does not operate normally when you follow the instructions described in this user s manual f the projector has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged f the projector exhibits a distinct change in performance indicating a need for service Disconnect the power cord and any other cables before carrying the projector Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord before cleaning the cabinet or replacing the lamp Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord if the projector is not to be used for an extended period of time When using a LAN cable For safety do not connect to the connector for peripheral device wiring that might have excessive voltage A CAUTION Do not use the tilt foot for purposes other than originally intended Misuses such as gripping the tilt foot or hang ing on the wall can cause damage to the projector Do not send the projector in the soft case by parcel delivery service or cargo shipment The projector inside the soft case could be damaged Select HIGH in Fan mode if you continue to use the projector for consecutive days From the menu select SETUP gt OPTIONS 1 FAN MODE gt MODE gt HIGH Do not move the projector by holding the cable cover Doing so may result in the projector falling or causing injury Do not unplug the power cable from the wall outlet or projector whe
309. unction However portrait installa tion is possible when a custom designed stand is made For portrait installation install the projector with the intake vent at the bottom and leave a space of at least 130 mm below the intake vent 130 mm or more Fire and Shock Precautions A e Ensure that there is sufficient ventilation and that vents are unobstructed to prevent the build up of heat inside your projector Allow enough space between your projector and a wall page vii Do not try to touch the exhaust vents on the left rear and the rear when seen from the front as it can become heated while the projector is turned on and immediately after the projector is turned off Parts of the projector may become temporarily heated if the projector is turned off with the POWER button or if the AC power supply is disconnected during normal projector operation Use caution when picking up the projector HOT Prevent foreign objects such as paper clips and bits of paper from falling into your projector Do not attempt to retrieve any objects that might fall into your projector Do not insert any metal objects such as a wire or screwdriver into your projector If something should fall into your projector disconnect it immediately and have the object removed by a qualified service personnel Do not place any objects on top of the projector Do not touch the power plug during a thunderstorm Doing so can cause electrical shock or fire The pro
310. ur network 2 Learn about sharing Online Sharing settings Find media that others are sharing 7 Share my media Your network 4 5 F2 2 is a private network Devices that you allow can find your shared media How does sharing change firewall settings 247 9 Using the Viewer MINI Models 3 Select Share my media check box and then select OK A Find and share music pictures and video on your network Learn about sharing Online Sharing settings V Find media that others are sharing V Share my media dI Your network gt 2 2 is a private network Devices that you allow N can find your shared media How does sharing change firewall settings A list of accessible devices will be displayed 4 Select PA621U Series and then Allow Find and share music pictures and video on your network Learn more about sharing Sharing settings J Find media that others are sharing Z Share my medis to Other users of LU Series this Allow Deny Customize Your network GwhO 4 jis a private network Devices that you allow can o find your shared media How does sharing change firewall settings 1 Cancel Apply A check mark will be added to the PA621U Series icon e The PA621U Series is a projector name specified in NETWORK SETTINGS 5 Select OK
311. ution message to indicate that the operating time of the lamp may be shortened will be displayed This message will automatically disappear when the installation state of the projector is returned to the original state A Precautions during installation e Please do not install the projector in a vertical orientation on top of the floor or table on its own The intake vent may be obstructed resulting in the projector getting warm and the possibility of fire and malfunction occur ring For vertical installation install the projector with the intake vent filter facing downwards A stand for supporting the projector needs to be made for this purpose In this case the stand must be designed such that the center of gravity of the projector is located well within the legs of the stand If not the projector may fall over and result in injury damage and malfunction Do not use the lens shift function when performing portrait projection Use the position of the lens shift mecha nism in the center lens center NOTE The lamp replacement time as a guide is about 2000 hours for portrait projection Replacement time is not guaranteed e When installing in a portrait configuration for the first time portrait projection cannot be used when the number of lamp hours used shown under INFO USAGE TIME LAMP HOURS USED in the on screen menu exceeds 1900 hours e When the FAN MODE is set to a mode other than AUTO portr
312. w ones when changing the lamp there is no need for regular filter cleaning Actual menus may be different from the menu images in this user s manual 1 Introduction About this user s manual The fastest way to get started is to take your time and do everything right the first time Take a few minutes now to review the user s manual This may save you time later on At the beginning of each section of the manual you ll find an overview If the section doesn t apply you can skip it Notation by Main Functions These indicate the descriptions of the model groups according to the main functions HDBaseT Models Applicable to models NP PA622U NP PA522U NP PA672W NP PA572W NP PA722X NP PA622X MM Models Applicable to models NP PA621U NP PA521U NP PA671W NP PA571W NP PA721X NP PA621 X The description applies to all models if the model name is not indicated Notation by Resolution These indicate the descriptions of the model groups according to the resolution of the liquid crystal panels WUXGA Type Applicable to models NP PA622U NP PA621U NP PA522U NP PA521U WXGA Type Applicable to models NP PA672W NP PA671W NP PA572W NP PA571W XGA Type Applicable to models NP PA722X NP PA721X NP PA622X NP PAG621 X The description applies to all models if the type name is not indicated How to Differentiate the Model Group PA622U 1 refers to a MM model 2 refers to a HDBaseT model How to Differentiate the Type Group PA62
313. will be displayed a short while after the on screen menu disappears This exits the closed caption mode CAPTION 1 4 Text is superimposed TEXT 1 4 Text is displayed Selecting a Color or Logo for Background BACKGROUND Use this feature to display a blue black screen or logo when no signal is available The default background is BLUE NOTE e Even when the background logo is selected if two pictures are displayed in PIP PICTURE BY PICTURE mode the blue background is displayed without the logo when there is no signal 128 5 Using On Screen Menu POWER OPTIONS INPUT ADJUST DISPLAY DIRECT POWER ON OFF AUTO POWER ON SELECT OFF AUTO POWER OFF OFF OFF TIMER OFF Gu sELECT CGUP EXIT MOVE gt MOVE HDMI1 ADVANCED Selecting Power saving in STANDBY MODE Setting the power consumption in the standby mode In the standby mode the power consumption of the projector is 0 11 W 100 130 V 0 16 W 200 240 V In the standby mode the POWER indicator lights up in red while the STATUS indicator will go off e When set to NORMAL the following terminals and functions will be disabled HDMI output terminal Audio output terminal Ethernet HDBaseT port Ethernet port for MM models USB A port LAN function ALERT MAIL function HDBaseT STANDBY HDBaseT Models NETWORK STANDBY MM Models Compared to NORMAL the power consumption in
314. y dichroic mirror combining b ECO OFF PA721X 7200 Im PA621X 6200 Im PA671W 6700 Im PA571W 5700 Im PA621U 6200 Im PA521U 5200 Im Contrast ratio 2 all white all black PA721X PA671W PA621U 6000 1 PA621X PA571W PA521U 5000 1 Screen size throw distance 130 to 500 throw distance depends on lens Scanning frequency Horizontal Analog 15 kHz 24 to 100 kHz 24 kHz or greater for RGB inputs conforming to VESA standards Digital 15 kHz 24 to 153 kHz conforming to VESA standards ae ee 48 Hz 50 to 85 Hz 100 120 Hz conforming to VESA standards Digital 24 25 30 48 Hz 50 to 85 Hz 100 120 Hz conforming to VESA standards Main adjustment functions Manual zoom manual focus manual lens shift input signal switching HDMI1 HDMI2 DisplayPort BNC BNC CV BNC Y C COMPUTER ETHERNET auto image adjust ment picture enlarging picture position adjustment muting both video and audio power on standby on screen display selection etc Max display resolution horizontal x Analog 1920 x 1200 handled with Advanced AccuBlend vertical Digital 4096 x 2160 handled with Advanced AccuBlend Sync on G 1 0Vp p 75Q with Sync Composite Sync 4 0Vp p TTL 1 0Vp p 75Q C 286Vp p 750 Component Y 1 0Vp p 75Q with Sync DTV 480i 480p 720p 1080i 1080p 60Hz 576i 576p 720p 1080i 50Hz Input output connectors Computer Com Video input Mini D Sub 15 pin 1 BNC connector x 5 ponent Ster

"user manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;user manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"user manual"